STATIK-8 Engl

STATIK
Manual
Copyright Cubus AG, Zurich
Table of Contents
Vol. A Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A 1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A 1.2 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A 1.2.1 STATIK: Specific Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Vol. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Reference parts for the individual program modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A 1.2.2 Shared Program Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A 1.2.3 Context-specific Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A 1.2.4 Document Format and Document Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Supported PDF Viewers and PdfViewer.ini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A 1.2.5 Printed Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A 1.3 CubusExplorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Program start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A 1.4 CubusViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A 1.5 Program Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A 1.5.1 Base Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Reinforced Concrete Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Steel Member Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A 1.5.2 3D Strucures (Option 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A 1.5.3 Nonlinearities (Option N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A 1.5.4 Specialities (Option S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A 1.5.5 Prestressing (Option V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A 1.5.6 Dynamics (Option D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A 1.5.7 Long-term Analyses (Option L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A 1.6 Procedure for a Simple Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A 2 Working with STATIK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

A 2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A 2.1.1 Presentation Conventions for the Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A 2.1.2 Load Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A 2.2 Starting STATIK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A 2.3 Opening a calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A 2.4 Example1: Portal frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A 2.4.1 Task ............................................................... A-15
A 2.4.2 Member Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Insertion: Point input by snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A 2.4.3 Node input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Insertion: Viewing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Insertion: Undo/Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A 2.4.4 Load Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A 2.4.5 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A 2.5 Example 2: Truss frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A 2.5.1 Task ............................................................... A-24
Insertion: Object-orientied working procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A 2.5.2 Modification of existing and Introduction of new Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Insertion: Changing the properties of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Insertion: Relative input of coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A 2.5.3 Modification of the Right Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
STATIK‐8 i
Table of Contents
Insertion: On inputting nodes and member

........................................................................ A-30
A 2.5.4 Documentation of the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Massification of the Strucure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Set Image Contents with Layer Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Enter Contents of Graphics Area in Print List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Creation of a tabular documentation of the structural data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Print Preview and Printing with the CubusViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A 2.5.5 Load Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Loading Self Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Loading “Roof Load“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Loadings Snow Load Left and Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Loadings Snow Load Left and Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Insertion: General hints on inputting loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Documentation of the Load Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Insertion: Extended Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A 2.5.6 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
Insertion: Clipping Box and Name Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
A 2.5.7 Standard Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
A 2.5.8 Labeling of the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
A 2.5.9 The Tab Sheet /Analysis/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
Result Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
Limit State Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A 2.5.10 Output of the Effective Loads for Envelope Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
A 2.5.11 How to Use the Result Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
A 2.6 Example 3: Spacial Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
A 2.6.1 Task ............................................................... A-47
A 2.6.2 Structure Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
Definition of a Working Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
Completion of the Cross Frame in the Working Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
Multiple Duplicates of the 1st Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
Definition of further Working Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
Selecting Working Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
The Buttons for Projection Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
Completion of the Structure Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
A 2.6.3 Load Input (Surface Loads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
Vol. B Base Module and 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B 2 Basic Theory and Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B 2.1 Basic Considerations regarding Structural Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B 2.2 Solution Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B 2.3 Unstable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B 2.3.1 Not enough Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B 2.3.2 Too many Hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Example 1: Bracing cross with truss members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Example 2: Member rotating about its axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B 2.3.3 Members and/or Member Ends not connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Important Layer Buttons for Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B 2.3.4 Unstable Nodal Degrees of Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B 2.3.5 Instabilities due to 2nd Order Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B 2.3.6 Numerical Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
ii STATIK‐8
Table of Contents
B 3 The Program Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

Control tab sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Graphics Editor Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Layer Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B 4 Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Menu 'File' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Menu 'Settings' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Menu 'Display' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Menu 'Window' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Menu 'Help' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
B 5 Buttons to the left of the Tabsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
B 5.1 About Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
Update Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Manual Print Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
CubusViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
B 5.2 Special Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
B 5.3 Clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
General information on handling the clipping box(es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
B 5.4 Subsystem View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
B 5.4.1 Subsystem Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
B 5.4.2 Steps in defining a new Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
B 5.4.3 Automatic generated subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
B 5.5 Name Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
Special Functionalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
B 6 The Control tab sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24

B 7 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
B 7.1 Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
B 7.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
B 7.1.2 Cross section library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
B 7.1.3 Input parameterized cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Cross section name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Tab sheet Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Miscellaneous tab sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28
B 7.1.4 Input general FAGUS cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
B 7.1.5 Other buttons in the cross-section library dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
B 7.2 Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
B 7.2.1 Members, Member Lines and Member Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
Intersecting Member Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
B 7.2.2 Member Axis and Local Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31
B 7.2.3 Context Menu for Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
Subdivide Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
Intersecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
Exchange Start and End of Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
B 7.2.4 Member Dialog Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
B 7.2.5 Member Dialog - tab sheet 1 - Cross section... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-33
Cross Sections (CS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-33
CS Input / -Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
Member CS and Local Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
Members with changing Cross Section (haunched) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
CS Position with Axis Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-35
Further Properties on the Tab sheet 'Cross Section': . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36
STATIK‐8 iii
Table of Contents
B 7.2.6 Member Dialog - tab sheet 2 - Modified CS Stiffnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36

B 7.2.7 Member Dialog - tab sheet 3 - Hinges at Member Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
Truss Hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38
Truss Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38
B 7.2.8 Member Dialog - tab sheet 4 - Member Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39
B 7.2.9 Member Dialog - tab sheet 5 - Special Connections (Eccentricities...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39
B 7.2.10 Member Dialog - tab sheet 6 - Design Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43
B 7.2.11 Member Dialog - tab sheet 7 - Miscellaneous Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44
Elastically bedded members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45
Member Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-46
Further Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-46
Uniaxial bending about y axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-47
B 7.2.12 Member Dialog - tab sheet 8 - for Steel Member Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-47
B 7.3 Structure Lines, Structure Line Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-47
B 7.4 External Stiffness Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48
Examples of Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48
Dialog 'List of External Stifness Matrices' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48
Complete Example for Joints with Coupling Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49
B 7.5 Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52
B 7.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52
Nodal Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52
Nodes on a Member Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52
Truss Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52
Reference Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52
B 7.5.2 Display of Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
B 7.5.3 Node Dialog Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
B 7.5.4 Node Dialog - tab sheet 1 - Support conditions... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-54
Support conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-54
Dual Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-55
B 7.5.5 Node Dialog - tab sheet 2 - Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-55
B 7.5.6 Node Dialog - tab sheet 3 - Nodal Consraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-56
Definition of a Nodal Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-56
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-56
B 7.5.7 Node Dialog - tab sheet 3 - IDs / Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-58
IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-58
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-59
B 7.6 Construction Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-59
B 7.7 Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-59
B 7.8 Documentation of the Structural Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-60
B 7.9 Check Input / Reset Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-60
B 7.10 Import of Structural Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-60
B 7.11 Export of Structural Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-60
iv STATIK‐8
Table of Contents
B 8 BIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-61
B 8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-61
BIM model ≠ calculation model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-61
Interactive extraction of the calculation model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-61
The module BIMlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-62
B 8.2 BIMlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-62
B 8.2.1 Tab sheet 'Import' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-63
B 8.2.2 Representation of the BIM elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-63
B 8.2.3 Dialog BIM elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-64
B 8.2.4 Tab sheet Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-64
B 8.3 Extract the calculation model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-65
B 8.3.1 Representation of the BIM elements in STATIK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-65
Display after update of the BIM model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-65
B 8.3.2 Transfer of the cross section from the BIM element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-66
Automatic generation of the cross section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-66
B 8.3.3 BIM element: Automatic generation of a member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-66
B 8.4 Export to IFC File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-67
B 9 Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-68
B 9.1 Model of the Load Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-68
B 9.2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-69
B 9.2.1 Create a New Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-69
B 9.2.2 Load Carrying Members and Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-70
B 9.2.3 Outline and Openings of a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-70
B 10 Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-71
B 10.1 Important Terms concerning Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-71
Load Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-71
Load Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-71
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-72
Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-72
Limit state specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-72
B 10.2 Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-72
B 10.2.1 Administration of Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-72
B 10.2.2 Type 'Loading' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-74
Self-weight / Acceleration Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-75
Line and Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-75
Line Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-76
Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-79
Surface Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-79
Area Loads on Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81
Line Loads on Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81
Point Loads on Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-82
B 10.2.3 Type Loading Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-82
B 10.2.4 Type Loading Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-82
Generator for Road Traffic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83
Generator for Non-Motorized Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-85
Generator for General Moving Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86
Generator for Unfavourable Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-88
Loading Combinations from Limit State Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-89
B 10.2.5 Type Influence Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91
B 10.2.6 Type Mass Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-92
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-92
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-92
B 10.2.7 Type Mass Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-93
B 10.3 Representation, Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-94
B 10.4 Import of Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-94
B 10.5 Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-94
Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-94
Actions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-95
STATIK‐8 v
Table of Contents
B 11 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96
B 11.1 Special Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96
B 11.1.1 1st Order Analyses with Initial Deformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-97
B 11.1.2 Dialog for the Specification of Initial Deformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-97
B 11.1.3 Analyses according 2nd Order Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-98
Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-98
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-100
B 11.1.4 Nonlinear Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-100
B 11.1.5 Eigenvalue Analysis for Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101
B 11.1.6 Long-term Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101
B 11.1.7 Eigenvalue Analyses for Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-102
B 11.1.8 Response Spectrum Analyses for Earthquakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-102
B 11.1.9 Lateral Force Method for Earthquake Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-102
B 11.1.10 Time History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-102
B 11.1.11 Reinforced Concrete Analyses with FAGUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-102
B 11.1.12 Externally bonded Reinforcement Analyses with FAGUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-102
B 11.1.13 Timber Analyses with FAGUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-102
B 11.1.14 Wall pillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-103
B 11.1.15 Steel Member Analyses with AVENA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-103
B 11.1.16 MURUS-Pushover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-103
B 11.2 Results Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-103
B 11.3 Limit State Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-104
B 11.3.1 Basic Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-104
B 11.3.2 Overview on the Limit State Specifications (LSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-105
B 11.3.3 Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-106
Definition of the term 'Action' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-106
How Actions arises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-106
Actions List Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-107
Action Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-107
Automatically generated Action Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-109
B 11.3.4 Limit State Specifications with Action Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-109
B 11.3.5 Limit Values of nonlinearly determined results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-110
B 11.3.6 Automatic Creation of Action Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-111
vi STATIK‐8
Table of Contents
B 12 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-112
B 12.1 Results Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-112
B 12.2 Result Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113
B 12.3 General aspects concerning member results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113
B 12.3.1 Section Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113
Quick Section Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113
Design Section Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-114
B 12.3.2 Restricting Result Output to selected Memebrs or Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-114
B 12.3.3 Reference Systems and Sign Conventions for Member Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-114
Section Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-114
Cross Section Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-115
Displacements / Deformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-115
B 12.3.4 Graphics Results (Diagrams) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-115
B 12.3.5 Labeling of Result Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-116
B 12.3.6 Scaling of Result Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-116
B 12.3.7 Highlighting maximum values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-117
B 12.3.8 Restrict tabular result output to individual sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-117
B 12.4 Results for Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-118
B 12.4.1 Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-118
Types of Displacement Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-118
Output variants for cross sections with axis points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-119
Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-120
Settings for Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-120
B 12.4.2 Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-121
B 12.4.3 Section Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-121
B 12.4.4 Cross Section Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-122
B 12.4.5 Nodal Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-123
B 12.5 Influence Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-123
B 12.6 Envelope Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-124
B 12.6.1 Intermediate Results and Values of Residual Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-124
B 12.6.2 Decisive Actions and Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-125
B 12.7 Instability Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-126
Vol. C Dynamic Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

C 1 Natural Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C 1.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C 1.1.1 Modeling of the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Influence of Stiffness on the Vibrational Behaviour of a Structure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C 1.1.2 Modeling the Mass of a Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Input of Mass Distributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C 1.2 Specification of a natural frequency analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C 1.3 Result Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
STATIK‐8 vii
Table of Contents
C 2 Design Response Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

C 2.1 Specification of Design Response Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C 2.2 Standard Spectra of Supported National Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Swiss SIA 261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Variant of the SIA261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Swiss SIA 160 (1989) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Eurocode EC8 (ENV 1998-1, January 2003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Variant of the EC8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Greek Code GRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C 2.3 User-defined Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
Rules of use for a syntax scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
Additional remarks for the input of the spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C 2.4 Graphical Representation of Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C 3 Response Spectrum Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17

C 3.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C 3.1.1 Principle of Modal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C 3.2 Response Spectrum Analysis (RSA) Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C 3.2.1 Selection of the Eigenmodes to be considered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C 3.2.2 Settings for Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
a) For parameterized spectra: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
b) For user-defined spectra: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C 3.2.3 Response Spectrum Analyses (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C 3.2.4 Combining RSA Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
C 3.3 Maximum response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
Superposition Methods for the Maximum Modal Contributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
Combining Results of different Excitation Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
Envelopes for Design Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
C 3.4 Results of Response Spectrum Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
C 3.4.1 Use of the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
Direct Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
Use in Limit State Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
Use in FAGUS reinforced concrete analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
Loads from torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
C 4 Lateral force method of analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28

C 4.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
C 4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
C 4.1.2 Distribution of the total lateral force for general models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
C 4.1.3 Distribution of the total lateral force for generated building models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29
C 4.2 Specification of a lateral force analysis (LFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31
C 4.3 Results of a Lateral Force Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
Output for generated building models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
Output for general models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
Output of spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
C 4.3.1 Generation of the lateral force loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
Lateral Force Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
Loadings from torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
C 4.3.2 Example steel hall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
viii STATIK‐8
Table of Contents
C 5 Time History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36

C 5.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36
C 5.1.1 Principle of Modal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36
C 5.2 Specification of a time integration analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
C 5.2.1 Choice of eigen modes to take into account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C 5.2.2 Choice of damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C 5.2.3 Specification of the analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C 5.3 Calculation of extreme values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
Superposition of maximum modal contributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
Combination of the effects of several excitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
Design envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C 5.4 Results of a time integration analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C 5.4.1 Use of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
Direct use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
Use in envelope specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
Use in reinforced concrete design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-44
C 5.5 Accelerograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-44
C 5.5.1 The dialog for accelerograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-44
C 5.5.2 Selection of an accelerogram from the collection of STATIK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45
Sources de la collection STATIK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45
Add an accelerogram from the collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45
C 5.5.3 Specify a user-defined accelerogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45
Syntax of an accelerogram file („.ACC“) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-46
Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-46
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-46
C 5.5.4 Representation of accelerograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-47
C 5.5.5 Orientation of the accelerograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-47
STATIK‐8 ix
Table of Contents
C 6 Models generated by the Building Module of CEDRUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49

C 6.1 Tab sheet Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49
C 6.1.1 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49
C 6.1.2 Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-50
Global coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-50
Member stiffnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-50
Hinges at member ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-50
Member Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-50
C 6.1.3 External Stiffness Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-51
C 6.1.4 Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-51
C 6.2 Tab sheet 'Surfaces' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-51
C 6.3 Tab sheet 'Loads' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-52
C 6.3.1 Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-52
C 6.3.2 Loadings in torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-53
Loads applied in the center of mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-53
Eccentricities calculated for each storey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-53
Generated loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-54
C 6.3.3 Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-54
C 6.4 Tab sheet 'Calculatios' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-55
C 6.4.1 Special Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-55
Dyn: Dynamic Eigenvalue Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-55
Erk: Lateral Force Analysis (LFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-56
Aws: Response Spectrum Analysis (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-56
FgErk_P: FAGUS RC Analysis for LFA Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-57
FgAws_P:FAGUS RC Analysis for RSA Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-57
C 6.4.2 Limit state specification for the ultimate limit state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-58
!ULS: for the standard design situation (without earthquake) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-58
!EE!Erk: for LFA results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-58
C 6.4.3 Limit State Specification for the Serviceability Limit State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-60
C 6.4.4 Input of Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-60
C 6.5 Tab sheet 'Results' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-60
C 6.5.1 Displacement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-61
C 6.5.2 Acceleration Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-61
C 6.6 Connecting Elements between Separated Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-61
C 6.7 MURUS-P - Earthquake verification for masonry buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-62
Vol. D R.C. Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D 1.1 Sequence of an R.C. Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D 1.2 Prerequisites for an R.C. Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Required Licence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Preparation of the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D 2 Specifying an R.C. Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Input for Prestressed Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D 3 Analysis Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
D 3.1 Reinforcement Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Additional Longitudinal Reinforcement due to Shear/Torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D 3.2 Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D 3.3 Bearing Capacity / Efficiency Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D 3.4 General Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D 3.4.1 Members with variable Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D 3.4.2 Additional Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D 3.4.3 Documentation of the Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D 3.4.4 Further Important Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
x STATIK‐8
Table of Contents
D 4 Result Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10

D 4.1 Settings in the tabsheet 'Results' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D 4.2 Checking Analysis Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Vol. E Specialities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

E 1 Axis Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E 1.1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E 1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E 2 Structure Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

E 2.1 What is a Structure Line? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Position of the cross Sections with respect to the Structure Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
E 2.2 Input of a structure line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
E 2.2.1 Input of the plan view curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
E 2.2.2 Editing the Side View Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
E 2.2.3 Attributes of the structure line segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
E 2.2.4 Attributes of Structure Line Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Eccentric Connections of Structure Line Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Field boundaries for load generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
E 3 Construction stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10

E 3.1 Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
E 3.2 The initial stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E 3.3 The definition of construction stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E 3.3.1 The construction stage dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E 3.3.2 The active construction stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E 3.4 Handling of construction stages in different tab sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
E 3.4.1 CS in the tab sheet 'Structure' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
E 3.4.2 CS in the tab sheet 'Surfaces' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
E 3.4.3 CS in the tab sheet 'Loads' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
E 3.4.4 CS in the tab sheet 'Analysis' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
E 3.4.5 CS in the tab sheet 'Results' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
E 4 Stability Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14

E 4.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
E 4.2 Performing a stability analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
E 4.3 Results of a stability analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
E 4.4 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
E 5 Externally Bonded Reinforcement (EBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17

E 5.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
E 5.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
E 5.1.2 Material and FAGUS specific issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Material Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Bond Coefficient κ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
E 5.2 Performing an EBR analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
E 5.2.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
E 5.2.2 Setting up an EBR Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20
E 5.3 Results of an EBR analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21
STATIK‐8 xi
Table of Contents
Vol. F Prestressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

F 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F 1.1 What the Prestressing module does . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F 1.2 Requirements for the Use of the Prestressing Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F 1.3 Brief description of the most important aspects of prestressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
F 1.3.1 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Structure lines (SL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
F 1.3.2 Input of tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Groups of tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Tendons, geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Tendon attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Variation of prestressing force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F 1.3.3 Prestress loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
F 1.3.4 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
F 1.3.5 Dimensioning, verifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
F 1.4 Input of the side view curve of a tendon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F 1.4.1 Standard input (graphical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
The input of quadratic parabolas is not supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F 1.4.2 Input by a series of parametrized parabolic segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
F 2 Operating the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
F 2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
F 2.2 Dialogs and commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
F 2.2.1 Tendon groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
F 2.2.2 Selecting tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
F 2.2.3 Tendon dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
Tab sheet 'Main' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10
Tab sheet 'Attributes' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11
Tab sheet 'Stressing process' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11
Tab sheet 'Options' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12
F 2.2.4 Input mode for side view curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12
F 2.2.5 Horizontal Eccentricities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13
F 2.2.6 The dialog of the tendon curve points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14
F 2.2.7 Output of tendon geometry and forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-16
F 2.2.8 Checking the tendon input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-16
F 2.2.9 Import of tendon geometry from text file accord. STATIK-3 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-17
Syntax of the text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-17
F 2.2.10 Defining the vertical profile with parametric elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-18
xii STATIK‐8
Table of Contents
F 3 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21
F 3.1 Simple Frame with one Tendon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21
F 3.1.1 Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21
F 3.1.2 Aim and procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21
F 3.1.3 Detailed description of the input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-22
Starting program, material definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-22
Cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-22
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-22
Input of Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-24
Input of live load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-26
Input of result combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-26
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-26
F 3.2 Straight Two Span Beam with Construction Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-28
F 3.2.1 Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-28
F 3.2.2 Overview of procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-29
A) Input of structure and prestressing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-29
B) Task 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-29
C) Task 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-30
F 3.2.3 Detailed description of input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-30
Program start, material definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-30
Input cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-30
Input of the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-31
Input of tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-33
F 3.2.4 Task 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-37
F 3.2.5 Task 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-38
The limit state specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-38
RC-Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-39
Vol. G Nonlinearities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

G 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
G 2 Nonlinear supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
G 3 Tension or compression members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
G 4 Setting up a nonlinear analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
G 5 Results of nonlinear analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
A solution is not always possible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
Vol. H Steel Member Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1

H 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
H 1.1 Requirements for a steel member analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
STATIK‐8 xiii
Table of Contents
H 2 Course of a steel member analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3

H 2.1 Input of the AVENA‐specific member properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
H 2.2 Setting up a steel member analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4
H 2.3 Limit state specification for the analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-5
H 2.4 Performing an analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6
H 2.5 Results of an analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6
H 2.5.1 Results for verifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6
Tabular output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6
Graphic output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-7
H 2.5.2 Results for Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-8
Tabular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-8
Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-8
H 2.6 How STATIK results are used for a steel member analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-8
H 2.7 Results from response spectrum analyses (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-10
H 2.8 Elevated temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-13
H 2.8.1 Member proprieties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-13
H 2.8.2 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-13
H 3 AVENA-specific evaluation of the limit state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-15
H 3.1 Setting in the steel member analysis dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-15
H 3.2 AVENA-specific evaluation of the limit state specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-16
H 3.3 Use of the STATIK results for a steel member analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-17
Response Spectrum Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-18
Vol. I Long‐term Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

I 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
I 1.1 Requirements for a long‐term analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
I 2 Basic Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-2
I 2.1 Creep function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-2
I 2.2 Shrinkage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-3
I 2.3 Calculation algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-3
I 2.4 Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-5
I 3 Performing a Long‐term Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-6
I 3.1 Members and Construction stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-6
I 3.2 Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-7
I 3.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-7
Removal of supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-7
I 3.2.2 Time‐dependant loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-8
Shrinkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-8
Temperature changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-8
Prestressing loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-9
I 3.3 Definition of a 'Long‐Term Analysis' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-9
I 3.4 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-10
I 3.5 Checklist / Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-11
I 4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-13
I 4.1 Two‐span girder with field-by-field construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-13
I 4.2 Additional Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-14
xiv STATIK‐8
Table of Contents
Vol. J FAQ–Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

J 1 Base Module, Graphics Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
J 1.1 Circular or Spiral Member Rows, Spiral Staircases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
J 2 Specialities, Structure Lines, Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
J 2.1 Generating a structure line from a chain of lines or members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
J 2.2 How to introduce a new structure line point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
J 2.3 Import tendon geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4
2D (side view curve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4
STATIK‐8 xv
Table of Contents
xvi STATIK‐8
A 1 Overview
Vol. A Introduction
STATIK‐8
A 1 Overview
A 1.1 Introduction
In its basic module, STATIK is a computer program for the linear‐elastic analysis of general
planar frame structures according to the theories of first and second order. Despite the va
riety of possibilities in structural modelling and in the evaluation of results it is charac
terised by very straightforward and standardized handling.
The definition of the member cross sections via the base module of the cross section pro
gram FAGUS, which is included with STATIK.
Apart from the basic module, the following additional modules are also available:
S Extension on three dimensional frame structures
S Module for the calculation of non-linear supports and truss members
S Module with a number of special features, like nodal constraints, construction stages,
buckling loads and positioning of cross sections by means of axis points
S Prestressing
S Dynamics (natural vibrations, response spectrum method)
S Long-term effects
S FAGUS analysis module for various analyses like stress and ultimate load verifications,
design, interaction and moment-curvature diagrams, etc. for reinforced and pre-
stressed concrete and composite cross sections.
S Automatic verifications with program AVENA (Analyses of steel members)
STATIK can be used to solve complex structural analysis problems. This by the nature of
things can involve a series of error sources, from statical modelling to data input, from nu
merical problems, and even in the interpretation of results. Unfortunately there may also
be actual programming errors, which for such extensive software, despite all the care taken
in the development, cannot be completely excluded. Important prerequisites therefore for
the use of STATIK are an adequate technical knowledge and the checking of results by
means of rough calculations and plausibility considerations.
STATIK is under continuous development by Cubus AG. Any suggestions and wishes are al
ways welcome. In the case of major improvements the user will always be informed of the
release of a new program version.
Minor deviations in the program, such as selfexplanatory changes in the dialog not
mentioned in the manual, may occur.
We would like to draw attention to the Cubus licence agreement, governing both user
rights regarding STATIK and the passage “Limited Guarantee”.
A 1.2 Documentation
A 1.2.1 STATIK: Specific Topics

All topics specific to STATIK are treated in the first document of the manual. It is structured
as follows:
STATIK‐8 A-1
Vol. A Introduction
Vol. A
Part A introduces the program STATIK. It consists of the chapters:
A1 Overview with the following sub-chapters
A 1.1 Introduction
A 1.2 Documentation
A 1.3 CubusExplorer
CubusExplorer is the central administration tool for all tasks related to Cubus appli
cation programs. The calculation data is managed with the CubusExplorer. In
addition, all license settings and updates are processed via CubusExplorer.
A 1.4 CubusViewer
The CubusViewer collects all outputs, which together comprise the printable report.
It presents a preview of the report, which can then be edited and printed in part or
as a whole.
A 1.5 Program Modules
Here the features of the basic module and all optional program modules are de
scribed.
A 1.6 Procedure for a Simple Analysis
A 2 Introductory examples
To help first-time users of the program, three introductory examples of increasing comple
xity are provided. The autodidact cannot ignore them since the following chapters are of
a reference character, i.e. the modules treated are described in detail and are thus not very
suitable for gaining an overview of the whole program.
. It is highly recommended that for learning to use STATIK these three fairly short chapters
are worked through thoroughly before making a serious attempt at analysis.
Reference parts for the individual program modules

Part A, with an overview and the general introduction, is followed by other parts with detai
led descriptions of the base module and all optional program parts. They have a reference
character, i.e. they provide all necessary information both to the basic theory as well as to
the use of the program.
A 1.2.2 Shared Program Modules

Separate documents describe in detail the shared parts of the program used by different
Cubus programs. Worthy of mention here are the documents for the following modules:
S CubusExplorer: It represents the central module for administration.
S Graphics Editor: It describes the basic program-independent functionality for the in
put, modification and presentation of objects on the screen.
S CubusViewer: This module is for printing and previewing output documents.
S Building materials and analysis parameters: Describes the handling of building ma
terials and analysis parameters for the cross section program FAGUS.
A 1.2.3 Context-specific Help

Context-specific help is activated using the function key <F1> or using the [?] buttons in the
various dialogues.
A 1.2.4 Document Format and Document Access

As mentioned above, the program manual consists of one program-specific and several
shared documents. These documents are in PDF format and can be accessed directly in the
menu “Help“. The context-specific help also uses these documents and jumps directly to
the desired position. As a pre-requisite, a supported PDF viewer has to be installed.
A-2 STATIK‐8
A 1 Overview
Supported PDF Viewers and PdfViewer.ini
A viewer for PDF files must be installed and automatically be called when opening a PDF file.
The program supports the AcrobattReader from Adobetand some other well known
viewers.
The file ...\Cubus Software\XXXX\CubusShared\Manuals\PdfV iewer\PdfViewer.ini lists all
the supported viewers together with the calling syntax to be used. Other viewers may be
added if they support the necessary calling parameters and if the calling syntax is correctly
registered.
. The term "XXXX" above refers to the latest version which is installed (for example, 1924)
with always 4 digits.
If the ini file is modified it should be copied to the directory
...\Cubus Software\Config\CubusShared\Manuals\PdfV iewer\ because the file at the origi
nal location will be overwritten when installing an update. The program looks for the file in
the indicated Config directory first.
A 1.2.5 Printed Manuals
In general, no printouts of the manuals are supplied with the program, as these are regu
larly revised and supplemented. The corresponding documents are in PDF format (menu
„Help ...“) and can be printed by the user as required.
A 1.3 CubusExplorer
Introduction
CubusExplorer is the central administration tool for all Cubus applications. More detailed
information about CubusExplorer can be found in the corresponding manual from all appli
cations via „Help“ > „CubusExplorer“.
Every installation of Cubus programs includes CubusExplorer. It is the central module in the
use of the programs and serves the following purposes:
S Start of the individual application programs
S Management of the calculation data
S Management of installation, licenses and updates for the application programs
Program start
You start CubusExplorer and have the platform to call all other Cubus programs.
A simple and possible method for starting CubusExplorers in all current Windows versions
works as follows:
Tap the Windows logo key and then cubusexplorer. Usually the first three letters are
enough and „CubusExplorer“is suggested.
Usually an entry is created for the CubusExplorer in the start menu, which simplifies start
ing.
All application programs are started by CubusExplorer using the buttons on the left.
STATIK‐8 A-3
Vol. A Introduction
Call of applica
tion programs
Folder paths to Calculations in the opened Preview of the selected

calculations calculation folder calculation
All data belonging to a calculation model are generally referred to as calculations. A STATIK
calculation, for example, means all data of a calculation with the STATIK program.
The data of a calculation can be saved anywhere on a mass storage device (e.g. hard disk).
In the uncompressed state, it is a folder with several subfolders and numerous files.
The CubusExplorer is the central platform for the use of Cubus programs and serves
1) for conveniently finding and managing the calculation data of Cubus programs. It is
a Windows Explorer specially tailored for this task.
2) to call up the installed application programs. On the one hand, these can be called up
directly via the associated button. On the other hand, existing calculations know which
program they belong to, i.e. if a calculation is marked, it can be opened directly with the
associated application program using the [Edit] button.
3) to manage the installation of Cubus programs and their licenses.
A-4 STATIK‐8
A 1 Overview
A 1.4 CubusViewer
Menu- and
tool bar
List of print entries Preview
Everything printable can be sent directly to a printer. The standard way, however is to make
print entries in a list managed by the CubusViewer and thus create a report that can be pre
viewed and modified and then printed as a whole.
The print entries from CubusViewer collected in a list with the aim of finally being able to
print a parent report. The CubusViewer has a print preview and numerous ways to custom
ize the report to the desired shape, such as designing the page layout, scale adjustments,
changing the order and to individual entries, etc.
A report, that the list of print entries in Cubus Viewer can also be used as a calculation rule
but to
S after changes to the information on a calculation to update the report back and auto
matically perform the necessary calculation steps to
S for some (for example, newly entered) calculation to produce the results of a sample re
port automatically.
The CubusViewer may also be used to store results of different states or variants of a struc
ture for later comparison.
. A complete guide to CubusViewer is accessible under the Help menu > CubusViewer.
STATIK‐8 A-5
Vol. A Introduction
A 1.5 Program Modules
The capabilities of the available program options are briefly described in the following sec
tions.
A 1.5.1 Base Module

The Base Module of STATIK covers the static analysis of plane frames and trusses according
to the theories of first and second order. Plane means that all bars, loads and deformations
lie in the (X, Z) plane of the global coordinate system.
Structure
DZ
DX The plane frame node has

3 degrees of freedom
RY
X
Y
A structure consists of member and node objects:

S Members with the following properties
- Prismatic members or members with linearly varying cross section
- Optional shear deformation
- Arbitrary hinges at member ends; each displacement component can be dissolved in
dividually and may be provided with an elastic spring
- Truss members
- Eccentric connections = rigid connection line between node and start or end of a
member
- Adjustable FE subdivision (for second order or eigenvalue calculations)
- Arbitrary result sections
S Nodes with the following properties
- 3 degrees of freedom: displacements X, Z and rotation about Y
- Standard (=global) or rotated node coordinate system
- Support conditions individually selectable for each DOF (free, blocked or elastic sup
port)
- Node constraints (linear dependencies between nodal deformation parameters); e.g.
rigidly connected nodes
A-6 STATIK‐8
A 1 Overview
Loads
Loads consist of load elements, which are combined to loadings. Results are available for
loadings or combinations of loadings. STATIK offers the following load element types:
S Nodal Loads:
- Forces, moments, prescribed displacements and rotations acting in the directions of
the nodal coordinate system
S Member Loads:
- Forces, moments, strains, curvatures, accelerations
- Concentrated or linearly distributed, acting on a part of or the entire member. Strains
and curvatures act in the local coordinate system, but forces and moments can act in
the local or in the global coordinate system.
- Eccentric line loads
S Influence line loads:
- Influence lines can be calculated for section, displacement and support quantities
Results
Directly available are the following results in different numerical and graphical representa
tions:
S for single loadings or combinations of loadings:
deformations, reactions, section forces, cross section results (stresses, strains) in arbi
trary member sections.
S The following limits on the basis of limit value specifications (superposition rules):
envelopes for deformations, reactions, section forces, cross section results
Reinforced Concrete Analyses

Reinforced concrete analyses in arbitrarily definable design sections based on section force
envelope results are possible, provided that
S there is a license for the option analyses of FAGUS (the same program generation as STA
TIK)
S the cross sections contain the necessary reinforcement layout
The allowable analysis types cover the design of reinfocement cross sections, verification
of bearing capacities and stresses.
Steel Member Analyses

The steel member analyses provided by the program AVENA can automatically be carried
out from STATIK for all or a chosen set of members. This feature needs an AVENA license (the
same program generation as STATIK).
A 1.5.2 3D Strucures (Option 3)

The features of the 2D base module are generalized for 3D structures. The 3D version offers
in addition:
S Surface loads: Point, line and area loads on definable plane surfaces
S Structure lines for more efficient handling of curved structures like bridges (needs also
option S)
S Rendered representation of the structure in the undeformed and deformed state
S This option is a pre-condition for using the option prestressing.
STATIK‐8 A-7
Vol. A Introduction
A 1.5.3 Nonlinearities (Option N)

With this option support components can be treated that carry only positive or negative
forces or moments (e.g. tension free supports).
Similarly, the option allows the introduction of tension-free or pressure-free truss
elements.
The results are calculated for single loadings by an iterative procedure.
A 1.5.4 Specialities (Option S)

This option offers features that are useful mainly but not only for the analysis of bridges.
They cover:
S Structure lines for an efficient handling of curved member lines. Only structure lines
can hold tendons (prestressing module). Structure lines require the option 3D.
S Axis points for a correct positioning of cross sections: they are a cross section property
and allow a definition of the member axis independent of the center of gravity and thus
a correct superposition of section forces over construction stages with varying cross
sections.
S The concept of Construction Stages allows the introduction of loadings acting in diffe
rent construction stages. This makes it possible to superimpose results calculated in dif
ferent stages of the construction process. Examples: temporary supports during con
struction stages, completion of bridge cross sections in later construction stages (e.g.
by deck), cantilever method in bridge construction, etc.
S Elastic Stability Analysis provides the “buckling load“ of an entire structure under an
optional constant initial loading and a variable loading that is increased until the struc
ture becomes instable.
S Externally Bonded Reinforcement (EBR) Analysis together with the option Analysis
of the cross section program FAGUS (verification of forces in EBR strips, bond stresses,
anchorage zones ...)
A 1.5.5 Prestressing (Option V)

The prestressing module permits the input of tendons with respect to geometry, cross
section, material, friction values and prestressing procedures. STATIK automatically evalua
tes the impact of the tendons on the structure.
The tendons are also taken into account when automatic reinforced concrete (RC) analyses
are carried out. The tendons (position, prestressing force, ...) in every dimensioning section
are automatically introduced into the cross section.
A 1.5.6 Dynamics (Option D)

This option serves to calculate the natural vibrations of a structure. Furthermore, it features
earthquake analyses based on the static-equivalent force and response spectrum me
thods.
It is useful for all kinds of structures but it is also specially designed to be used as an earth
quake analysis tool for buildings created by the CEDRUS building module.
A 1.5.7 Long-term Analyses (Option L)

This module is capable of modelling the effects of creep and shrinkage of concrete
members and the relaxation of prestressing tendons. Typical applications of this module
are the calculation of pre-camber curves for balanced cantilever bridges or the simulation
of stress redistribution due to a staged construction process.
All calculations are executed on the system level, i.e. the long-term characteristic is
specified for whole members. Therefore differentiating behavior of cross-section elements
(e.g. in composite structures) cannot be directly modeled except by introducing multiple
eccentrically connected members.
A-8 STATIK‐8
A 1 Overview
A 1.6 Procedure for a Simple Analysis
The aim of a standard STATIK analysis is the determination of deflections, reactions and sec
tion forces for a truss or frame structure subjected to a series of given loadings and finally
the determination of the design values (envelopes) of the mentioned quantities.
The following explanations should show, in a very summary way, how such an analysis pro
ceeds.
Firstly, with the help of the CubusExplorer (see A 2.3) a new analysis is created. It includes
the name of the analysis and the path to the directory in which the analysis data should be
stored.
The program STATIK then opens with the following window:
Menu
Control Tabsheet
Drawing
Tools
Drawing
Area
Layer Buttons
Control
Presentation
The Control tabsheet of STATIK gives an overview of the essential steps in an analysis. Every
tabsheet contains the tools to input and check the corresponding objects.
The following tabsheets are used in a given sequence (from left to right):
Member input
Node input for Not available in Buttons for checking
Cross sections supports basic module and documentation
Here you will find the buttons for entering and modifying the member structure as well as
additional buttons, e.g. to generate a tabular documentation of all structural data and to
check the structure input.
STATIK‐8 A-9
Vol. A Introduction
A STATIK structure consists mainly of bars (members). The most important button therefore
is the member input button. Clicking on it calls the member dialog which contains all the
necessary member properties divided into several tabsheets. With the button [Create] a
member with the properties set in the dialog is defined by drawing its axis as a line:
The input of nodes is necessary for the introduction of support conditions. In addition to
the button for general supports there are some buttons for frequently used standard sup
ports.
The input is object-oriented which means that objects like members or nodes can be selec
ted at any time and then be modified by calling the context menu (right mouse button).
Management of the loadings Load elements Documentation

and checks
This tabsheet is used for the load input. Loads are organized in so called loadings which
contain one ore more of the following load objects:
- Acceleration loads e.g. for self-weight
- Member loads (forces, moments, strains and curvatures, concentrated or linearly dis
tributed)
- Nodal loads (forces, moments, prescribed displacements and rotations)
Loadings are the basic units addressed for the output of results.
STATIK also allows one to specify combinations of existing loadings and offers loading
generators for an efficient evaluation of different loading configurations.
A special kind of loading is provided for the calculation of influence lines for section forces,
displacements and reactions.
Definition of special
analyses
Result com Envelope

binations specifications
A-10 STATIK‐8
A 1 Overview
For many standard calculations you will not need the tabsheet /Analysis/ since the limit
state specifications for the evaluation of design value envelopes are generated automati
cally .
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
All results are requested by clicking the flash button. They are produced according to all the
settings in the Results tabsheet.
1) This field shows a tree view with everything for which you can get results (loadings,
result combinations, envelope specifications, special analyses, ...)
2) This combobox offers then result types available for the selected item from list 1). If
a loading is selected, the available result types are displacements, reactions, section
forces and section results
3) Here you select the type of representation, normally graphic or numeric output
4) Often you have to choose a component for a selected result type
5) Tools defining the result sections for members
6) With the flash button you start the calculation of the specified result.
Example: My for a trapezoidal load on a simple frame:
STATIK‐8 A-11
Vol. A Introduction
A 2 Working with STATIK
A 2.1 Introduction
After two short sections dealing with starting the program and opening a new analysis
some examples are provided, which introduce you to the main aspects of the use of the pro
gram. The examples are ordered according to increasing complexity or according to spe
cially treated topics and are partly developed one from another. Since all users do not have
the 3D option, firstly the examples for plane frames are dealt with and then those for 3D
structures.
It is absolutely necessary that you work through these examples, which are intended as an
introduction, before you attempt real projects. You will then be familiar with the logic of the
program and for further details on the use of the program you can always consult the Help
System of STATIK, whose frequent use we highly recommend. It can be called in different
ways:
S By clicking on the menu “Help” in the menu bar of the program. A list of all available help
documents appears, which one can go into directly. One of these is called “Use of Help”.
It provides instructions on the use of the help system.
S By pressing the key <F1>, you can get specific help on the current action (e.g. inputting
a point) or on the input element to which the mouse pointer currently points.
S Many of the dialog windows that appear during the input have their own help button
for information on the corresponding dialog.
It is assumed that the user has some basic knowledge of the use of the Windows operating
system. This includes the use of the mouse, windows (move, zoom in and out), the “Start”
menu, task bar, the clipboard and the Windows‐Explorer.
. As common in Windows, one works generally with the left mouse button. Clicking or se
lecting a symbol on the screen means: move the mouse pointer onto the symbol and then
press briefly the left mouse button. The right mouse button is used only to show the con
text menu of an object selected or pointed at.
A 2.1.1 Presentation Conventions for the Examples

For all application examples the following presentation conventions hold:
S All actions to be carried out are indented and marked as follows:
" Description of action
S All bold print in the description of an action has to be typed exactly with the following
exceptions.
S Special keys enclosed in <..> (e.g. <Enter>=<>, <Esc>, <F1>, etc.)
S The mouse buttons are abbreviated with <LMB> and <RMB> (left and right)
S Buttons on the screen are shown in square brackets (e.g. [Cancel])
S Words in italics like Click, Select, ... are clearly predefined user actions
S An entry to be chosen in a menu is displayed, e.g. „Options”>„Language”>„German”)
A 2.1.2 Load Examples

The examples described below are stored in your program installation and can be viewed
and loaded using the help system. This applies especially also to examples that are not de
veloped again from scratch, but serve as an initial situation for modifications and exten
sions.
A-12 STATIK‐8
When editing a loaded example not the original, but an automatically created copy in the
TEMP folder of Windows is used. The original data cannot be lost and you can load an exam
ple as often as you like.
Loading an example is done as follows:
" Start STATIK directly, as decribed under 1) in the next chapter and from the menu bar of the
program select: „Help”>„Load Examples”>„Base module“>„Name of an example”.
A 2.2 Starting STATIK
STATIK can be started explicitly from the CubusExplorer sidebar or implicitly by choosing
a STATIK project in the CubusExplorer. The CubusExplorer is an independent utility to man
age analysis with different Cubus programs.
You may start the CubusExplorer via the Start menu of Windows, for standard installation:
[Start]>Programs>Cubus>CubusExplorer>.
There is an alternative way to open CubusExplorer:
Press Windows key and then type cubusexplorer. Mostly satisfy even the first three
letters and Cubus Explorer is proposed.
A 2.3 Opening a calculation
Start the CubusExplorer using the Windows start menu. If you are doing this for the first
time, then it will respond as shown left. Click on the “+“ beside “My Computer“ and the re
sponse will be as shown on the right or similar.
The CubusExplorer is very similar to the Windows Explorer. The difference is, above all, that
in the left window only those directories are shown that you want and these are normally
those containing analysis data of Cubus programs. For a detailed description of the Cubus
Explorer refer to its “Help“ menu.
For our examples we want to create a folder called “STData” on a disk drive (here F:), on
which we want to store our computations. Basically, you have complete freedom in setting
up a folder structure for storing computations and you can reorganize and rename or move
folders at any time .
STATIK‐8 A-13
Vol. A Introduction
Click first on the symbol of the desired hard disk, and then on the symbol to create fold
ers.
You could now select one of the shown subfolders and make it visible in the CubusExplorer
by klicking on the button [choose].
However, we want to create a new folder and therefore select the place (drive or folder),
where the new folder should reside (in our case ). To create a new folder we
click on top right.
A new folder appears at the desired level, which we rename as “STData” and then with the
button [Choose] we place it in the CubusExplorer:
Now select the newly created folder and then click on the button shown on the left to create
a new analysis. Directly below the button there appears a row of buttons for all installed
Cubus‐Programs. Select the symbol for STATIK, whereupon in the middle window of the
CubusExplorer a new computation entry with the standard name “ST‐computation” ap
pears. Since the name of the new computation is already highlighted, you can rename it di
rectly by typing in an appropriate and descriptive name.
Thus you have now created the computation folder, and you can start STATIK with the but
ton [Edit] bottom right in the CubusExplorer.
After opening a new computation the dialog window “General Options” appears, which al
lows one to set some analysis-specific parameters, above all the text parts, which appear
in the page headers of the printed output as well as the choice of code and structure type.
A-14 STATIK‐8
. Settings can (with the exception of the structure type) via the menu 'Settings' > 'General ...'
be changed anytime.
. After openinge a new calculation, open the possibility to import input data from previous
STATIK calculations. To do this, use from the main menu 'File' > 'Import'.
A 2.4 Example1: Portal frame
A 2.4.1 Task
2 8
HEA280
default construction steel S
5 kN/m
uprights
(columns):
4.6 rectangular cross
section
ÏÏ
b x h = 0.2 x 0.35
default concrete C
16 m
Requested results: section forces, reactions, displacements edge stresses
Aim: To become acquainted with the general procedure in an analysis. This is basi
cally the same for more complex analyses.
" Start the program (according to Ch. A 2.2) and open (according to Ch. A 2.3) a new compu
tation with the name Ex.
STATIK‐8 A-15
Vol. A Introduction
First comes a dialog (abbreviation for dialog window) to describe the analysis. The contents
appear partly in the page header of the printed output. The descriptive text is for the pur
pose of archiving
" Fill in the dialog according to the figure and then click on [OK].
Now the STATIK window looks as follows:
Buttons for printing, Tab control serving as main Menue bar

print entries ans Cu menue of the application
busViewer
Layer buttons
Graphics edi
tor tools and
commands
Working area
Buttons for layer
groups
Undo / Redo
Coordinate fields Status line
The register above the working area serves as the main menu for controlling the applica
tion. It consists of several tabsheets, one for each program part, like structure, loads or
results. The tab sheets as well as the buttons within the tab sheets are ordered from left to
right in the sequence they are normally used when a calculation is carried out.
A-16 STATIK‐8
A 2.4.2 Member Input

Now we input the frame structure according to the given task and begin with the left col
umn.
" Click on the button for the “Member“ dialog in the tab sheet /Structure/.
The default cross section is not the one we need. We have to define it first.
" Open the dialog “cross section library“:
STATIK can work with two types of cross section (called CS henceforth):
1) Parameterized CS: there are two libraries, one for hot rolled profiles and one for general
paramterrized CS
2) General CS, defined in the cross section analysis program FAGUS
The concrete column has a rectangular CS of 0.2 x 0.35 m.
" Click on the icon for creating a new parametrized CS, which leads to the following dialog:
" Overwrite the CS name with “STUETZE“.

. CS names cannot be changed later. Don't forget to overwrite the name and be sure what
name you choose!
. CS names must be defined in uppercase letters. If necessary they are automatically trans
formed.
STATIK‐8 A-17
Vol. A Introduction
. The parameters (including the CS type) can always be changed.
" Choose the rectangular CS from the tab sheet /Solid/ and fill in the parameters according
to the requested task (see figure above).
As material we accept the proposed “C(...)“ for a standard concrete. If you want to find out
more about materials, choose the menu >Options>Materials> and the help button in the
dialog that appears.
" Close the CS input with [OK] to return to the CS library.

Let's also input the second CS, a “HEA280“ profile, which we need for the beam.
" Click again on the icon for creating a new parameterized CS .
" Overwrite the CS name with “TRAEGER“.
" Fill in the rest of the dialog as follows:
" then [OK].
" Close the CS library.

The member dialog should now be active again. It is shown below and includes all the ne
cessary member properties. The most important one, which has always to be specified, is
the cross section. It is located on the first tab sheet. The other less often used properties are
placed in the other tab sheets. If they differ from the standard values, the tab is colored so
that this fact can easily be recognized.
Tab sheets for all the

properties
CS library
For choosing one of
Chosen CS the defined CS
Image of the chosen

CS
For searching of mem

bers with given
property(ies)
To introduce a mem
ber with the given Help button
properties
The columns don't have hinges or other special properties of the backmost tab sheets.
A-18 STATIK‐8
" Choose the CS “STUETZE“ from the CS combo box and leave all the other properties un
changed as given by default. The dialog is now ready to introduce the first column member.
Z
4.6
16 m
ÏÏ
" Click on [Create] in the “Member“ dialog, in order to input the left column member.
The mouse pointer now takes on the form shown on the left and indicates that a point has
to be input. One of the point input methods is to type in its coordinates. We take the bottom
left of the frame as the origin of the X,Z coordinate system, in which X points to the right and
Z upwards.
" Type 0 <> 0 <> for the start point
" and 0 <> 4.6 <> for the end point of the member
We input immediately afterwards the second column, which has the same cross section:
" Click again on [Create] and type
16 <> 0 <> for the start point and
16 <> 4.6 <> for the end point of the member
For the beam we have to choose another CS:
" Choose the CS “TRAEGER“ in the still open member dialog
" [Create] in the still active “Member“ dialog.
To input the member we now grab the existing points of the tops of the columns. The proce
dure is explained in the following box.
Insertion: Point input by snapping

Point input by snapping (= Select) is done by moving the mouse
pointer near the point to be snapped until a small circle is shown on
the upper left of the pointer; by clicking in this state the new point is
created at the location of the point nearest to the cursor.
" Select for the start point of the member the top of the left column and for the end point the
corresponding one on the right
" Close the “Member“ dialog ([x] upper right)
The member input is now completed.
A 2.4.3 Node input

Nodes are the points of a structure where the displacement parameters are introduced. The
program generates them automatically at locations where members are connected to each
other or where members end without any connection.
members
automatically created nodes
(connection assumed)
STATIK‐8 A-19
Vol. A Introduction
In cases like those shown above, the program assumes connections between members, if
not specified otherwise.
Such automatically created nodes are not visible by default. If nodes need special
properties like support conditions however, they have to be introduced by the user.
To complete the input of our structure, we have yet to specify the support conditions. For
this purpose we have to introduce notes with the respective properties. For the most com
mon support types there are special buttons in the tabsheet /Structure/. For special con
ditions like elastic supports you have to use the general node dialog.
general node dialog for direct introduction of nodes with the

corresponding support conditions
" Click on the button shown for a freely rotational, fixed displacement (i.e. pin-joint or
hinged) support
" Select the bottom of the left column
" Click on the button for a fixed support
" Select the bottom of the right column
If the now completely input structure is not properly centered in the working area then
" Click on the button shown (Graphics Editor tool on the left edge of the screen)
Insertion: Viewing parameters
Redraw Filling on/(off

Zoom in Zoom out
Clipping by
window Previous view
Entire structure Move view
centered (panning)
. Use context help for further information (<F1> over one

of the buttons shown)
Insertion: Undo/Redo
With a klick on the Undo button you make the last graphics editor input step undone.
You can go back as many steps as you like. Use <Ctrl>+<Z> as a shortcut.
Use the Redo button to redo the previously undone steps. Shortcut <Ctrl>+<Y>.
A 2.4.4 Load Input

" In the tab control change to /Loads/
Loading administration Load elements Checks and

echo print
A-20 STATIK‐8
If you enter the tabsheet /Loads/ with no loadings defined yet, a loading for the dead loads
of the whole member structure is generated automatically. If you don't need this loading
you may delete it as we will do for our example.
" Click on the button shown in order to delete the predefined loading “SW“
We now want to input the loading of our example:
2 8
5 kN/m
" Click on this button to create a new loading

" Leave the dialog unchanged as shown below and close it with [OK]
The Identifier identifies the loading. The Title is purely for descriptive purposes. The cor
rect assignment to an Action Category permits, for simple cases, an automatic creation of
design envelope specifications. It is of no interest in our example as well as the construction
stage.
" Click on the button for line loads, and set the dialog as shown:
STATIK‐8 A-21
Vol. A Introduction
. Since the Z axis points upwards, loads usually have to be input with a negative sign.
" Click on [Create]
The program expects the input of the start and end points of the line load.
. It is suggested to use Relative Input, which you can activate with the key <R>.
" Type R
The following coordinate input is now related to the reference point, which is set by a pre
vious input and displayed by a small red triangle. It can be moved - before you start typing
the coordinates - to any existing point by clicking on it.
" Select the left start point of the beam to move the reference point there. The red triangle
should now point to this location.
" Type 2 <> 0 <> for the start point of the load and (relative to this point)
" R 8 <> 0 <> for the end point
. After inputting the first point of a line, the reference point for relative input is automatically
put there.
" Close the dialog
" Click on this button in the /Loads/ tabsheet to obtain a reasonable scale factor for the load
display
The input is now complete. The structure should now appear on your screen as shown be
low, if you switch on the support layer button:
How to document a structure numerically and graphically you will find out in the next ex
ample.
A 2.4.5 Results
The linear solution for the given loadings is performed automatically. You can begin view
ing the results immediately.
" In the tab control change to /Results/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Results can be called in portions in any order. Specify first the desired result and representa
tion (points 1..6) and then click the flash button 7 .
1 Make the result tree visible by clicking on the small arrow button to the right of this field.
The result tree contains everything you can get results for.
2 Depending on the setting in (1) the available output quantities can be selected here (dis
placements, reactions, section forces, etc. ).
A-22 STATIK‐8
3 Select here the type of representation. Normally the two buttons shown for graphical and
numerical output can be selected.
4 Here you select the desired component of the chosen output quantity
5 For results that are output in member sections a section specification is required. There is
a quick specification valid for all members (left button), by which either the number of sec
tions per member or a maximum section spacing is specified and an individual section
specification for design purposes (middle button). By clicking on the right button the set
tings for the selected specification type can be modified.
. The section specification is used both for the tabular and for the graphical output. For bet
ter quality graphics use a closer section spacing.
. For the quick specification, depending on the output quantity, additional sections are au
tomatically created according to the existing loads. At the location of a concentrated load
for example you will get the expected discontinuity of the shear force.
Depending on the settings in the areas (1)..(5) there are other presentation parameters (e.g.
amount of labelling or scale factor for graphics), which can be set in the dialog for this but
ton.
With this button the creation and display of the results is initiated according to all the set
tings in the tab sheet.
" Try to output all possible results for the one loading by varying the settings.
STATIK‐8 A-23
Vol. A Introduction
Here you see a selection of results. The printing is discussed in the next example.
. The results shown here are based on a Young's modulus E of 34 kN/mm2 for the concrete
material C (columns) and 210 kN/mm2 for the steel material S (beam). You can change the
material properties in the dialog called by the menu >Options>Materials>.
. The menu “Display“ offers several display options. Try some of them out. To get help, move
the cursor to one of the menu entries and then press <F1>.
A 2.5 Example 2: Truss frames
A 2.5.1 Task
Aims: - Basic knowledge of Graphics Editor
- Load input, loading combinations
- Documentation/printing
- Subsystems, display filters
- Result combinations, envelope results
A-24 STATIK‐8
1.6
1.2
RRW120/80/6 HEB160
4.6
HEB300
16 m
Loadings: [kN/m]
Self weight Roof weight Snow left half Wind from left
Snow right half Wind from right
Self weight mem
ber structure 20 16 16 4..10 4..10
or
Results: ‐ Results for user defined loading combinaions

‐ Limit state values of different quantities for structural safety verification
Special: The frame input in Example 1 serves as a starting point

" Start STATIK directly and open the stored Example 1 with the help command in the menu
bar: >Help>Load Examples>Base module>'Example 1>.
In contrast to Example 1, in which only new objects were input, here we also want to modify
existing objects. This is accomplished for all objects following the same so-called object-
orientated procedure:
Insertion: Object-orientied working procedure
You select the desired object(s), then press the right mouse button to get the context
menu showing the functions that are possible with all the selected objects.
. If you can't find a certain function in the context menu, then it may be
that you have also selected objects that don't go with this function!
It is important to know how to select objects.Besides clicking and using windows there
are other very useful selection methods, which are essential to know about. Therefore
read now chapter 6.2 in the graphics editor manual.
In addition this button top left in the STATIK window offers some useful STATIK specific
member selection methods. More about these later in the example.
A 2.5.2 Modification of existing and Introduction of new Members

First we want to adapt the cross sections of the existing members to the new task.
" Change to the tabsheet /Structure/ if necessary
" Select the beam
" Press the right mouse button (<RMB>)
STATIK‐8 A-25
Vol. A Introduction
" Select “Attributes“ from the context menu (the member dialog appears):
" Click on the shown button for the cross section library. Define a new parametrized CS. Give
it the name “GURT“ and select the hot rolled profile “HEB 160“.
" Close the CS library and select the beam.
" Select the CS “GURT“ in the member dialog
. The button [Apply] becomes active, as soon as you change anything in the dialog. The num
ber in brackets following “Apply“ is very helpful. It shows how many objects are selected
(even before the button is active), i.e. to how many objects the changes will apply.
" Click on [Apply] (bottom of member dialog)
Insertion: Changing the properties of objects
- select an object or several similar objects,

- press the right mouse button
- select from the context menu the line “Attributes“
- in the appearing dialog change the desired property(‐ies)
- click on the button [Apply]
For the columns we don't want to create a new CS but modify the existing CS “STUETZE“:
" Click in the still open member dialog on the button for the CS library
" Select the CS “STUETZE“ and then press the button for editing
" Select the profile “HEB 300“ and close the dialog with [OK]; close also the CS library dialog
. We don't need to change any properties of the column members, since they keep the CS
“STUETZE“, which we changed in the CS library according to the task.
Now the new members have to be added. First we input the lower chord. In order to learn
a new possibility of the Graphics Editor we want to create it by duplicating the upper chord.
" Select the beam, which will serve as upper chord

" <RMB> > “Duplicate“
The “Duplicate“ dialog offers several possibilities for the single or multiple duplication of
objects. For a complete explanation click on the help button [?] of the dialog.
" Set the dialog as shown
. With the arrow button in the dialog one can pick up distances with the mouse, which how
ever is not yet possible here.
A-26 STATIK‐8
" Click on [Preview], and you can see beforehand, how the program duplicates using your
settings.
" If the preview shows what you want select [OK]
Now come the lattice members. We input the first diagonal member, then the neighboring
diagonal. The others can then be generated by duplicating and mirroring (creating a mirror
image).
" Open the “Member“ dialog

" Click on the shown button for the cross section library. Define a new parametrized CS. Give
it the name “STREBE“ and select the hot rolled profile “RRW120/80/6“.
" Close the CS library, select the CS “STREBE“ in the member dialog and then [Create]
" Select as start point of the diagonal member the upper left end of the column
" Type in (relative input) R1.6<> -1.2<>
Insertion: Relative input of coordinates
Often it is easier to work with relative rather than absolute coordinates. Type in<R> be
fore typing the coordinates of a point, so that the values do not refer to the origin of the
coodinate system, but to the so-called reference point.
The reference point is shown by a small red triangle. Before typing in the coordinate values
it can be moved to any existing point by clicking on it. As default value the program always
chooses the last point input.
" Once more [Create] for the neighboring vertical member with the same CS.
" As start point select the bottom end point of the diagonal member.
To construct the end point there are various possibilities, which are shown by the context
menu:
" <RMB> brings up the context menu
The available methods are self-explanatory from the name. For details query the help sys
tem, by moving to the line to be queried and then pressing <F1>. Go quickly through the
list so that you know more or less what possibilities are available. In our case we use “Mouse
movement in Z direction“. As soon as you gain experience with the Graphics Editor you will
not need the context menu every time but use the short cut directly (key <Z> ). Such a short
cut you know already from the relative input method.
" Select “Mouse movement in Z direction“
You can still move the mouse pointer over the whole working surface. But in addition to the
standard cursor there is a second cursor, shown as a small black triangle, which can only
move in the Z direction. It shows the position at which a point is introduced by clicking.
STATIK‐8 A-27
Vol. A Introduction
" Move the mouse cursor as close to the upper chord until it shows the line snapping symbol,
and then click
Line snapping symbol
Cursor restricted
to movement in Mouse cursor (cross)
Z direction
The left half of the lattice we can now generate by duplicating the first two members four
times::
" Select the two members just input (open window from right to left, as shown).
A B
" <RMB> > “Duplicate“
" Click on this button in the “Duplicate“ dialog and grab the “Displacement Vector“ by click
ing on the points A and B.
" Set the number of duplicates to 4
" If the [Preview] is as wanted select [OK]

Since the lattice girder is symmetrical, we can generate the remaining members by mirror
ing:
" Select all lattice members except the one on the axis of symmetry, which does not need to
be created again (open window from right to left not touching the horizontal members)
" <RMB>
" Keep the <Shift>‐key depressed and select from the context menu “Mirror“ (with <Shift>,
the original is not lost when mirroring)
" Click on member m in order to define the axis of symmetry.
. If no member exists on the desired axis of symmetry, one can be introduced beforehand for
this purpose and deleted afterwards. Any line, even an auxiliary line (see later) can be used
as an axis of symmetry.
A 2.5.3 Modification of the Right Support
In the first example the support at the bottom of the right column was fully fixed. Now we
want to change it to a pinned support. We could simply delete it (Select, <Delete>) and
create a new one, but we also want to practice the procedure for changing an object
property for a node:
" Select the right support
A-28 STATIK‐8
" <RMB> > “Attributes“
" Click on the button with the desired support type; then on [Apply] and close the dialog
With this the input of the structure is finished. Although the program saves data in se
lectable intervals, we want now explicitly to make a save, not to lose what has been input.
" Click on the button to save the current state (safety measure, not absolutely necessary)
We now want to make a complete documentation of the structure, but let us before show
a very important insertion about inputting nodes and members:
STATIK‐8 A-29
Vol. A Introduction
Insertion: On inputting nodes and member

Crossing or touching members are, if not otherwise specified in their attributes, rigidly
connected in the points at which they cross or touch.
There is, mainly for numerical reasons, a minimum member length lmin. This minimum
length also applies to elements of members, which arise as a result of intersection or any other
subdivision of the input members. The length lmin can be adjusted in the main menu, under
>Options>Tolerances> if necessary. In view of numerical problems, however, care
should be exercised in this. Even the default settings of the program cannot guarantee nu
merical stability for all possible structures. If there are numerical problems the solution mod
ule issues a warning.
There is a second tolerance value dtol that defines a maximum distance between two points
up to which the two points are regarded as having the same location. It's called visible tole
rance and can also be changed in the menu 'Options > Tolerances'. It must be at least two
times smaller than lmin and should be handled with the necessary care.
The same tolerance value dtol also holds for points near the axis of members. If the distance
is smaller than dtol, the point is considered to lie on the member.
Finally, in the case of space frames, dtol is also used by the program to establish if two mem
bers intersect in space. For this to be the case their shortest distance has to be less than dtol.
A 2.5.4 Documentation of the Structure

An important part of a statical analysis is the complete documentation of the input data.
For our example we want to carry out the following steps to document the structure's data:
S Complement the view of the structure by introducing dimensioning as in the task de
scription
S Switch on/off the desired layer buttons
S Insert a figure of the structure in the printing list
S Create a text legend with all structural data and enter it in the printing list
S Call the CubusViewer to see a print preview, to set possible presentation parameters
and to print the report
Massification of the Strucure

Located on the right edge of the STATIK‐5 window is the layer bar. Structural objects of the
same type are grouped in layers, which is also a well known feature of CAD systems. By click
ing on the layer buttons the corresponding layers are made visible or invisible. Further de
tails are given below.
For printing purposes you may want to complement the structure with information like di
mensioning or additional labeling. These drawing parts are created in layers of the group
“User“, in which the button for the first user layer is already provided. You can distribute the
additions to the drawing over different layers by creating any number of additional user lay
ers using the context menu of the group header “User”.
Sometimes it happens that points which one wants to input have to be constructed using
auxiliary Help Points and Help Lines. Such constructions are also carried out in user layers.
Here constructed points can be grabbed during the input of structure objects.
To be able to draw in a user layer, it first has to be made the active layer (do not confuse this
with making a layer visible):
" <RMB> on the button of the existing user layer and then in the context menu on the line
“active“
Now all drawing tools of the Graphics Editor are active.

" Click on the dimensioning tool
A-30 STATIK‐8
" Fix the direction of the dimension line by selecting the upper or lower chord
" Click on a position through which the dimension line should pass (a little distance below
the support)
" Click now in sequence on the points that you want to include in this dimension line, i.e. here
on both support points
" Close the dimension line with <Esc>
1.6
1.2
4.6
16 m
" Proceed in the same manner for the three remaining dimension lines in the figure above
Try here also the other drawing tools and delete the corresponding “creations“ using Undo.
.
Set Image Contents with Layer Buttons

As mentioned above, the view of the structure in the graphics area can be influenced by
turning on the desired layer buttons. Try out the various layer buttons and
" Choose at the end the settings shown on the left.
Note also the context menus both for the group buttons (structure, surfaces, ...) and for the
layer buttons (<RMB> click). If you want to know more about the individual menu items
then make use of the help system (<F1> on the corresponding line).
. The program takes care of storing in the corresponding layer for the non‐user objects
(nodes, members, loads, results, etc.). Only in the user layers does the user explicitly need
to make the layer active, in which he wants to draw. This is done in the context menu of the
corresponding layer. Only one layer can be active at any one time. As soon as one begins
to work again with structural objects, any active user layers are automatically deactivated.
The creation of further user layers is done in the context menu of the group button “User“.
Enter Contents of Graphics Area in Print List

The contents of the graphics area can be sent directly to the printer at any time (upper but
ton) or entered in the output list for later printing using the lower button. Both buttons
open a dialog, which among other things gives the option, whether a figure should be cre
ated with the complete contents of the graphics area or with only a part of it. For details on
the “Print entry“ dialog use its help button.
Here we want to enter a figure of the whole structure:
" Click on the button for a print entry and then on [OK] in the unchanged “Print entry“ dialog
" Turn off the visibility of the dimensioning layers
Creation of a tabular documentation of the structural data

" Click on the button for checking the structure (is prerequisite for creating a structure leg
end)
STATIK‐8 A-31
Vol. A Introduction
" Click on the button to create a structure legend (top right in the /Structure/ tabsheet)
The structure legend, as all text output, is created in a separate window, which looks as fol
lows:
Buttons for
- printing
- creating a print entry
- copying all tables to clipboard
- copying selected part to clipboard
- searching
List of tables - print preview mode
- table settings
- compact view
The marked table

in the list above is
shown here
In print preview
mode all tables
are visible
" Click on the print entry button in the text output window
" Close the text output window
Print Preview and Printing with the CubusViewer

Up to now we have created two print entries, one with the image of the structure and one
with the structural data in tabular form. We now call the CubusViewer to see a preview of
the report and to print it .
" Click on the button for the CubusViewer
The CubusViewer appears in a separate window and should look approximately as shown
in the following figure, in which you can also see its most important functions. A detailed
description of the CubusViewer can be found in the main menu, under
>Help>CubusViewer> in the STATIK window,
In the menu “File“ the printer
can be selected
Print the report consisting of
all visible entries
Page setup (size, header, ...)
Visibility setting
Move up or down the selec

ted print entry or a selected
block of entries
Zoom functions for preview
Tabular list of print entries
Window with preview of active

print entries
Print entries can be modified either by clicking directly in the fields of the tabular list or by
using the context menu for selected entries.
Print entries are selected by clicking on them in the tabular list or by clicking in the preview
area. A group of entries is selected in the list by using the <shift>-key. All entries are selec
ted with <ctrl>+<a>.
A-32 STATIK‐8
The context menu shown below is opened as usual with the right mouse button, which
must be located within the tabular list area. For some functions the location of the cursor
within the list is important when clicking (e.g. the insert of text function).
Note the possibility of changing the scale of figures.
" Print the report and then close the CubusViewer
A 2.5.5 Load Input

According to the task description the following 5 loadings have to be input:
Self weight Roof weight Snow left half Wind from left
Snow right half Wind from right
Self weight mem
ber structure 20 16 16 4..10 4..10
oder
Values in [kN/m]
" Change to the tabsheet /Loads/

First we want to delete any existing loadings.
" Click on the delete button shown (several times if necessary).
Loading Self Weight
" Select the new loading button
STATIK‐8 A-33
Vol. A Introduction
" Fill in the dialog as follows, then [OK]:
In contrast to Example 1 we set the field “Category“ correctly for each loading, which will
allow the program to automatically create an envelope specification (see later).
. The list of the offered standard categories corresponds to categories specified in the codes
for the structure type set in the General Options dialog after opening the computation.
" Select the button for acceleration loads
. For the automatic generation of body forces, like dead load or statically equivalent earth
quake loads, accelerations are input. On the basis of the mass/length unit of the member,
which is known for each cross section (also for composite cross sections), STATIK is able to
generate the corresponding inertial loads.
For the most frequent case of dead loads there is a special option field in the dialog for ac
celeration loads, for which an acceleration of +10m/s2 is given by default. If you would pre
fer to use 9.81 or another value, you can change the value accordingly and then save the
dialog as default for further projects (in the menu bar:
>Options>Dialog Settings>Save as Default>).
This type of storing works with most dialogs and can also be carried out directly with
<Ctrl><F9>.
" Set the dialog for acceleration loads as shown below
A-34 STATIK‐8
" [Create]
The load is displayed in the form of a circular labeling box.
Loading “Roof Load“
20
" Select the new loading button

" Input RL as identifier and Roof Load as title and assign the loading to the action “Superim
posed DL“ (DL=dead load).
" Close the loading dialog with [OK]
" Select the button for uniformly distributed member loads
" Set the dialog to “Force“, “Global“, “Z“ and the Force value to -20
You could enter the load by clicking on [Create] and then drawing the load line as it was
done in example 1. However, if loads act on whole members, the following procedure may
be more convenient:
" Click on the indicated button to make the members selectable
" Select the upper chord member an then click on
" Close the dialog and adjust the display scale factor with the indicated button
Loadings Snow Load Left and Right

16 16
" Create a new loading

" Input SnowL as identifier and Snow Load Left as title and assign the loading to the action
category “Snow“ and subcategory “500 m aSL“
" Select the button for line loads
" Set the dialog to “Force“, “Global“ , “Z“ and the “Force“ value to -20
" [Create]
" Input the load line by selecting its start point at the left end of the upper chord and its end
point at the top of the vertical member in the middle of the chord
" Input also the loading “Snow right“. You can do it in the same way or duplicate the current
loading with the indicated button and then adapt its dialog and move the load. For moving
the load select it, then use the command “Move“ in its context menu, select the now visible
start or end point of the load and put it down by snapping the point of its new location.
Loadings Snow Load Left and Right
" Create a new loading

" Input WindL as identifier and Wind Load Left as title. Assign the loading to the action cate
gory “Wind loads“
STATIK‐8 A-35
Vol. A Introduction
4..10 4..10
or
In contrast to the two snow loadings, the two wind loadings act exclusively, i.e. they cannot
act simultaneously. This is important for the automatically generated envelope specifica
tions.
" Activate the control field “exclusive superposition“:

" Select the button for line loads
" Set the dialog to “Force“, “global“, “X“ , switch off the “uniform“ field and set the “Force“ val
ues to 4 and 10
" [Create]
" Input the load line by selecting the bottom and top end points of the left column
" Input the loading “Wind Load Right“ in the same way
Insertion: General hints on inputting loads
Point and line loads are stand-alone objects, which have no direct connection to nodes
and members and therefore- at least during the input - can also” hang” freely in space.
The connection of loads to the structure is established by the program only when a load
ing is checked (carried out manually or automatically at solution time). For loads that do
not lie “exactly” on members or nodes at checking time an error message is issued.
Line load Point load

representation
d
start point of input end point of input
load line load line load line load point
The load line has to lie exactly on the axis of the member on which the load should act (or
on a straight line of axes of more than one member) in order to be accepted when checking
is carried out.
In the same way the input load point of a point load has to lie on a member axis or a node
in order to be accepted when checking is carried out.
The input load line as well as its end points are only visible when the load is selected. The
same holds for the input load point.
The spacing between input load line / point and load representation can be set in the load
attributes.
Documentation of the Load Input

We also want to document the load input in graphical and tabular form.
A-36 STATIK‐8
" Select in the list box “loading“ all loadings one after another and make for each one a print
entry (with or quicker with the key <F11>)
" Click on this button in the /Loads/ tabsheet. The dialog with the loading list opens:
This list shows all input loadings with their most important attributes. It also contains but
tons for creating a new loading, for modifying the properties of an existing loading, for
deleting selected loadings, for selecting all empty loadings and for creating a legend for all
existing loadings.
With this button at the bottom of the dialog you can create a table with the contents of the
loading list dialog with the common print entry button.
" Select all loadings with <Ctrl>A
" Create a legend for the selected loadings
" Examine the result and then make a print entry (button within table window)
" Close the legend window and also the dialog with the loading list
Now we want to check the preview of our report, adjust the scale of the graphical loading
entries and then print the load entries.
" Click on the button for the CubusViewer

Since we made the graphical print entries with standard settings, the pictures will fully
exploit the page size
Page size
exploited
The scale of the loading pictures with exploited paper size is about 1:100. Since half the size
seems to be enough, we will set the scale to 1:200.
" Select all graphical loading entries in the list and
STATIK‐8 A-37
Vol. A Introduction
" Get the context menu with <RMB> and select “Attributes“ therein
" Make the changes as shown above, then [Apply]

The changes should be visible in the preview
If we now want to print all entries relevant to the loading documentation, then we have to
make the first two entries with the documentation of the structure invisible. Normally one
would print everything together at the end.
" Make the first two entries invisible
" Print the visible entries
Insertion: Extended Member Selection
In addition to the standard methods for selecting objects STATIK offers some specialized
and powerful tools for the selection of members.
This button (top left in STATIK window) opens a menu with these tools.
Move the cursor on one of the menu items and press <F1> for a description.
A 2.5.6 Subsystems
Subsystems (abbreviated in the following to SS) allow you to limit the visibility of the mem
bers and nodes to selected objects. As many SS as desired can be defined, whereby an
object can belong to several SS. SS do not have any effect on the statical system, which al
ways comprises the whole structure.
With large systems having hundreds of members, working without the aid of SS is unthink
able. But also with small systems, as in our example, SS can be very useful for the output of
results.
SS can be defined, extended and modified at any time. Normally the SS are defined during
the input of the structure, since they can be useful already at early stages of the input.
SS can also be used for selecting members (see insertion above).
We want to introduce the following SS here:
S Columns
S Upper chord
S Lower chord
S Verticals
S Diagonals
A-38 STATIK‐8
" Open the tabsheet /Structure/ and click on the indicated button to define subsystems (top
left in the STATIK windowr
An SS with all nodes and members not yet assigned to an SS is defined and maintained by
the program automatically.
We now introduce the partial system “Columns“:
" Click on the button for a new SS
A new entry in the “Subsystems“ dialog is created.
" Overwrite the default name with “Columns“
" Select the two columns
" Click on the button “Setup marked subsystem with selected objects“
. Since the SS is still empty, you could here also use the neighboring button for adding
objects to a SS.
" Define the two SS “Upper chord“ and “Lower chord“ in the same way
To define the SS for the lattice members, we will use one of the special member selection
tools. Let's start with the vertical members:
" Click on the button for a new SS and call it “Verticals“
> " Click on the button for special member selection and then in the appearing menu on the
button to select all members in a particular direction
" Click on a vertical member
" Keep the <Shift>‐key pressed and click on both columns to deselect them
" Click on the button “Setup marked subsystem with selected objects“
We use the same procedure for the diagonal members:

" Click on the button for a new SS and call it “Diagonals“
> " Click on the button for special member selection and then in the appearing menu on the
button to select all members in a particular direction
" Click on the first diagonal on the left, to select all members with this direction and then on
.
> " Click again on the button for special member selection and then in the appearing menu on
the button to select all members in a particular direction
" Click on a diagonal with the other direction
" Click on the button “add selected objects to the marked SS“
Now all the SS have been defined. We want to see a partial view with the upper chord and
the columns:
STATIK‐8 A-39
Vol. A Introduction
" Activate only these two SS, then

Click on the button [Preview]
" Close the SS dialog with [OK]

With this button you can switch at any time between the overall view and the SS view. In
order to change the SS settings, call the “Subsystems“ dialog.
With this button pressed the invisible objects are displayed in a special dimmed color. The
color settings can be adapted in the menu >Display>Colors/Line type...> in the tabsheet
/Graphics editor/ under “inactive objects“.
Insertion: Clipping Box and Name Filter
In addition to the subsystems there are two other means for setting the visibility:
1) Clippingbox The visibility can be reduced to a region enclosed by

a rectangle, the so called clippingbox. In case of
3D‐structures the clippingbox is a cuboid. (press
<F1> for detailed information)
2) Name Filter Some objects, like members for example, have ID's. If
you enter a text in the filter field, then only those objects
are visible whose ID's contain the filter text. (press
<F1> for detailed information)
A 2.5.7 Standard Results

As shown in example 1 you can now change to the tabsheet /Results/ and get all possible
results for all specified loadings. In addition to these results the program also offers results
for limit values (envelopes). Before asking how they come about, we want to try out the pro
cedure to view these results.
" Open the /Results/tabsheet and choose “!ULS“ (for Ultimate Limit State) in the branch “En
velope results“ of the results tree (first list field to the left of the tab sheet)
" Choose the other settings in the tab sheet as shown below:
" Get the requested result calculated and displayed
A-40 STATIK‐8
Because of overlapping figures the graphical presentation of results for all members is
sometimes not satisfactory. How to overcome this problem is discussed below.
For a calculated envelope result there are comprehensive intermediate results and, de
pending on the result type, also associated components. All of these results are grouped
together in a separate result dialog, which is opened by clicking on the button to the left:
E.g. here's how to check the contribution of the dead load for a calculated envelope of nor
mal forces:
" Click this button to open the extended dialog for envelope results.
" Open the branch “Actions“ in the tree and choose the entry “Snow load 500maSL N“ of the
branch “Actions“
" Get the result (section force envelope N) for the selected action
. The dialog remains open as long as you don't close it or don't change settings for the result
calculation that are incompatible with the selected result in the dialog.
" Choose “Envelope values N“ on the top line and let the program display these results again.
The displayed image showing the normal force limit values is rather useless, since every
thing is drawn one on top of the other. STATIK offers several ways of limiting the result out
put to only some of the members:
S If members or nodes are selected, the results are only displayed for these objects. This
method is suitable for having a quick look at a result anywhere. For a properly planned
output of results it is better to use the next method.
S For a subsystem view the results are only drawn for the objects of this view. Therefore,
for a comprehensive graphical output of results for a complex structure you need a se
ries of subsystems specially prepared for this purpose.
S For 3D structures there is an additional tool to customize the presentation of results: the
working plane. For detailed information see example 3 (A 2.6) of this chapter.
The mentioned methods can also be used in combination.
We want to view here once again the above normal force limit values in a partial view with
the columns and the upper chord:
" Call the subsystem dialog and activate the SS “Columns“ and “Upper Chord“, then [OK]
" Switch on the subsystem view
" Generate the results again

Even if the limit value results window is open you can change to any subsystem view and
have the results displayed accordingly.
The following figure detail shows how the requested results image should look approxi
mately:
" Close the limit value results window if it is still open
STATIK‐8 A-41
Vol. A Introduction
A 2.5.8 Labeling of the results

This button leads to a dialog with settings for the output. Its contents depend on the selec
ted output quantity and output type and looks as follows for internal force envelopes:
für grafische Ausgabe: für tabellarische Ausgabe:
With this box checked a The output can be re

second output table is duced to the individual
generated, conaining the sections of the design
decisive loading combi section specification
nation for each result va
lue
The labeling of an image already produced can still be influenced afterwards. With a double
click on a results diagram (e.g. a moment line) the following dialog appears, with which you
can extend or reduce the labeling as desired (click on [?] for more detailed information):
The labeling of a result image (created automatically or by hand) can also be switched on
and off as a whole at any time. Click with the <RMB> on the button of the corresponding
result layer button (see Ch. A 2.5.11) and switch on “Show labels“ in the context menu:
Result layer buttons
A 2.5.9 The Tab Sheet /Analysis/
Definition of spe Result com Limit state

cial analyses binations specifications
As you will have already noticed several times before, the functions of the /Analysis/
tasheet are not needed to produce standard results. The buttons which are available here
serve the following purposes:
A-42 STATIK‐8
With this button a series of special analyses can be defined, including analysis according to
2nd order theory. We will not discuss this further in this example.
With this button result combinations (combination of loading results) with arbitrary factors
can be defined, which then appear in the result tree in the /Results/ tabsheet, and for which
the same results as for individual loadings can be obtained. In contrast to the limit values
subsequently described we are dealing here with fixed combinations of loading results.
. Don't mistake result combinations for loading combinations. Result combinations com
bine results of individually calculated loadings. Loading combinations, however, combine
loads of different loadings to a new loading, which is then calculated as a normal (single)
loading. For linear calculations both constructs lead to the same results. In the case of non
linear calculations it is not allowed to superimpose results and result combinations are the
refore not feasible. In normal cases it is recommended to use result combinations. For non
linear calculations you must work with loading combinations.
This button is used to define limit state specifications, which permit the determination of
design limit state values (envelopes), as described in Ch. A2.3.2.
If the loadings were assigned to the correct action categories when input, e.g. dead loads,
STATIK automatically creates limit state specifications such as “!ULS“ for the ultimate limit
state and and others for serviceability limit states according the rules described in B 12.6.
If the generated specifications don't match your needs, you have to define your own speci
fications.
Result Combination
We want to determine the displacements of our structure under all dead loads and the full
snow load. Since these loads only exist as individual loadings, we need to define a corre
sponding result combination, for which we can then obtain the required results.
" Change to the /Analysis/ tabsheet and click on the button for result combinations
The following dialog appears:
Administraion of
result combina
tions Transfer
button
Combination
List of existing list
loadings
Load
factor
" Click on the button to create a new result combination

" A dialog appears in which you enter the name “FullLoad“; close the dialog with [OK]
" Press the button if the loadings should be sorted by actions.
" Click on the loading “RL“ in the loading list (left list field of dialog)
" Be sure the load factor is set to 1.0
" Click on the transfer button to transfer the loading into the combination list
" Proceed in the same way with the other loadings until the desired combination is obtained
" Create a tabular list of the defined result combination and click on to make a print entry
of it
STATIK‐8 A-43
Vol. A Introduction
" Change to the /Results/ tabsheet

" Open the result tree by clicking on the small arrow key within the left-most input field of
the tab sheet
" Select “FullLoad“ in the new branch “Result combinations“
" Get the displacement results; the maximum value for DZ should be -39.50 mm.
Actions
The limit state specifications described below are based on actions. We already heard
about actions when we introduced new loadings and had to assign an action category to
each loading.
All actions used in a computation are recorded in a list which can be viewed and modified
in the “Actions“ dialog. Note the load and combination factors belonging to the actions.
They are used by the program for the automatic generation of the limit state specifications.
" Open the tab sheet /Loads/ and click on the button for the “Actions“ dialog.
The list shows all actions that are used (i.e. assigned to a loading) in the actual computation.
When introducing a new loading, the program offers a standard list of actions according to
the code and the structure type defined in the general options. If the user needs a special
action that is not offered in the standard list, he can define it within the “Actions“ dialog.
Limit State Specifications

We don't need any user specified limit state specifications in our example, but we want to
look in more detail at the automatically generated specification “!ULS“.
" Open the tab sheet /Analysis/ and click on the button for limit state specifications. The cor
responding dialog appears:
Administration
of limit state
specifications
View/modify the
action specifica
tion
A-44 STATIK‐8
The dialog shows the list of all used actions and the generated four action combinations.
An action combination defines how the actions are to be combined for reaching a limit
state (hazard scenario) according to the codes.
An action comprises all loadings assigned to its category. If several loadings are involved,
we need a rule to decide how these loadings are to be combined. These rules are called ac
tion specifications.
Let's have a closer look at the specification for the action “Wind loads“:
" Click on the line “Wind loads“ in the left field of the dialog,
" then on the button for viewing/modifying the specification of the selected action.
The following dialog appears:
The dialog is very similar to the one for result combinations described above. The loadings,
however, cannot just be given a factor and added to a fixed combination but adopted in
different ways into the specification field, depending on whether a loading can, e.g., act in
addition to the previous one or alternatively to it. The transfer buttons between the two
lists are disabled here because the action specification is automatically generated and can
not be modified.
In our case the two loadings “WindL“ and “WindR“ of the action “Wind loads“ act alterna
tively (either/or). For each result value only one (the critical one) of the two loadings is
considered.
For more details use the help buttons in the dialogs.
A 2.5.10 Output of the Effective Loads for Envelope Values

In order to fully reconstruct an envelope value, there is the possibility to output the list of
the effective loadings for every result value.
We recommend printing out first the list of all envelope specifications involved, showing
all the actions and all loadings and their combinations.
As an example let's document the effective loads for the normal force envelope results for
the limit state specification “!ULS“:
" Open the /Results/ tabsheet and set it up as follows:
STATIK‐8 A-45
Vol. A Introduction
" Open the “Settings for output“ dialog and activate the check box “incl. effective load“
" Initiate the calculation.
Two tables are created:
The first table shows the envelope values and the corresponding hazard scenarios (No. of
decisive action combinations):
No. of the decisive action combination
The effective loadings are listed in the second table:
We recommend printing out first the envelope specification involved, showing all the ac
tions and all the loadings and their combinations the table above is referring to.
The effective loadings can also be output for all the actions individually that contribute to
the envelope results. We want to do it for the action “Snow load ...“:
" Click on this button in order to open the extended envelope result window and choose the
action “Snow load ... N“
" Initiate the output of the limit values of the action “Snow loads...“
A-46 STATIK‐8
Similar to the total envelop results for N you get two tables with the contribution of the ac
tion “Snow loads ...“ to the total results :
A 2.5.11 How to Use the Result Layers

The graphics results are also stored in layers. There is a layer group that includes the (maxi
mum) 6 last result layers identified by increasing numbers. Older result layers are deleted.
Saving the last up to 6 result layers serves the following purposes:
1) You can switch back and forth quickly between the most recently created results.
2) Graphics results can be “superimposed” by making more than one result layer visible.
To do this you have to keep the <Shift> key pressed when clicking on a result layer but
ton, as otherwise the already active results layers are deactivated.
Some relevant comments:
S Limiting to the six last result layers was deliberate, since they can use up a lot of memory.
This number cannot be changed by the user.
S When closing a computation the result layers are always deleted. This is also done for
storage economy.
S By making print entries any number of result images can be stored and looked at again
at any time.
A 2.6 Example 3: Spacial Structure
A 2.6.1 Task
Aims: - 3D aspects
- projection control
- working planes
- surface loads
Prerequisites:
- license for 3D option
- basic knowledge in using STATIK
(you have worked through the two introductory examples above)
" Start STATIK and begin a new computation
" Select “3D“ and as structure type “Building“ in the dialog “General Options“
By selecting a 3D structure the program switches automatically to the 3D representation,

in which the buttons for projection control are visible. We do not want to deal here with pro
jection control.
STATIK‐8 A-47
Vol. A Introduction
HEA320
HEA140
3.86
Intermediate floor:
transverse: HEA160
longitud.: HEA140
4.30
4.34
5.20
4.34
4.34
4.34
4.34 2.50
Y 2.50
Bracing:
all ROR108/5.6
4.34 X 5.00
4.34 5.00
3.50
HEA280
all columns:
Point support
Loadings: Weight of roof sheeting Snow, whole roof Wind, whole facade
[kN/m2] only applied to mem (only applied to mem (applied to all members
bers in Y‐direction) bers in Y direction) except bracing )
2.1
0.8 1.2
0.6
A 2.6.2 Structure Input

We want to begin with the input of the first cross frame (X,Z plane) and then duplicate it sev
eral times in the Y direction. First we input both outer columns:
" Open the “Member“ dialog and select as cross section a HEA280 profile; as material accept
the suggested construction steel.
" [Create] in the “Member“ dialog (for the higher column)

Z
type in the start and end coordinates:
0 <> 0 <> 0 <>
0 <> 0 <> 8.16 <>
X
" [Create] in the “Member“ dialog (for the shorter column), Y
" type in the start and end coordinates:

18.5 <> 0 <> 0 <>
R0 <> 0 <> 5.2 <> (relative!)
Close the “Member“ dialog
A-48 STATIK‐8
Definition of a Working Plane

For a better handling of complex structures, there are on the one hand the subsystems, with
which you are already familiar. Another concept involves the working planes for 3D struc
tures. In the plane mode (of a specific working plane) the visibility is restricted to this plane
and you work two-dimensionally in the u,v coordinate system of the plane. The view can,
as desired, be two or three dimensional.
We want to input the rest of the first transverse frame in the plane mode and for this pur
pose to define the corresponding working plane:
" Click on the button to define the plane (beneath the zoom tools); the dialog “Working
Planes“ appears
" Select the button to define a new working plane; the dialog “New Working Plane“ appears
" Give it the title XZ_01
Z
" Click on the arrow button and select the points A, B and C C
(in this order), to define the plane, and then [OK] B
With the first point A you define the origin of the X

u,v coordinate system of the working plane. Y
A
A,B and C together define the plane and also an
orientation. In the 2D view of the plane A,B,C will appear
clockwise.
" Close the “Working planes“ dialog
After defining the working plane you are in the plane mode which means that only the
objects within this plane are visible. In the plane mode you can choose between the 2D and
the 3D view.
Plane mode <> To define and administrate working planes
3D mode
2D<>3Dview
Completion of the Cross Frame in the Working Plane
" Switch to the 2D view (click on [3D] button to deactivate it)

" Open the “Member“ dialog and create a cross section with an HEA320 profile for the roof
beam
V
" [Create] the roof beam by B
clicking the points A and B A
U
" Select the left column
" <RMB> > “Duplicate“ ;
In the “Duplicate“ dialog set the direction vector
to (1.0, 0.0) and select “Spacings“;
in the corresponding input field type the list of spacings
3.5 5 5 2.5 followed by [OK]
" The four columns should still be selected;
<RMB> > “Trim“;
select the roof beam as trimming line, to which the
columns have to be trimmed
" Open the “Member“ dialog and create a cross section with an HEA160 profile for the in
termediate floor beam
" [Create] (Member dialog);
type the start coordinates 0 <> 4.3 <>
STATIK‐8 A-49
Vol. A Introduction
To input the end point press the key U

(mouse moved in u direction)
and click on the neighbouring column
" Create a cross section with an ROR108/5.6 profile for
the bracing members,
Introduce the members with [Create] and
clicking on the respective end points
" Select the button for point supports
" In order not to have to repeatedly select this button for the input of several supports, click
> on the already activated point tool of the Graphics Editor to activate the repeat mode
" Click on all bottom points of the columns and close the
repeat mode with the <Esc> key
" Exit the plane mode, whereupon the program automatically changes to the 3D view
Multiple Duplicates of the 1st Frame

We now want to make seven duplicates of the input frame including its working plane and
supports but without the bracing, at a uniform spacing of 4.34 m.
" Make sure the working plane layer is visible (i.e. the layer button shown is down)
" Select all objects with <Ctrl>A;
keep the <Shift>‐key pressed and click on the bracing members and on the 3rd column
as well as on its support to remove them from the selection
" <RMB> > “Duplicate“;
in the “Duplicate“ dialog set the vector to 0, 4.34, 0 and the number of duplicates to 7;
if the [Preview] is O.K, press [OK]
. Don't forget the Undo function, with which you can go back as many steps as you like, if any
thing goes wrong.
" Click on the centering button (or the key <F3>)

to see the whole structure
B
C
" Select the bracing members and the
3rd column with its support in the 1st frame
D A
" <RMB> > “Duplicate“;
click on the arrow button and grab the vector
between the duplicates by clicking e.g. on E and D
and set the number of duplicates to 1;
E
if the [Preview] is O.K, then press [OK]
Definition of further Working Planes

" Open the working planes dialog and define a new plane called “Roof“ with the points A (ori
gin), C and B (see figure above)
" Define in the same way the plane “YZ_01“ with the points D,C,E
and a plane “Floor“ for the intermediate floor
" Exit the plane mode
" Duplicate the symbol for the plane YZ_01 in the X direction with the spacings 3.5 5 5 2.5
2.5
A-50 STATIK‐8
Selecting Working Planes
" Open the “Working plane“ dialog (if it is no longer open)
You can see that by duplicating the plane symbols the planes XZ_02, XZ_03, ... and YZ_02,
YZ_03, etc. have been generated.
" Click in the dialog on the plane XZ_01 in order to switch to the plane mode of this plane
" Press now the <Down Arrow>‐key and you will note that this is an elegant way to walk
quickly through the planes in the order of their entry in the dialog
" Exit the plane mode by clicking on the button shown on the left or by selecting “(none)“
in the “Working planes“ dialog
You can also switch between plane mode and 3D mode by double clicking on a working
plane symbol. Activate the layer with the working plane symbols to make them visible.
" Double-click on one of plane symbols and you get into the plane mode
" Double-click on the plane symbol in the plane mode, and you are in the 3D mode again
The Buttons for Projection Control

In the 3D view, which can be activated at any time with the button shown on the left, the
following buttons to control the projection are always shown. For a more detailed descrip
tion use the context help of these buttons.
Rotation about a vertical axis Rotation about a vertical axis

Rotation about a horizontal axis Rotation about a horizontal axis
Nearer (point perspective) Further away (point perspective)

Architectonic perspective (point pers
Parallel perspective (axonometry) pective with horizont. viewing direction)
Point perspective Projection direction in X
Projection direction in Y Projection direction in Z

Back to last projection direction for
[X], [Y] or [Z] Projection management
Rendered representation Rendering settings
Step angle when rotating
Completion of the Structure Input

Longitudinal members of the intermediate floor:
C=Mitte
" Change to the working plane “Floor“ zwischen
A und B
" Open the “Member“ dialog and create a cross section
with an HEA140 profile for the floor beams
B
" [Create] the 2 longitudinal beams through A and B A C
" Create the middle longitudinal member; for the start point use the construction method
“Mid-point of two points“ (key <M>); for the end point use the <U> (or <V>, depending on
how the plane is defined) key
Longitudinal members in roof plane:
" Change to the working plane “Roof“ and to the 2D view
STATIK‐8 A-51
Vol. A Introduction
" Switch to the selection mode for object points, to make the member end points of the col
umns visible, that are required for the input of the longitudinal members.
. Consult on this occasion the context help for the selection mode button.
" Choose in the member dialog the cross section with the profile “HEA140“.
A B
" Double-click on the line tool of the Graphics Editor;
introduce the members A-B, C-D, ...; C D
close the serial input mode with <Esc>; E
Note that the last two members end at the 5th frame!
F
" The missing three members in the middle of the top

three fields (between A-C, C-E and E-F) are best created
using the mid-point construction for the start point and then the method <U> for the end
point.
" Close the “Member“ dialog
" Switch off the selection mode for object points (point symbols no longer visible).
Trim the last three transverse frames:
" Exit the plane mode
" Switch off the layer with the plane symbols
" Set the projection direction to [Z]
" Select all superfluous column members and support nodes

by means of a window as shown in the figure
" <RMB> > “Delete“ or <Delete> key
" Draw the same window again in the opposite direction

(from right to left), to select the last three roof beams and thus
make their endpoints visible
" To select the right end points of the three members that have to be
shortened, draw the window again as shown in the figure
. As an alternative, you could switch on the selection mode for object points and then select
the three end points directly drawing a selection window as shown in the figure
" Set the projection direction back to the previous inclined setting
" <RMB> > “Move“ B A
" Select the point A as the point to be moved and

place it on point B by clicking
Comment: If you had done this in the previous

projection direction [Z], the program, when clicking
on B, could (unforeseeably) also have taken the bottom
point of the column. In the chosen projection it is unambiguous.
Input of the bracing:
" Switch to the plane “Roof“ and then to 2D view.
" Switch to the selection mode for object points,

so that the existing points in the plane become
visible.
A
A-52 STATIK‐8
" Open the “Member“ dialog and select the cross

section for the braces (ROR108/5.6)
" Click two times on the line tool of the Graphics
Editor and create the brace members in the
first field (quit serial input mode with <Esc>);
. At A there is no point to snap. To input this point exactly you have to use the construction
method “Intersection (of two lines)“, which you call using the <RMB> or the key <S>.
" Select the two members of the second cross B C D
from below and duplicate them 6 times in the X
direction (grab the displacement vector BC)
" Select the members of the other 3 crosses
and duplicate them twice in the X direction
(grab the displacement vector BD)
" Delete the superfluous cross bottom right.
" Switch to the plane “YZ_01“ and create the two required crosses
" Switch to the plane “YZ_02“ and create the two required crosses
" Switch to the plane “Floor“ and create the two required crosses.
" Close the “Member“ dialog and close the point selection mode
" Go back to the 3D view
With this the structure input is completed.
A 2.6.3 Load Input (Surface Loads)

Surface loads are created on previously defined surfaces.
" Switch to the tabsheet /Surfaces/
We first want to create a surface for the roof sheeting and then one for the facade in the
plane YZ .
" Select the button to define a new surface.
" Set the dialog, as shown on the right;
choose the already existing plane “Roof“;
[OK]
" Open the dialog to define the supporting members

and set it as shown; [OK]
Thereby all members in the u direction of this

plane are load-bearing. For checking purposes
they are shown in a different color.
STATIK‐8 A-53
Vol. A Introduction
" With this button start the input of the surface

outline, which in this case coincides with the
structure outline.
. The surface can also jut out over the structure
(overhanging roof) and contain polygonal openings
(adjacent button), which may not touch each other
or the outline
" Define a second surface called “YZ Facade“ and assign it to the existing plane “YZ_01“
" All members in u and v direction should be chosen as load-bearing
" Input the outline of the surface (total area without “overhanging roof“)
Now there follows the input of the three prescribed loadings using surface loads.
[kN/m2] Weight of roof sheeting Snow, whole roof Wind, whole facade
only applied to mem (only applied to mem (applied to all members
bers in Y‐direction) bers in Y direction) except bracing )
2.1
0.8 1.2
0.6
" Change to the tabsheet /Loads/

" Create the first loading (Identifier: “WgtRS“);
switch on “Surface loading“.
(the loading with the self-weight is automatically created)
" Select in the /Loads/ tabsheet (now set to surface loads)
the surface “Roof“
" Select the button for area loads and set the
dialog as shown
" Click on in the dialog
" Create the second loading (Identifier: “Snow“); and set again to “Surface loading“
" Select in the /Loads/ tab sheet the surface “Roof“
" Select the button for area loads and set: “Projective“, “Z“, “uniform“, -2.1
" Click on in the dialog
" Create the third loading (Identifier: “Wind“); and set

again to “Surface loading“
" Select the surface “YZ Facade“
A-54 STATIK‐8
" Click the button for area loads and

switch off “uniform“,
set to “Global“, “X“ and
input the load values 1: 0.6, 2: 0.6, 3: 1.2
3
" Click on [Create] and input the load polygon
in a sequence (first three points) corresponding to 2
the three given load values
4
Now the surface loads have been input and everything else is done automatically, i.e. you
can change to the /Results/ tabsheet and begin inspecting the results.
We now want , however, to check how STATIK transmits the surface loads to the member
loads.
" Select in the /Loads/ tabsheet the button to check all loadings, whereupon STATIK deter
mines the load transfer.
" Choose the loading you want to check (e.g. “Wind“)
" Clicking on this button switches between the display of the specified surface loads and the
display of the generated member loads.
. You also have the possibility of checking the created line loads numerically with the loading
legend (from the loading list). For these line loads to appear in the legend with the loading
attributes “Legend including generated loads“ has to be active.
We dispense here with a “guided tour” of the results, since this is the same as in example
2. For the selective inspection of results in the case of 3D systems of course you can also use
working planes. In addition and also in combination with the working planes there are also
the subsystems, which are very useful but whose input is not included here.
STATIK‐8 A-55
Vol. A Introduction
A-56 STATIK‐8
B 1 Introduction
Vol. B Base Module and 3D

STATIK-8
B 1 Introduction
In its basic module STATIK is a program for the linear‐elastic analysis of general three dimen
sional frame structures according to the theories of first and second order and despite the
variety of possibilities in structural modelling and in the evaluation of results it is character
ised by very straightforward and uniform operation.
For users whose needs are not so demanding STATIK is also supplied in a less expensive 2D
version, which is limited to plane frames and for which all 3D aspects are omitted, but other
wise it has the full range of possibilities.
For an overview of the complete STATIK program with all its options the reader is referred
to Chapter A1 Overview.
The present part of the manual describes all relevant aspects of the Base Module with re
gard to the theoretical foundations as also the use of the program. If it is a case of specific
STATIK questions this manual can also be reached via the contextrelated Help facility.
The Graphics Editor is a core part of all Cubus programs. It comprises essentially the pro
gramindependent features for inputting and modifying graphics objects, the control of
the presentation and the handling of Dialog Windows. Since it is not only needed in STATIK,
it is described in a separate chapter. A basic knowledge of the use of the Graphics Editor is
a prerequisite for the use of STATIK. Together with other basic knowhow this is gained by
working through the Introductory Examples (Ch. A 2).
. Every program user is strongly recommended to work through in detail the Introductory
Examples given in Ch. A 2 before attempting to use STATIK. Before doing this, one should
not attempt any serious analyses. The technical terms used in the Introductory Examples
as well as the basic procedures necessary in the use of the program are assumed here to be
known already.
After going through the Introductory Examples and gaining ones first experience with sim
ple analyses it is recommended that one reads through the manual of the Graphics Editor
at least once. The increased familiarity with it thereby gained enables one to use the pro
gram much more efficiently. If one uses other Cubus software as well, the benefit is multi
plied, since all other programs have the same graphics editor.
B 2 Basic Theory and Modeling
B 2.1 Basic Considerations regarding Structural Modeling

STATIK is a tool for the analysis of arbitrary three dimensional structures, consisting of
straight (beam) members with constant or linearly varying cross sections. The basic mod
ule allows linear analysis according to the theories of 1st and 2nd order.
The members are rigidly connected to each other at the nodes (exception: hinges at the
ends of (truss) members). Support conditions are introduced at the nodes. Details on nodes
and members are given in the following sections.
The position of the structure in space is defined by coordinates in a Cartesian system
(X,Y,Z) with the right-hand rule, the so-called global coordinate system. For the sake of
simplicity, directions running parallel or perpendicular to the global Z direction are often
called vertical and horizontal directions, respectively. In the representation of the structure
on the computer screen the global Z direction is also taken to be positive in the upward ver
tical direction. Therefore a corresponding choice of the global coordinate system is
strongly recommended.
STATIK-8 B-1
For the plane frame case often encountered in practice STATIK provides a special input
mode, which hides the three dimensional aspects. Likewise, the associated output files
only contain the corresponding components. Such plane frames lie in the (X, Z) plane of the
global coordinate system.
RZ
DZ RY
DY DZ
DX
DX
RX RY
Z Z
Y
X
X The 3D frame node has 6 degrees Y The plane frame node has 3
of freedom degrees of freedom
Fig. 1 Nodal degrees of freedom
B 2.2 Solution Method

The program is based on the generalized displacement approach, which basically in
volves the following steps:
1) In each node six unknown displacement parameters are introduced. These are the three
displacements (translations) (DX, DY, DZ) and the three rotations (RX, RY, RZ), which de
fine the displacement of a body in space. They point, when not otherwise specified, in
the directions of the global coordinate system (X, Y, Z), in which also the position of the
structure is defined. All displacement parameters of the whole structure form the vec
tor A.
2) For each member the relationship is determined between the generalized forces at the
ends of the member q and the generalized displacements at the ends of the member
a, the so-called member stiffness matrix k. q and a are also defined in the global coordi
nate system.
q +*k@a
3) Likewise, for each member the generalized forces f are determined, which due to the
loads on the member are transmitted to the end nodes. Thus a member transmits the
following forces to the end of the member:
q +*k@a)f
4) If one now considers the whole structure, the forces of all the members connecting at
a particular node are participatory. Their summation leads to the following relationship:
Qe + * K @ A ) F
Qe is the vector of forces, which are contributed by the connecting members to each
node. It comprises the part that comes from the displacement A of the structure and the
part F from the loading at the ends of the members.
5) Equilibrium requires that the sum of all forces Q acting at a node is zero. If one also in
cludes the external nodal forces R, then the equilibrium condition is:
Q +*K@A)F)R+ 0
6) Finally, after introducing the boundary conditions, the above system of equations can
be solved for the unkown displacements A.
B-2 STATIK-8
B 2.3 Unstable Systems
A prerequisite for the solution of the above system of equations is that the determinant of
its coefficient matrix is not zero. Physically, this means that the structure itself has to be sta
ble and that it has to be supported in a stable manner. Thus throughout the structure dis
placement degrees of freedom are not allowed that can move freely, i.e. without any energy
consumption.
. The type of loading has no influence on the stability!
. Sometimes, though not frequently, cases may occur in which an existing system instability
is not detected by the solution algorithm. This can lead to incorrect results and excessively
large displacements. Therefore, the plausibility of some typical load cases should always be
checked.
Possible reasons for instabilities

The reasons given in this overview are explained in detail in subsequent chapters.
1) system does not have enough supports
2) too many hinges (at member ends) specified
3) members and/or member ends are not connected, which is visually not always easy to
detect
4) instability of single (nodal) degrees of freedom
5) exceeding of buckling load in 2nd order analysis
6) numerical problems
Instabilities cannot be automatically detected by the program. These occur while solving
the equation system and result in a corresponding error message.
Instability Check
If an instability message is given during the execution of the program, an instability check
is then carried out, which usually leads to the cause of the instability, except when it is due
to the abovementioned causes 5 and 6. Details on the Instability Check are to be found in
Ch. B 12.7.
B 2.3.1 Not enough Supports

If one considers the whole structure as a rigid system without hinges, then it has to be sup
ported in such a way that it cannot move at all, i.e. displace or rotate.
Care is required
when conside
ring continuous
beams as a
three dimensio
nal system: unstable! OK !
(rotation about its own axis)
B 2.3.2 Too many Hinges

Hinges can lead to instabilities of parts of a structure (hinge chains, separation or partial se
paration of parts of the structure) or to the direct instability of individual nodal degrees of
freedom. The last case will be dealt with in the next but one point.
. In practice real hinges are seldom encountered, even in the case of trusses. The user may
be able to save some work if hinges are only placed where they are relevant for the actual
structural behavior.
STATIK-8 B-3
The following examples involve frequently encountered cases for 3D systems.
Example 1: Bracing cross with truss members
Free displacement of
cross node perpendicu
lar to bracing plane
Bracing cross with Automatic subdivision

truss members results in 4 truss members
How to proceed:
S Prevent the automatic subdivision of truss members using the attribute 'Continuous
member' for the two truss members (see Ch. B 7.2.11). Then the members are not
connected with each other in the middle
S In the input of the hinges do not select 'truss member', but simply allow hinge rotation
Y at both ends of the member.
S Omit hinges completely.
Example 2: Member rotating about its axis

Truss members
All rotations 3 individual mem All rotations

hinged bers or a continuous hinged
member
Phenomenon:
The member consisting of 3 elements can rotate about its axis, since it is not
constrained either at its ends or at the intermediate nodes (3D structure). Refer also to
'Instabilities of individual nodal degrees of freedom'.
How to proceed:
The rotation X may only be released at one of the two member ends.
. Without the vertical truss members, the horizontal member with the hinges at its ends
would not have been subdivided into 3 elements. Instability would not have occurred,
since in the case of such a member the program would have automatically eliminated the
rotation RX at the start of the member.
single member
automatically stabilized
All rotations hinged
= 'truss hinge'
two members
not automatically stabilized
B-4 STATIK-8
B 2.3.3 Members and/or Member Ends not connected

Members that should be connected to other members can also lead to instabilities under
one or other of the following circumstances:
S The attribute 'Continuous member' of a member (see Ch. B 7.2.11) ensures that other
members that intersect or touch such a member are not connected with it.
S Ends of members are not connected if they do not accurately lie on a member or on the
ends of a member.
S The procedure for intersecting members in space is not exact numerically. If the
distance of separation is greater than the given numerical tolerance they do not in
tersect, and as a result are not connected with one another.
. How close do two members have to come or how close the end of a member or a node do
they have to lie on a member, so that the program recognizes them as connected, is speci
fied by a tolerance value called 'visibility limit', which if necessary has to be changed by the
user in the menu 'Settings > Tolerances/Further settings …'.
Important Layer Buttons for Checking

The layer buttons described below only function after a successful check of the structure!
Member ends that are not connected anywhere can be made visible using the layer button
shown.
By means of this button all members are shown that are intersected and therefore are sub
divided by the program into two or more member elements.
Using this layer button all nodes are made visible that have not been input, but are gene
rated by the program for the FE model. In this way one can check if two members actually
intersect each other or if a node has been introduced at the point of intersection.
A special type of node is one that has been generated because of the member property
requiring 'Automatic subdivision'. To have a better overview they are only shown when the
corresponding sublayer is activated. This is carried out in the context menu of the Layer
button (right mouse button) using 'Properties':
B 2.3.4 Unstable Nodal Degrees of Freedom

EVERY node in the FE model of the structure for all its displacement degrees of freedom
must have a nonzero stiffness factor, otherwise it is unstable. Each node to which a mem
ber element is connected without a hinge has this stiffness factor and is therefore stable.
In the case of a hinge at the end of a member, the hinge components do not contribute a
stiffness factor and thus an instability could occur.
The node at the free end of a member for example is unstable if it has any hinges.
STATIK-8 B-5
Such instabilities are prevented if either

S Several members are connected to a node, of which not every one releases the same
degree of freedom via a hinge (important: hinges are defined in the member coordinate
system and the nodal degrees of freedom in the nodal system), or
S The degrees of freedom not restrained by the members are fixed by the nodal support
conditions.
In the case of truss structures with hinges at all member ends, the rotational degrees of
freedom in each node would at first be unstable and a manual correction by the user fol
lowing the above two points would be quite laborious. For this reason, in the case of truss
nodes the rotational degrees of freedom are automatically blocked by the program. A truss
node is a node for which all connected members are completely free with regard to their
rotations.
. If truss members (see hinge tabsheet in the Member dialog) are subdivided by the program
(e.g. because they are intersected by other members) then a chain of truss elements results!
If one wants to prevent this, one may not use the option 'Truss member', but one has to
assign the hinges explicitly.
B 2.3.5 Instabilities due to 2nd Order Effects

In analyses taking into account second order effects, an instability results if the Euler buck
ling load is exceeded by the given load.
An instability problem can also occur in the case of stability analyses, if the buckling load
is exceeded already by any fixed load.
B 2.3.6 Numerical Problems

Finally, a system may become unstable simply for numerical reasons, i.e when the stiffness
differences within the structure are so large that the accuracy of the values used by the
computer (approx. 14 significant decimal places) is not sufficiently accurate to solve the
system of simultaneous equations. However, appropriate numerical modeling should pre
vent these problems from arising. Critical cases are listed below:
S The use of members that are short and stiff compared to the other members. Such
members are sometimes introduced by users to model rigid connections, by means of
which eccentricities are taken into account. However, using the eccentric member con
nection (see B 7.2.9) provided by the program a satisfactory model can be obtained.
S Eccentricities that are too large in relation to the length of the member.
S Overwriting the cross section stiffnesses by extreme values.
S Extreme values for the stiffnesses of elastic supports and hinges.
B-6 STATIK-8
B 3 The Program Window
B 3 The Program Window
The program window of STATIK looks as follows:

Print, print entries, CubusViewer Data Path Menu Bar
Call Cubus
Explorer
Save calcu
lation
Control tab
Save all open sheet
calculations
Clipping,
Drawing subsystems,
tools name filter
Object points
visible
Select with
polygon
Undo Layer Buttons

Drawing
Redo Area
Control
view
Input options
Input fields
coordinates
Control tab sheet

The Control tab sheet is in fact the main menu of a Cubus program as it is here also of STATIK.
It is described in chapter B 6.
Graphics Editor Tools

The tools shown at the left side of the screen for drawing, controlling the viewing direction,
etc. belong to the graphics editor. They are treated in the context of the Introductory Ex
amples (chapter A 2) and described in detail in the Graphics Editor manual. Immediate in
formation is also provided by the contextrelated Help using the <F1> key.
Layer Buttons
The layer buttons, arranged in groups at the right side of the screen, control the visibility
of the corresponding objects. Both the group title fields and the layer buttons have their
own context menus, which are opened by clicking on them with the right mouse button
and for which you get help with the <F1> key. Here are shown as examples the context
menus of the layer group 'Members' and of the layer button 'Members':
STATIK-8 B-7
Menu Bar
The menu bar under the title bar in the program window, which is typical for Windows pro
grams, includes in places elements specific to STATIK and elements that are common to all
Cubus programs. They are described in detail in Ch. B 4.
B 4 Menu Bar
Menu 'File'
start the CubusExplorer

begin new computation (calls the CubusExplorer)
save the current computation
(1)
closes the current analysis (STATIK remains open)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
List of recent analyses
close STATIK and all open computations
(1) File> Save as …

The current state of the active analysis is saved with a new name. To select the desired folder
and give the new name, the CubusExplorer is called with the corresponding limited func
tionality (for details see there). The active analysis, without saving, is closed, and work is
resumed on the new analysis.
(2) File > Documents …
In the sub-folder called 'User' of a STATIK analysis, as much data can be stored as one wishes,
which then belongs to the analysis and is compressed with it, copied and archived. With the
menu 'Documents...' an Explorer window is opened, which shows all the files in the user
folder. A file can be dragged into this window with the left mouse key, in order to store it
in the folder User belonging to the analysis.
(3) File > Print: The following self-explanatory sub-menu appears:
(4) File > Import: A sub-menu appears, with which the data from other analyses can be
imported. Data from previous program generations is also supported.
B-8 STATIK-8
B 4 Menu Bar
(5) File > Recovery

Each time an analysis is saved a back-up copy of the structure and the load data is saved in
text form, whereby several generations of the structure data can be managed. If some data
is inadvertently deleted or project data can no longer be read, as a rule this Recovery func
tion can help. The Recovery function has the following dialogue:
The first entry in the selection list (STRUKTUR_Recovery1.SIN) corresponds to the last saved
state. If this doesn't give you everything you want, you can try with other states (Recov
ery2), etc.
(6) File > Export
Here the contents of the graphics area can be exported in various data formats. The fol
lowing sub-menu appears:
Clipboard: Creates a copy of the graphics in the Windows clipboard, whereby one can still
choose whether all the graphics, or just the visible part or an excerpt to be defined is copied.
In this way figures can easily be copied to other applications.
WMF..., EMF...: A file with all the graphics is created in the Windows-metafile or in the
Extended‐metafile format, for which purpose a dialogue to select the folder and the file
name appears.
DXF...: For data export in DXF format a specific dialogue window appears, whose Help func
tion gives you information about all the details..
. The Export menu can also be displayed on the <RMB> function on the graphics area.
Menu 'Settings'
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Changing the dialogue and output language
STATIK-8 B-9
(1) Settings > General …

The dialogue 'General Settings' appears on opening a new analysis. The settings made
there can be modified here.
Structure type:
The following can be selected 'Slab', 'Shear Wall', 'Slab with Normal Force'. For the last two
the program option 'Shear Wall' is needed.
Code:
For the current analysis one can change here to one of the other supported codes. After any
change in the choice of code the Material List must be changed, since the Material Classes
assigned there are code-dependent.
Building type:
By correctly setting the building type in the loading input the corresponding category of
action can be selected. If one does not need any limit state results this setting is of no conse
quence.
Description:
The text in the four input fields 'Object', 'Part of Structure', 'Author' and 'Design Engineer'
appear, when using the standard page layout, in the page headers of the printed output.
The text under 'Comments' is meant for any desired comments. It appears in the CubusEx
plorer in the preview of the selected analysis and can, of course, be inspected here in the
described dialogue at any time. At the bottom of the dialogue there is a print entry button,
with which the comment can also be included in the report.
(2) Settings > Materials
Using this menu the materials are managed for the current analysis.
Detailed information is provided by the separate manual 'Materials and Analysis Parame
ters', which can be opened in the menu 'Help'. Context-related Help (Click on the [?] but
tons of the dialogues) also appears in this document.
(3) Settings > Analysis Parameters
Analysis parameters are needed for verifications and dimensioning of the cross section
using FAGUS procedures. For the current analysis they are managed using this menu.
Detailed information is provided by the separate manual 'Materials and Analysis Parame
ters', which can be called in the menu 'Help'. Context-related Help (Click on the [?] buttons
of the dialogues) also appears in this document.
B-10 STATIK-8
B 4 Menu Bar
(4) Settings > Tolerances / Further settings...

A dialogue with three tabsheets appears:
Tabsheet 'Geometry':
-Minimum member length:

For practical and numerical reasons, the length of a member may not be shorter than a min
imum length. This also holds for members that are created by intersection of given mem
bers or by introducing nodes.
-Visibility Limit:
Since point coordinates are created in various ways the coordinates of two points, for which
one assumes that they lie in the same position, are not necessarily identical to the last de
cimal place in the computer processor. Thus a tolerance is necessary to overcome this pro
blem. It is called 'visibility limit'.
. The minimum member length must be at least twice as large as the visibility limit.
-Mesh tolerance factor:
If errors arise in the preparation of surface loads (done by a Finite Element plate analysis)
one can try to solve the problem by changing this tolerance value.
-Distance to plane:
A member is visible in a working plane, provided the distance of its end points from the
plane is at least as large as the tolerance value set here.
-Distance to surface:
Members designated to carry surface loads may be a certain distance from the loading sur
face, which is given by the tolerance value set here.
-Max. mesh size in FE-mesh of surface:
As said before, the load transfer is performed by a hidden finite element analysis whose ma
ximum mesh size can be influenced by this value.
-Min. mesh size in FE-mesh of surface (factor):
The minimum mesh size is defined by the maximum size described above multiplied by this
factor.
-Max. member angle in structure lines:
Curved structure line segments are automatically subdivided into straight members. The
subdivision is as fine as necessary for the angle between two neighboring member
elements not to exceed the value specified here. For a good approximation of the curved
line, you should not choose a value greater than 2 degrees.
. For an actual analysis the user can modify the tolerance value to a limited extent, provi
ded the necessary care is taken.
STATIK-8 B-11
Tabsheet 'Further Settings':
- FAGUS analysis for reinforced concrete:

The dialog to input the specifications for a FAGUS reinforced concrete analysis (tabsheet
'Analysis') contains several lines for dimensioning, stress and ultimate load analysis, whose
number can be set here.
-Check for multiple substructures:
This test, which is carried out when checking the structure, may be deactivated for the cur
rent analysis. If the test is active a warning is given, when the structure consists of more than
one independent part.
-Incompatible cross sections for haunched beams admissible:
For cases in which the cross sections of haunched members have to be interpolated
geometrically, they have to be compatible for this purpose (see FAGUS). It concerns the fol
lowing cases:
- automatically subdivided members (Member Dialog)
- members created by intersection
- for cross section results (edge stresses)
- for reinforced concrete analyses
If none of these cases applies one may work with incompatible cross secions, but in this
case the Control Field has to be active.
-Don't check member loads due to surface loads: Automatic checking of each load is al
ways necessary for individually input member and point loads. In the case of loads gene
rated from surface loads however this timeconsuming check is not necessary. But if pro
blems do arise this check can always be activated.
-No warnings upon checking of the structure: This is useful if in an analysis repeated and
known warnings need not be shown.
-Optimize special polygon supports: The buildung models generated by the building
module of CEDRUS contain so-called polygon supports for the walls for transfering the area
loads on each storey plane. At points where walls are touching each other geometric con
flicts might occur. For this reason the corresponding polygonal supports are slightly short
end when the setting 'Optimize special polygon supports' is actived. The corresponding
check box can be switched off if this is not wanted in spacial cases.
-Maximum number of result layers: In the Results tabsheet only the last n results are sto
red and made available as layer buttons with ascending numbering. The number n is by
default set to 6, but it can be changed here.
-Acceleration due to gravity: Used for example in the conversion of gravity loads to
masses.
B-12 STATIK-8
B 4 Menu Bar
Tabsheet 'Numbering':
Node and member numbering: The numbers automatically assigned should, in the case of
a modified structure, be retained, if possible.
(5) Settings > Dialog settings
With regard to default settings, many dialog windows (e.g. Attributes Box for material
zones) function as follows:
If a dialog window is used in an analysis, its settings are stored as default values for the next
use within the same analysis.
The default values for the first use of a dialog window in an analysis are managed as follows:
Without special provisions, the program's fixed default values are taken. A user can over
write these default values as follows:
First the dialog has to be set as one wants it to be. Then the menu command „Settings“ >
„Dialog Settings“ > „Save as Default …“ is called. The settings stored in this way are
called the User Settings. As mentioned above, in an analysis the last values to be used are
always taken as default values. These can be overwritten with the menu command
„Settings“ > „Dialog Settings“ > „Read Defaults …“ with the User Settings described
above.
As an alternative to the above mentioned menu commands one can also use the following
key shortcuts:
<Ctrl> + <F9> for storing as default values and
<Ctrl> + <F10> for inputting the default values.
The use of the key shortcuts is the only possibility in situations where the menu bar is not
active.
Whether or not an open and active Dialog Window functions according to this scheme is
seen if the menu 'Settings > Dialog Settings >’ is active or if after use of the key shortcut
a confirmation dialog appears.
(6) Settings > Minimize dialogs
When introducing objects that have a Properties dialog, one often has to move the dialog
because the position where one wants to place the object is often taken by it. With
'Settings > Minimize dialogs' activated, the dialog is reduced to its header during input.
When the input has been completed or one moves the mouse pointer over the header, the
full dialog is shown.
(7) Settings > Automatic save...
The menu calls a dialog window in which one can specify if an automatic save is performed
and at what intervals.
(8) Settings > Default position for dialogs
This restores the dialog positions and sizes originally set in the program.
(9) Settings > Shortcuts…
The menu shows a list of the available keyboard shortcuts, which is available if you choose
it (e.g. a point). This means that commands can be called up much more quickly than via the
context menu.
(10) Settings > Language
For choosing the language of the user interface.
. Only the installed languages are available (missing languages need to be installed if availa
ble)
STATIK-8 B-13
Menu 'Display'
(1) Display > Structure…
In a first group the Scaling Factors for the display of the corresponding symbols can be
specified. The factors refer to the basic settings of symbol size, which are specified in the
menu „Display” > „Symbols” (see B-15).
Offset of member's end:
without offset with offset
With the offset settings, the

members can be lengthened or
shortened for the rendered dis
play. In this way any unsightly
gaps can be avoided.
B-14 STATIK-8
B 4 Menu Bar
(2) Display > Loads…
Scaling factors and other display factors (some selfexplanatory) for point loads, line loads
or surface loads can be influenced using the shown dialog:
'Exaggerated Scale' (scaling of loads): The program determines automatically 'suitable'
scaling factors for the different load objects. If these do not suit ones requirements one can
deactivate the corresponding [A] button and then change the scaling factor accordingly.
'Arrow Factor': By correcting this factor you can adjust the size of the arrow as desired.
'AutoFactor...': If the program generally provides sizes that are too large or too small for
your liking, you can change them with these factors.
(3) Display > Symbols
Minimum and maximum size of symbols (support condition symbols, hinge symbols, ...) in
effective length on the output unit (screen, printer).
The size of the symbol depends on the zoom factor. In the overall view of the structure the
size corresponds to the minimum value. When zooming in the symbols become correspon
dingly larger, but only up to the specified maximum value. For each symbol type there is in
the dialog Settings for display of structure (see B 7.7) a factor, which allows the symbol ty
pes to be increased or decreased individually by a certain amount.
(4) Display > Units / Decimal places...
A dialog window follows, in which for most quantities used in the program the unit and the
number of decimal places can be specified for the output.
The settings activated here are saved user-specifically and not just for the actual computa
tion.
(5) Display > Colors / Line types...
In a dialog window you can specify the display style for most objects of STATIK, separately
for screen, b/w and color printers, with respect to line thickness, line type, color and fill type.
The settings activated here are saved user-specifically.
(6) Display > Font size…
Allows to set the font size for text objects on the graphics area of the screen by specifying
a scaling factor valid for all objects.
This setting has no influence on the font sizes in the printed output. For that modify the
settings in the print entry dialog or in the CubusViewer.
STATIK-8 B-15
(7) Display > Quick animation

For a better display, graphical results of displacements and mode shapes can be animated.
With this menu command or the key < F5 > the animation runs once.
(8) Display > Animation
For a better understanding of the results, the graphical results of displacements and mode
shapes can be animated.
Im 2D-Modus Im 3D-Modus
Using this dialog two separate motions can be activated and deactivated and their speed
can be controlled. One motion (left button) is the 'vibration' of the displaced position, the
other is a rotation of the whole structure about the global Z axis. For large structures the
maximum possible speed is limited by the computer's power.
Menu 'Window'
This menu is only important if you have several analyses (=windows) open at the same time.
This then permits the windows to be arranged according to different criteria and to select
one of the windows as the active one.
Menu 'Help'
With this menu one can access the different Help documents of STATIK, which are also used
by the Context Help facility. These documents are in the form of pdf files, which if necessary
can be printed.
Using the submenu 'Load Examples' application examples can be loaded. These are part of
the original purchased package.
The submenu 'About STATIK' calls a dialog window, in which the current program version,
the licenses options, the versions of the modules used and the version history can be
viewed.
B-16 STATIK-8
B 5 Buttons to the left of the Tabsheets

Special member selection
B 5.2
CubusExplorer
Save actual cal

culation
Save all open

calculations
Subsystem dis Clipping B 5.3 Name filter

play B 5.4.1 B 5.5
B 5.1 About Printing
Print directly All printable data, whether text or figures, can be printed directly at the corresponding
places in the program using the button on the left or a print entry can be made in an output
Print Entry list for printing later.
Text output is always displayed in separate table windows, which have buttons for printing
or making a print entry in their headers:
Figures involve the contents of the graphics area or a part of it. Printing or making a print
entry for figures is executed using the buttons shown on the left at the top of the program
window. Before printing or making a print entry, each time the following dialogue window
appears, which is largely self-explanatory:
The scale selection is inactive as long as

the view is in 3D mode. The "3D" button
must be switched off for the selection.
For the complete documentation of an analysis one works with print entries, so that before
printing one can have a preview of the whole 'Report' in the CubusViewer and corrections
can still be made regarding sequence, dimensions, page breaks, page numbering, etc.
STATIK-8 B-17
Thus Report denotes the sum of all the generated print entries that are managed in the
CubusViewer.
The first version of a report is created by individual print entries. After making changes in
the input an existing report can be automatically updated.
Update Report
By clicking on the button for a Print Entry for the graphics area the following dialog appears,
whose second tabsheet permits the updating of an existing Report after modifying the in
put.
All print entries marked for update will be

deleted and then re-generated according
to the actual input data.
Delete all print entries (entire report)
Manual Print Entries

The following list shows all points in the program where print entries are possible and in
roughly the sequence, in which they would be required for a report:
Structure
S Regarding the documentation of the structure input one should include at least one fi
gure of the structure, best of all in the tabsheet 'Structure'. One should ensure that all
required layers are activated. If it concerns a large structure with many structure
objects, it is better to have print entries for several figures with different layer switches
or additional excerpts from figures. Here we remind the user of the possibilities of sub
systems or the Clipping Box.
In the case of objects with labeling boxes one should remember that the amount of
labeling for most objects can be influenced in their Attribute dialogues in the tabsheet
'Option'.
Further, we would point out the possibility of dimensioning the figures to obtain an
optimal documentation and make graphical amendments. This is done in Layers of the
group “User”.
S As a legend for the structure drawings the tabular listing of the structure's objects is
used. This is created by means of the indicated button displayed on the right side in the
tabsheet 'Structure'.
Loads
S In the tabsheet 'Loads' with the button 'Legend of displayed Loading' a tabular docu
mentation of the loads can be created. For this purpose data generation possibilities are
provided in the Loading List (see below). The tabular documentation can be supple
mented with graphics print entries. One can move from loading to loading and for each
loading of interest one can make a graphics entry. There is also the possibility of com
bining several loadings in one figure by activating the corresponding Loading Layer.
B-18 STATIK-8
Further, it is also possible here to include dimensioning lines in the figures, using a layer
of the layer group 'User'. One should consider the possibility of creating any numbers
of layers in this layer group.
S The dialog window 'Loading List' can be shown using this button. At the bottom of the
window is a button for creating a printable table of the list.
With this button at the top of the dialog window 'Loading List' tabular documentation
of the selected loadings can be generated. The selection is done in the usual Windows
way. <Ctrl><A> to select all loadings is also supported.
Result Combinations and Limit State Specifications

S The documentation of any results combination and limit state specifications is done in
the tabsheet 'Analyses' in the corresponding input dialog windows.
Results
S All graphical results figures and results presented in text documents can be entered in
the usual way in the print entry list. In the case of figures, distracting layers should be
hidden and in connection with the displayed results the structure or load layers of in
terest should be shown. The user is reminded of the possibility described earlier of su
perimposing several results figures.
CubusViewer
The CubusViewer serves the purpose of previewing and printing the report, i.e. of all pre
vious print entries. The details are found using their Help menu as well as by referring to the
CubusViewer manual, also reachable using the Help menu.
B 5.2 Special Member Selection

In addition to the general selection methods of the graphics editor this button provides a
menu with a series of member specific selection tools:
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 To select all members with a given direction in space. The direction is taken from an existing
member.
2 All members perpendicular to a direction, which can be defined by selecting an existing
line or member
3 All members perpendicular to one of the global coordinate directions (e.g. all horizontal
members = all perpendicular to Z)
4 To select all members by (see B 5.4)
5 To select all members whose identifier start with a given string of characters
6 To invert the actual selection of members.
. With these functions too (except Invert) the convention holds, that a previous selection is
kept if the <Shift>‐ key is pressed and is lost otherwise.
STATIK-8 B-19
B 5.3 Clipping
With clipping, the visibility can be reduced to a given coordinate range in space:
With this button pressed, the

'invisible' part of the structure
is displayed in a dimmed way
Clipping box =
coordinate range in
space of the structure
This button opens the function bar for clipping. Various settings for visibility control using
a clipping box are available here:
General information on handling the clipping box(es)

Clipping boxes are freely definable rectangles (in 2D mode) or cuboids (in 3D mode). They
enclose part of the structure. A separate zone is defined for each clipping box. Any number
of clipping boxes can be created.
In the basic state, the predefined clipping box always includes the entire structure. This clip
ping box can be easily adjusted graphically or numerically.
If necessary, the structure outside the clipping box can be completely hidden.
. Only elements that are completely inside are added to the clipping box:
The coordinate origin of the clipping box is defined in absolute coordinates.

Selection field for the current clipping box. The content of the clipping box (es) remains sa
ved when the function bar is closed (hidden). Any number of clipping boxes can be defined.
The following tools are used for this:
Create a new clipping box.
For changing the name and properties of the current clipping box.
With this button, the clipping box can be automatically restricted to previously selected el
ements of a structure.
Using this button the clipping box can be adjusted to the maximum dimensions of the
structure.
Delete current clipping box. If only one clipping box remains, it cannot be deleted.
The visibility is only reduced to the clipping box if the active box is checked.
B-20 STATIK-8
With this button on the far left of the function bar, the elements outside the clipping box
can be completely hidden.
By switching these buttons on or off, the clipping box becomes visible or invisible.
If this button is activated, the clipping box can be selected. This offers you an easy way to
graphically set the clipping box to the desired area. There are two ways to edit the clipping
box:
Moving arrows for the

graphical adjustment of
the clipping box
S If you want to move the clipping box in its existing size, place the mouse pointer near
an arrow and press the <v> key. The clipping box can be moved in the specified direc
tion, but only in one plane at a time.
S If you want to change the size of the clipping box, mark the moving arrow and then press
the <v> key and pull the corresponding side of the clipping box until all the required
elements are inside the clipping box. Since this process is also only possible in one
plane, this must be repeated with a different arrow for an extension in a different direc
tion.
. Make sure that the arrows on each side point outwards. Otherwise it is not possible to dis
play elements.
In addition to the above-mentioned graphic options for adapting the clipping box, the size
of the clipping box can also be entered numerically using the button for changing the prop
erties of the clipping box in the dialog that appears.
Numerical input of
coordinates for the size
of the clipping box
B 5.4 Subsystem View

Subsystems (abbreviated in the following to SS) are one of the means of limiting the visi
bility of a large structure to selected structural elements. One can define as many SS as one
wants. A structural element can belong to more than one SS.
. SS are a means of controlling visibility and have no effect on geometry or any computatio
nal model for the strucure.
Calls the subsystem dialog, in which the definition of SS and the selection of the active SS
for visibility is made.
Switches between full view and subsystem view. The subsystem view limits the visibility to
the active subsystems.
With this button pressed, the hidden objects are displayed in a dimmed way. The color can
be set in the menu „Display“ > „Colors/Line type...“ (tab sheet 'Graphics editor', field 'inac
tive objects') .
STATIK-8 B-21
B 5.4.1 Subsystem Dialog

The subsystem dialog shows the list of all defined subsystems.
Reduces the visibility to the

marked SS ([Preview] must
be switched off)
Marked SS
Displays all acive SS (swit

ched on in column 'active')
( mut be switched off)
The subsystems dialog offers the following functions, which are only active if [Preview] is
inactive:
S Define new SS.
S Delete marked SS.
S The currently selected objects are assigned to the marked SS. Existing objects in the SS
are removed beforehand.
S The currently selected objects are added to the marked SS.
S The currently selected objects are removed from the marked SS.
S The objects of the marked SS are selected (with<Shift>‐key this process is additive)
S Switch on / off the active state for all SS.
S The visibility is limited to the marked SS. The button is only active if [Preview] is switched
off.
If an SS is marked and the SS dialog is active, then the marking can be moved up and
down with the arrow keys, which allows a comfortable 'leafing through' the SS.
It is possible, in the case of changes to the structure, that existing subsystem definitions get
muddled up (SS, e.g., can point to elements that no longer exist). Since automatic updating
is not possible, the user has to check the SS and if necessary modify them.
B 5.4.2 Steps in defining a new Subsystem

S Define new SS. The default name can be directly overwritten. The row with the new SS
should now be marked.
S Select structural elements that you want to be included in the SS.
S With this button the selected structural elements now form the SS.
. With and elements can be added or removed from the SS.
If the SS dialog is closed, this button switches the current subsystem view on or off. The cur
rent subsystem view consists of the active SS in the SS dialog.
B-22 STATIK-8
B 5.4.3 Automatic generated subsystems

During the creation of a frame model subsystems are automatically generated by the pro
gram:
B 5.5 Name Filter
The visibility of the structural objects can also be limited using a name filter. As soon as a
character string appears in the input field shown on the left, only those objects having this
text string in their name are displayed.
It is also possible to input several character strings separated by a blank. For an object to
be shown, at least one of the input character strings must appear in its name.
An important use of a name filter is for example when a particular object is sought, e.g.
'L5:P3-1', which otherwise would be difficult to find.
Special Functionalities
<Ctrl> + <F> To jump to the input field for name filters
<Enter> To save the current entry in the filter field
To list the saved filter entries for selection (or quicker with <Ctrl-F>)
To clear the filter entry field
Regular Expressions
If the first character in the input field is an '!' , the following text is interpreted as a regular
expression for the text comparison. Regular expressions obey their own syntax and in IT
they are a common way of formulating a character string to be sought or compared. Thus
those familiar with this formalism can use it here.
STATIK-8 B-23
B 6 The Control tab sheet
The control tab sheet is actually the main menu for using STATIK. Each of its tabsheets is de
scribed in detail in its own chapter.
Before studying this detailed description, you should get a broad overview of an analysis,
which is given in chapter A 2 with three simple introductory examples.
BIM chapterB 8 (described after „Structure”) page B-61
Structure chapterB 7 page B-24
Surfaces chapterB 9 page B-68
Prestressing Vol.F (needs program optionV)
Loads : chapterB 10 page B-71
Analysis chapterB 11 page B-96
Results chapterB 12 page B-112
B 7 Structure
The tab sheet 'Structure' offers the tools for defining the geometry, materials and support
of a structure.
Cross sections B 7.1 pageB-25
Member dialog B 7.2 pageB-30
Structure lines B 7.3 pageB-47
External stiffness matrices B 7.4 pageB-48
Node dialog B 7.5 pageB-52
Nodal support B 7.5 pageB-52
Construction stages B 7.6 pageB-59
Display settings B 7.7 pageB-59
Legend of structure data B 7.8 pageB-60
Check input B 7.9 pageB-60
Reset structure B 7.9 pageB-60
B-24 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
Import structure B 7.10 pageB-60
Export structure B 7.11 pageB-60
B 7.1 Cross Sections
B 7.1.1 General
STATIK needs member- or cross-sectional stiffness and also member masses for dynamic
analyzes. For this purpose, corresponding cross sections of the members must be defined
and assigned to the members. Member cross sections are managed by FAGUS, whose base
module is supplied with STATIK.
. For special cases, cross-sectional stiffness can be entered directly in the material properties
(see B 7.2.6). In any case, a cross-section must be assigned to each member.
Torsional and shear stiffness cannot be easily determined for all cross-sectional shapes. The
FAGUS manual describes how and for which cross-section types these values are de
termined. The three stiffness values GIx (torsional stiffness), GAy and Gaz (shear stiffness)
of a cross section can be overridden in the FAGUS variants tab sheet manually.
For cross-sectional profile along a member (prismatic or haunches) and cross-section vari
ants see in the member input in Chap. B 7.2.5.
If you want to use cross-sections for reinforced concrete analyzes (carried out automatically
dimensioning and analysis tasks), as was also the part D referenced the manual.
From the perspective of STATIK there are two types of cross sections:
S Parameterized cross sections are predefined cross section types which are fully de
fined by a set of parameters. Rolled steel profiles also belong to this cross section type.
Such cross sections can be input and modified in STATIK without calling FAGUS. If such
a cross section should be modified in a way not foreseen by its parameters it can be con
verted in FAGUS to a general FAGUS cross section.
S General FAGUS cross-sections are not parameterized and can be freely defined within
the scope of FAGUS. Such cross sections can only be entered and modified in FAGUS. For
handling FAGUS, please refer to its manual and help system.
B 7.1.2 Cross section library

This button in the tab sheet 'Structure' shows the following dialog with the list of all cross
sections defined in the actual calculation (= cross section library):
cross sections
marked with '*' are in
use and cannot be
deleted
search field: marking

jumps to the first
cross section starting
with the given
characters
. The same button in the member dialog also leads to this dialog.
STATIK-8 B-25
B 7.1.3 Input parameterized cross-sections

Click this button for the definition of a new parameterized cross section. A dialog comes up
with all types of parameterized cross sections available, grouped in a tab sheet of which two
tabsheets are shown here. There is also a field for entering the name of a cross section.
Cross section name

If a cross section is stored, so can his name not be changed. Careful and thoughtful selection
of the cross-section name is important. It can also facilitate the work and serves for better
clarity. The name should normally correspond more to the component (for example, top
flange) and not the type of cross section or the cross-sectional dimensions. If you change
the course of the assessment process, for example, the type or dimensions of the section
'top flange', so you need to allocate any new cross-sections each member.
Tab sheet Steel
The cross-section types offered are divided into two groups:
Standard profiles
This group includes the standard rolled profiles, as HEA, HEB, IPE, ... as well as two types of
composite sections with these profiles.
For rolled profiles the input section looks as follows:
All profiles have a standard orientation (as displayed in the dialog) but some of them may
be introduced in a rotated form. The possible rotation angles depend on the type of profile
and are shown in the dialog. This is a convenient alternative to changing the member
coordinate system:
z z
y y
standard orientation rotated form
Some profiles can also be entered as a couple. From the resulting cross section values, only
the cross-sectional area should make sense, that is, you should use those cross-sections
only as truss members in which the flexural rigidities are irrelevant.
B-26 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
Parametric rolled profiles
Thus rolled profiles of types shown can be defined using parameters. The input dialog looks
like this:
This type of entry is offered to enter rolled profiles (for example, non-European) to which
are not included in the list of default profiles.
. Turning and doubling are not implemented for the parametric profile.
STATIK-8 B-27
Miscellaneous tab sheet
The miscellaneous tab sheets comprises

S Massive cross sections: unarmed, with specification Material concrete
S Reinforced concrete cross-sections, grouped in carrier, bridge beams, columns and
walls
S Thin-walled cross sections
S Wooden cross sections
If a cross section type has been selected, it is displayed in the right part of the dialog and
its parameters can be set:
B-28 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
B 7.1.4 Input general FAGUS cross-sections
Calls FAGUS for the definition of a new general FAGUS cross section. STATIK remains
blocked (not usable) as long as FAGUS is in use and open.
Calls FAGUS for inputting and/or editing of cross sections. STATIK remains blocked (not usa
ble) as long as FAGUS is in use and open.
B 7.1.5 Other buttons in the cross-section library dialogue
To edit the selected cross section (not enabled if more than one section is selected).
Creates print entries for the selected cross sections.
Deletes the selected cross sections, provided they are not in use and therefore marked by
an '*'. If cross sections that seem to be unused are still marked as used, closing and opening
the program may help.
Used to import cross sections from other calculations. The following dialog is shown:
Option 'Cross section library':

Allows the import of cross sections from any calculation using FAGUS cross sections (also
from earlier program versions). These are, beside FAGUS calculations, STATIK, PYRUS and
CEDRUS calculations. In the appearing CubusExplorer the desired calculation is selected.
Then one selects the cross sections to be imported from a list of all found sections .
Options 'Parameterized...':
For parameterized cross sections there is a text interface for the import of cross sections eit
her from the Windows clipboard or directly from a text file. This interface is meant for power
users. The best way to learn about the syntax of the text file is to study the export file of a
corresponding cross section (see next point).
For the export of a parameterized cross section in text form either to the Windows clip
board or to a textfile to be specified. The figure below shows a list of cross sections that was
first exported from STATIK to the Windows clipboard and then pasted in an Excel sheet. :
cross section type

parameter list
cross section
cross section
cross section
cross section type

parameter list
cross section
STATIK-8 B-29
B 7.2 Members
Member Dialog Overview see B 7.2.4
B 7.2.1 Members, Member Lines and Member Axes

For a member connecting two nodes in a frame structure, we distinguish between its
member line and its member axis, which do not coincide in the case of eccentric
connections.
A structure is built up by inputting member lines. Where the ends of member lines touch,
nodes result connecting the members rigidly.
The member axis, on the other hand, is the straight line coinciding with the centre of
gravity or the axis point of the effective member section.
member axis SE
member line rigid connec SA member
tion eA from member
PA PE node to start P PE line
A
of member
normally connected member eccentrically connected member with
the member end points SA and SE
Fig. 2 Normally and eccentrically connected members
Intersecting Member Lines

If two member lines intersect the program assumes (if not otherwise specifically
requested), that the members are connected at the point of intersection. For the structural
model a node is automatically introduced at the point of intersection and the members cut
in this way are divided into corresponding smaller member elements.
. The analysis module in STATIK works with member elements, connected at the nodes.
However, the input members can consist of a number of member elements, whereby the
subdivision of a member into member elements is carried out automatically by the
program, whether it is because members intersect, because nodes are introduced in the
members or because an automatic subdivision is necessary for special analysis methods.
The following figure illustrates the automatic subdivision of input members into member
elements:
input members and support node member 1

support nodes:
member 3
member 2
automatically
subdivided
member elements 3_2

created by program:
1_1 1_2 1_3 1_4
2_3
3_1
2_2
Fig. 3 Members and 2_1

member elements
B-30 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
B 7.2.2 Member Axis and Local Coordinate System

The member axis runs from the member start point SA to the member end point SE. These
points are the end points of the member line corrected by any eccentricity vectors.
For the definition of quantities related to members (position and orientation of cross
section, hinges, loads, section forces...) each member has its own local coordinate system
(x,y,z) with the origin at the member start point SA. By default it is defined as follows:
SE
z
x
y
Z
SA
Y
plane perpendicular
X to (X,Y) through SA,
SE
Fig. 4 Coordinate convention
x: along member axis, in direction of member end point SE

z: perpendicular to x in a vertical plane through x, pointing towards the positive half space
of Zglobal
y: perpendicular to z and x, so that a right hand rule x,y,z system is obtained; thus y lies in
a horizontal plane
These definitions for y and z fail in the case of vertical member axes, for which the local y axis
points in the direction of the global Y and z obeys the right hand rule.
Other definitions are possible (see Chap. B 7.2.8) except for x, which is always defined in the
same way.
. The member axis usually coincides with the axis of the centre of gravity of its cross section.
For special cases, however, in the input of the cross section there exists the possibility of
defining an axis point that deviates from the centre of gravity (seepage B-35).
. In the case of symmetrical cross sections the principal axes of the cross section coincide
with the local y,z axes, which does not necessarily have to be the case for general cross
sections. Therefore hinges, loads and section forces are not defined in every case in the
directions of the principal axes of the cross section.
STATIK-8 B-31
B 7.2.3 Context Menu for Members

Members are line objects. Their context menu offers in addition to the standard tools for
lines the following functions:
Subdivide Members
The following dialog is called, which offers several methods for subdividing members:
Subdivision in pieces of the same length
Distance values in unit [m]; positive values are related

to the start of a member, negative values to the end of
a member.
The list may contain the following elements:
1.2 absolute distance from start of member
r-0.8 distance relative to last point backward
3*1.0 3 times 1.0, relative to last point
30% at 30% of length from start of member
-0.5 distance from end of member
Only active if a single member is selected. Allows

selection of points on the member or of other members
crossing it.
. If truss members are subdivided the new members are truss members too. For other mem
bers the newly created member ends have no hinges.
. If members are to be subdivided only for the calculation model there is a member property
in the member dialog just for this purpose (see page B-46). Such a subdivision may only be
necessary for calculations according to 2nd order theory, stability analyses or dynamic
analyses.
Intersecting Members
This function subdivides selected members at their mutual intersection points.
. This function is useful e.g. for steel member analyses, which do not accept intersecting
members.
Exchange Start and End of Member

The member direction, i.e. the start and end of a member, is important in several respects.
On the one hand it has an influence on the local coordinate system, on the other hand, some
member properties are explicitly related to the start or end of a member (hinges, eccentrici
ties, etc.). If the start and end of a member are exchanged not only the local x-direction
changes but also the properties related to the member ends are affected.
B 7.2.4 Member Dialog Overview

The Member dialog serves to input and modify members and their properties. It is ac
tivated by
S clicking on the member button
S use of <RMB> with selected members > „Properties“
S clicking on a selected member or double clicking on a not selected member
B-32 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
It comprises all the properties of members, which are spread over several tabsheets:
Cross section... (B 7.2.5)

CS stiffnesses (B 7.2.6)
Hinges (B 7.2.7)
Member orientation (B 7.2.8)
Steel member analyses for elevated

temperature (H 2.8)
For steel member analyses (B 7.2.12)
Further properties (B 7.2.11)
Design sections(B 7.2.10)
Eccentricities (B 7.2.9)
Create member with all Apply the current Search mem

the current settings settings to all selec bers with given
(i.e. draw the member ted members properties
line)
B 7.2.5 Member Dialog - tab sheet 1 - Cross section...
Cross section
Further properties
(B-36)
The first tab sheet contains the most important properties, which in principle have to be
specified for every member. The other tabsheets contain additional information, which is
only defined or modified in special cases. The tabs show if any of the properties have been
set for any of the selected members.
Cross Sections (CS)
Each prismatic member needs one cross section. Members with variable cross sections
need two cross sections, one at the beginning and one at the end. A cross section is defined
by the geometry of its parts and their material properties. A cross section may have differ
ent variants, each with a different set of active cross section parts.
STATIK-8 B-33
CS Input / -Setting
CS management CS name CS-variant
CS adopt from BIM model
All CS defined in a calculation can be selected in the CS name field. If a CS has different vari
ants the desired variant has to be selected in the CS variant field. The CS management but
ton can be used for the definition of new CS. It calls the same CS library dialog as the CS but
ton in the tabsheet 'Structure' (see B 7.1). With the corresponding button, QA can also be
adopted directly from a 3D BIM model (see B 8.3.3).
Member CS and Local Coordinate System

If no special axis point is specified in a cross section (see later), then the centre of gravity
of the cross section coincides with the local x‐axis of a member (see Fig. 5 ).
zh z yh
z
yq,zq: Input coordinate system
of CS with the origin Q0
ß
S y y
S x,y,z: Local coordinate system
zq zq of member
yh,zh: Principal axes of CS
yq yq
Q0 Q0
Fig. 5 Position of cross section in local coordinate system
The zq direction of the cross section always corresponds to the local z direction of the
member. For non-symmetrical cross sections this means in general that the directions of
its principal axes are rotated with respect to the local coordinate system. The program of
course has to formulate the stiffness relationships in the directions of the principal axes. The
user, however, always works with the local coordinate system and the necessary
transformations are carried out automatically.
Members with changing Cross Section (haunched)
A member can have either a constant cross section or exhibit different cross sections at its
ends. In the case of different cross sections one speaks of a haunched member. Regarding
the variation of the cross section of haunched members one should note the following
points:
1) Within member elements the cross section values are linear.
2) If input haunched members intersect or if subdivisions are specified for haunched
members for the calculation, then the cross sections are linearly interpolated in the
subdivision points, provided the necessary requirements are fulfilled. Otherwise a
linear variation of cross section values is assumed. One should refer to the FAGUS
manual regarding the requirements for interpolation of the cross sections. By way of
example, the following figure shows the stiffness variation in the case of linear
interpolation of the cross section geometry.
B-34 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
Rectangular CS with linearly varying

member height h...2h
Bending stiffness along member:

Without member subdivision (linear)
With subdivision into 4 member elements
(corresponds here approximately to the
effective distribution)
Fig. 6 Variation of CS geometry / CS stiffness
CS Position with Axis Point
. This possibility requires option „Specialities“

If an axis point is introduced into a cross section, then not the center of gravity, but this axis
point lies on the member axis. Thus a (perhaps additional) eccentricity arises, which is
correctly handled by the program automatically.
Working with a given axis point is of importance above all if a member has different cross
sections in different construction stages (see Fig. 7).
Construction stage 1 Construction stage 2

z z
Without axis point:
S1 y
y
S2
Q0
Q0
Without an axis point the changing centre of gravity coincides with
the unchanging member axis.
The position of the cross section changes !
z z
With axis point PA:
PA y PA
y
Q0 Q0
If an axis point PA is defined (in the cross section input system
Q0), then the member axis coincides with it.
The position of the cross section remains constant !
Fig. 7 Cross sections and axis points
As in the case of directly input eccentricities, these automatically generated eccentricities

are also subject to limitations for numerical reasons. In any case one should restrict oneself
to axis points that lie within the convex envelope of a cross section.
. Section force and displacement results can be requested with respect to the member axes
(axis points) or to the centers of gravity of the construction stage with the highest number
(of all stages contributing to the result)
. Since structure lines are continuous lines (see E 2) a correct positioning of variable cross
sections is only possible with the use of axis points.
STATIK-8 B-35
Further Properties on the Tab sheet 'Cross Section':
The check box 'Active': A member made inactive has no effect statically. If one wants to
remove members temporarily (e.g. for variant comparisons) and possibly restore them la
ter, one simply sets them inactive.
The main use however is when working with construction stages. Since no new members
can be created when changing from one construction stage to another within an analysis,
all members have to be defined in the initial stage. The addition or subtraction of members
during construction can be achieved by switching the 'Active' box on and off.
The check box 'with shear deformation': The shear deformation of a member is only
considered if this control field is activated.
If you want to take into account this effect, ensure that the corresponding shear stiffnesses
GAy, GAz are set correctly for the cross section. In some cases this cannot be done automati
cally, either because the cross section has a general shape, or one is dealing with 'open'
members, for which the shear deformation is often relevant.
In such cases the stiffness values for cross sections can be overwritten in FAGUS or for mem
bers in the tabsheet 'CS-stiffness' of the member dialog.
Example: Shear stiffness for an 'open' member
a
Open member δ
GAz =
force needed
to cause a
shear de
formation of
δ/a=1.0
The check box 'depends on long-term effects': This setting is only relevant in the case of
long-term analyses (see A 1.5.7).
B 7.2.6 Member Dialog - tab sheet 2 - Modified CS Stiffnesses
Stiffness values can be over

written or multiplied by a factor
An active multiplying factor also

holds for an overwritten value
The required relationships between strain and section force quantities within a member,
which form the basics for the statical analysis, are all formulated with respect to the centre
of gravity and the directions of the principal axes of its cross section.
To determine these relationships the cross section stiffnesses given in the table below are
needed. They are determined automatically by the program for all cross sections depen
ding on their shapes and materials. For special cases these stiffness values can be
overwritten or multiplied with a factor for each member individually.
B-36 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
Stiffness Use Calculation**)
sdx vx' = N/sdx E.Ax Ax: CS area

sdy vy' = Vy/sdy *) G.Ay Ay: reduced shear area
sdz vz' = Vz/sdz *) G.Az Az: reduced shear area
srx rx' = T/srx G.Ix Ix: torsional constant
sry r y' = - My/sry E.I y Iy: moment of inertia about y
srz rz' = Mz/srz E.Iz Iz: moment of inertia about z
vx'= dv x , ... rx'= drx , ... v: displacement r: rotation

dx dx
N, V, T, M: section forces; E, G: elastic moduli (material properties)
*) The influence of shear deformation can be switched on or off for

each member individually
**) If a CS consists of several sub sections, the calculation is effected
analogously
B 7.2.7 Member Dialog - tab sheet 3 - Hinges at Member Ends
DX
DY, DZ
RX
RY, RZ
elastic hinge
Members are normally rigidly connected at their end nodes. Analogous to the six degrees
of freedom in a node, at the member ends six possible restraints can be released. These are
the three displacements and three rotations in the local coordinate system. For a bending
hinge in a plane frame in the X,Z plane, for example, the rotation about the local y axis has
to be released.
member hinges SE
SA
PA PE
PA PE
Centrally connected member Eccentrically connected member
Fig. 8 Member end hinges
Instead of a normal hinge, which releases the corresponding restraint and transmits no
force or moment, between member ends and member end points an elastic spring can act.
A hinge cannot be introduced within a member. In this case it is necessary to input more
than one member with member ends at the desired hinge positions.
STATIK-8 B-37
. When inserting hinges one should ensure that no instabilities arise. The following three
pitfalls exist:
1) The member itself becomes unstable (torsional hinges at both ends of a member
element are automatically corrected by the program).
2) Nodes can become unstable, if for a displacement degree of freedom none of the
connected members contribute stiffness and the node is not correspondingly supported.
Example: all members are hinged at a node (a special case is given by truss members, which
are dealt with in the next section).
3) Obviously, by introducing too many hinges an instability of a part of the structure or of
the overall system can also be caused.
. Whether a structure is unstable and cannot be analyzed according to the selected method
depends on the loading. Instabilities cannot, in principle, be recognized by the program.
Only if the algorithm to solve the system of equations fails is there an indication of a
structural or numerical instability (due to extreme differences in stiffness).
Truss Hinges
A hinge, for which all rotational degrees of freedom and only these are released, is called
here a truss hinge. In STATIK truss hinges are given the following special treatment:
If only members with truss hinges connect to a node, then the program recognizes it as a
Basically unstable truss node and automatically stabilizes what are in effect its unstable rotational degrees of
nodes are automatically
stabilised by the prog freedom (see also section A 2.3 on nodes). Therefore, such nodes may not be acted upon
ram by moments.
Truss member
Truss Members
Truss members are input as such in STATIK. At both ends they have a truss hinge. A member
Created member
that has the same hinges as a truss member, but is not defined as such, is not treated as a
elements: truss member. If the member line of a truss member is subdivided by a node or another
member, then the member elements that result automatically become truss member ele
ments. With respect to the hinges these behave as truss members.
G: truss elements
G M G
Fig. B−1 Instabilityof a part of the structure due to too many hinges?
If the horizontal member in Figure B-1 is input as a truss member, then the system sketched
above is stable, since the member is subdivided into two truss member elements. Thus in
node M only members with truss hinges are connected and its rotational degrees of free
dom are eliminated by the program.
If the horizontal member is not input as a truss member, then as a 3D frame the system is
unstable, although the member does not have any additional hinges. Since in the subdivi
sion of the member no hinges are introduced at M, the rotation of the node is not stabilized,
and the substructure of the horizontal member consisting of two member elements can
freely rotate about its axis.
B-38 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
B 7.2.8 Member Dialog - tab sheet 4 - Member Orientation
y
α
y‐standard
Vektor
x
y
Common
plane of the
three vectors
By specifying a member orientation the directions of the local y,z axes can be defined to de
viate from the standard definition. They remain perpendicular to the member's axis x' and
of course also to each other.
You can define the member's orientation in three ways:
1) By inputting an angle a , by which the member is rotated about the local x axis with re
spect to the standard definition.
2) By specifying a vector (input the components or click on the arrow button and grab
the vector with the mouse). The vector defines together with the member's axis x the
plane (x,y). The rotated y axis lies in this plane, perpendicular to x and points to the same
side of x, as does the input vector.
This orientation definition is independent of the standard orientation and is especially
useful if there is uncertainty about the standard orientation.
3) By inputting the coordinate of a point in the x‐y plane. This corresponds to the vector
definition above with a vector from the start of the member to the input point.
. Parameterized cross sections, like e.g. rolled steel profiles, can be rotated by certain angles
before you import them. This method also serves for a correct orientation of a cross section
and may be used for 2D and 3D structures. It doesn't influence the definition of the local
coordinate system of a member.
B 7.2.9 Member Dialog - tab sheet 5 - Special Connections (Eccentricities...)
member axis
member
end
Eccentricity vector in
global coordinates
member line
member end
node
see „Connection to a Secondary Node“, page B-42
STATIK-8 B-39
Eccentrically connected members

An eccentric connection of a member is a rigid connection between the start and/or end
point of its member line, i.e. the member end node(s), and the effective member end(s). This
is the correct way of modeling eccentrical connections of bars rather than introducing
short members with big cross sections.
. Too large eccentricities compared with the member lengths lead to big differences bet
ween the stiffness components and may cause numerical problems. It is difficult to give an
exact limit, but the member length would be a reasonable order of magnitude.
. Eccentrical connections should only be used where they are statically relevant since un
derstanding the model and the interpretation of results may be significantly more difficult.
Eccentric connections can be defined either in global or in local coordinates:
1) In global coordinates:
The eccentricity vectors are defined in global coordinates and point from the member's
start node to the effective start of a member or from the member's end point to the ef
fective end of the member.
Input the eccentricity components directly or click on the arrow button below and grab
the vector by selecting suitable points.
2) In local coordinates:
In cases which can be described in this way, the following type of specification of
member eccentricities is often simpler, especially as well, since with a change of cross
section they do not have to be redone.
We are dealing here with local eccentricities, since these are defined with respect to the
member line. The local x eccentricities along the member line are input explicitly and
those perpendicular to it result from positioning the cross section by means of an
anchor point which will lie on the member line. An anchor point may be specified in the
cross section, otherwise one can select one of the automatically generated anchor
points.
z' z' z' y'
Hi y' Hi y'
Hi
zq S
S S
yq zq
zq yq
yq
The automatically generated anchor points Hi are Also in the case of a given member
created in the rectangular outline (parallel to orientation the selected anchor point
cross section input system yq,zq) as shown; S is coincides with the member line
the centre of gravity or axis, respectively
z'
y' member line PE
H
PA
zq
yq
exA
Cross section with anchor point H Member placed using anchor point with
input by hand local x eccentricity exA at start of member
Fig. 9 Local specification of member eccentricities
As already mentioned, the member axis always passes through the centre of gravity of the
cross section or through any defined axis point. If the middle anchor point is selected, the
member axis and the member line coincide (no eccentricities in local y' and z' directions).
In other cases the member axis will exhibit a corresponding eccentricity.
B-40 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
To uniquely define the position of the cross section an x',y',z' coordinate system is
introduced; it only has relevance in this connection. It is defined in the same way as the local
coordinate system (see Chap. B 7.2.2) with x' on the member line. Member orientations are
to be considered but no eccentricities. The cross section will be placed as shown in Fig. 9,
i.e. the yq,zq axes of the cross section have the same directions as y',z'.
If the member axis is positioned in the way described - possibly with different cross sections
at the start and end of the member - and also if any local x eccentricity is taken into account,
the position of the member end point and thus of the member axis is uniquely defined. The
actual local member coordinate system (see Chap. B 7.2.2) is in this case also uniquely fixed
by the member axis and any specified member orientation. Its directions do not necessarily
coincide with those of the x',y',z' coordinate system (if a member orientation is defined by
means of a point in the xy plane).
With regard to positioning with the anchor point the following points are mentioned:
S Positioning with the aid of anchor points represents in many cases a great simplification
in the input of the member axis positions.
An example would be members which lie on top of one another, as may be the case for
purlins. When changing the cross section no changes have to be made to the geometry.
S When preparing the input of the members one should also consider the support condi
tions, which can only be formulated in the nodes. These are situated at the ends of the
member lines.
S As for the direct input of eccentricities, there are limits to the automatically generated
eccentricities. For instance, very short members with large eccentricities can lead to nu
merical problems.
S One is cautioned, however, because of the simple input possibilities and the realistic
representation not to connect everything eccentrically, if this is not relevant to the
structural model. Understanding the model and interpreting the results is much more
difficult for systems with eccentricities.
Example: Model of a column with an eccentric connection

Column Model
Member Member line

axis (input line)
eccentric Member axis

0.25 connection of = membe line
the top mem
ber
to the bottom Z
member X
ex = -0.25
Fig. B−2 Example of an eccentrically connected member
STATIK-8 B-41
The Subdivision of a Member Line, whose Member is Connected Eccentri

cally
member axis SE
eccentric SA eccentric
connection connection
PA
PE
Lm admissible region for Lm
member line subdivision of member line minimum
admissible mem
ber length
subdivision
point
the program makes 2 eccentric member

elements out of the subdivided member
Fig. B−3 Subdivision in the case of eccentric member connection
As a result of the above considerations we have the condition that a member line, whose
member is connected eccentrically, can only be subdivided within the region given in the
above figure and thus may only be cut there as well.
The minimum allowable member length applies for numerical reasons. The value is prede
fined by the program. The user, if the necessary care is taken, can make adjustments to the
actual conditions in a calculation, but it may never be zero. Thus members or zero length
are excluded.
Connection to a Secondary Node
In the case of Dual Node (see B-55) the end of the member can be connected either to a
primary node (no tick) or a secondary node. Dual nodes and the possibility thus created of
a connection to a secondary node may be of interest with nodal constraints (see B 7.5.6).
Example Scissor Joint:
A dual node is introduced in the scissor joint. The two nodes of the node couple are connec
ted by nodal constraints so that they have identical displacements. The rotational parame
ters are not connected.
The corresponding ends of the members A1 and A2 are connected normally and those of
the members B1 and B2 to the secondary node of the dual node.
A1
B1 dual node
dual node (primary) node secondary node
A2
B2
elevation
B-42 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
B 7.2.10 Member Dialog - tab sheet 6 - Design Sections
The distances between member result sections can be set globally or defined for each
member individually. The latter are called design sections. For some special analyses like
Reinforced Concrete Analyses, Response Spectrum Analyses and for results of Prestressing
loadings it is necessary to work with design sections.
Apart from generated sections (in n sections per member element or with given regular
spacing) individual sections can also be introduced by defining a list of distances. Negative
values are measured from the end of the member.
The following properties are only used for Reinforced Concrete Analyses:
Groups of reinforcement: In this edit field the reinforcement layout for RC design and
analyses is specified. If the field is empty, the reinforcement defined in the cross section is
used over the whole length of an element.
The concept of the reinforcement groups (RG) allows the definition of different reinforce
ment layouts (= RG's) for the same cross section (see the FAGUS manual) and thus the defini
tion of a changing reinforcement along a member by defining which RG's exist in which
parts of a member. The specification is given in the corresponding text input field and con
sists of one or more group positions separated by ';'. A group position itself consists of the
3 elements
group namestart pointend point .
If the start and end points are omitted the group is active along the whole member. The
character '<' as start point means the start of the member and '>' as end point the end of
the member. Otherwise distance values, also as 'percentages values', for the start and end
points are given. Positive values refer to the start of the member and negative values to the
end.
Example: UB ; OB < 25% ; OB 75% >
- group UB from start to end of member
- group OB from start of member to 1/4 of member length
- group OB from 3/4 of member length to end of member
Check boxes for fans: In sections marked with 'fan' (only at start and end of member) no
longitudinal reinforcement is added due to shear forces torsion. Fans are specified e.g. over
supports of continuous beams except at end nodes. Therefore, a continuous beam cannot
be specified as a single input member. At least one member must be defined from support
to support. Find more about fans in the chapter with the description of reinforced concrete
analyses.
STATIK-8 B-43
B 7.2.11 Member Dialog - tab sheet 7 - Miscellaneous Properties
ID
With numerical output, in order to refer to members, these have to be assigned an identifier
(ID). If you leave the setting as shown, STATIK assigns the IDs automatically.
In the case of larger structures one usually wants to bring some order into the IDs, without
having to identify every member. For this purpose the input of a prefix is convenient. The
ID of such members consists of the prefix, followed by an automatically generated number.
With 'manually' you have the possibility of identifying members with an ID you input
yourself.
. The checking and automatic generation of IDs is carried out when the structure is checked,
but if necessary it can be started manually.
. A well thought-out assignment of IDs or prefixes can also be useful in the selection of mem
bers by means of a prefix.
. The automatic assignment of IDs is sequentially ordered according to the geometrical posi
tion of the members in space and cannot be influenced.
Display
Distance from member

on screen
Position depends on
projection of mem Position between start
ber: below or above, and end of member
and left or right, re (0..1)
spectively
By these settings the presentation of the members can be influenced. The individually spe
cifiable presentation options are only applied if an associated layer is active. In the case of
active cross section layers for example, the cross sections of those members are shown,
which have the presentation option 'with cross section' activated.
In the case of member IDs it is sometimes not enough to activate the 'with ID', since an ac
ceptable automatic positioning of the IDs by the program, due to the different views, pro
jection possibilities and extra layers that can be activated, is not feasible. STATIK neverthe
less provides good support for suitable positioning:
You can select one or more members and then
S set and apply the desired settings
S or preferably use the <RMB> function 'Move Label' and position the ID interactively. As
all designations are shifted synchronously during graphic positioning, it may be neces
sary to switch them in advance using the dialog.
B-44 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
Elastically bedded members
An elastic bedding attribute is a member property defined in the initial stage and can be
modified in each new construction stage. The given stiffness value in X-, Y- and Z-direction
refers to the local coordinate system. Thus it is possible to generate special structures very
easily such as tunnels and foundations. Elastically bedded members are displayed in brown
colors with a thicker pen width.
. Members with eccentric connections and structure lines can not be used as elastically bed
ded members.
The program generates a number of internal nodes with springs along the member. The
density resp. the number of nodes can be defined in the group box 'member subdivision'.
Without any explicit input the subdivison depends on the dimension of the cross section.
Close to the start and end of the member the program always introduces an extra-node as
shown below.
. A minimal length is required for elastic bedded members (2 x "minimum member length"
which can be defined in the dialog „Settings” > „Tolerances / Further settings”). This condi
tion is also valid for members, which were created by intersecting..
STATIK-8 B-45
Member Subdivision
'Continuous Member':
If member lines intersect or touch, it is normally assumed that these are connected rigidly
to one another at the intersection or touching point, respectively. The program introduces
into the analysis for this purpose an FE node and intersecting member lines are subdivided
accordingly into several member elements.
If, however, the box 'Continuous Member' is active for the member, it remains free and
'doesn't see' members, which intersect it and also nodes that lie on it.
'Automatic Subdivision':
For analyses involving 2nd order theory and for eigenvalue analyses (buckling or dynamics)
of systems, to have sufficient accuracy it may be necessary to subdivide members into se
veral elements. For this purpose activate the box 'Automatic' and select a maximum
element length. The member line is then subdivided by the program into equal elements.
A further reason for subdividing members is for reaching a better approximation of the stiff
nesses along haunched members (see Seite B-34 ).
. Intersection points with other members may be in conflict with an automatic subdivision
of members.
Further Properties
Multiple Member
Several member lines lying on top of each other with the same start and end points are nor
mally not accepted by the program. If you want to suppress the error message and thus
permit multiple members, switch on the corresponding member's 'Multiple Member'
option.
Must be precise in a multiple member group of n members are the n-1 provided with this
attribute. The remaining member we call base member of multiple member group. If the
user all members of a group have the attribute, then in reviewing the structure automati
cally bar the group to the base member, in which then the attribute 'Multiple member' is
turned off.
The base member is of importance when point or line loads (see page B-75) can not be
uniquely associated with a member of a multiple member group. If several members of a
group in question (this they have in the load the same member axis have), so the load is re
moved at the base member. If none of these members of the base member, so there is an
error message.
. The selection of a particular member from a group of superimposed members may not be
possible by clicking and using a window all the members in the group are selected.
By switching on the member ID layer, the selection is carried out using the ID (ensure that
the field 'with ID' for the corresponding members is active).
At first, however, these IDs may lie over each other. But with the <RMB> function 'Move La
bel' they can be positioned individually.
B-46 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
Uniaxial bending about y axis

In the case of bridge decks with several webs, which are modelled in STATIK as grillages, the
cross sections of the edge beams, if they are input with the actual geometry, are often un
symmetrical. Thus one has rotated principal axes, which for normal loading leads to skew
bending. If one wants to avoid this effect - both in the determination of the section forces
using STATIK, and in the subsequent RC design - the field 'Uniaxial bending about y Axis' has
to be activated.
Actual cross section Cross sections in the grillage model
Edge beams Moments of inertia for standard setting:

Iy, Iz, Iyz -> Iyh, Izh, β (rotated principal axes)
zh z yh
With 'Uniaxial bending about y axis:
ß 1) for STATIK‐5:
y Iyz is assumed to be zero
-> Iyh=Iy, Izh=Iz, β=0
S 2) for subsequent RC design:
Analysis for bending about y axis only;
cross section considered symmetric
B 7.2.12 Member Dialog - tab sheet 8 - for Steel Member Analyses
The properties of this tabsheet are used for automatic Steel Member Analyses with the pro
gram AVENA.
B 7.3 Structure Lines, Structure Line Segments
The use of structure lines needs the program option 'Specialities'.

Structure lines are an alternative way to define member rows. They define a continuous and
possibly curved shape of a member axis and further serve as reference lines for loads and
tendons (the latter may only be used with structure lines). The positioning of the cross sec
tions are defined by their axis points (see page B-35);
Structure lines are especially useful for modeling girder bridges but not restricted to them.
For defining a girder bridge for example, one would introduce a structure line along the
road axis (or parallel to it), which is normally fixed before the structural analysis, and the po
sition of the cross sections and tendons are defined with respect to this axis.
Structure line as basis for the geome

trical definition of the superstructure
Structure line points Column

(normal member)
Structure line segment

(has properties of normal members)
The structure lines are described in detail in chap. E 2.
STATIK-8 B-47
B 7.4 External Stiffness Matrices
External stiffness matrices describe structural elements that may be part of a STATIK struc
ture but are not visible for the user like the normal members. Such elements are called su
per elements hereafter. The user interface of STATIK does not offer any means for a direct
input of such elements. They must be supplied from outside the program.
Super elements define a stiffness relation (stiffness matrix) between any deformation pa
rameters of a STATIK structure. Their stiffness matrices have an arbitrary dimension and are
added to the global stiffness matrix in addition to those of the members. The effect of such
a super element can be understood as internal restraint forces in a structure. An output of
these restraint forces is not provided by STATIK, i.e. there is no result output for super ele
ments.
Examples of Applications
A) Bending stiffness of story slab
There is an application of super elements for STATIK structures generated by the CEDRUS
building module. The bending stiffness of story slabs can be covered in STATIK models by
means of super elements generated in CEDRUS. Such a STATIK model acts as if the story
slabs were integrated in terms of finite element slab structures (with the 3 degrees of free
dom DZ, RX, RY in each node). The influence of the bending stiffness of the slabs can be
studied in this way.
B) Scissor joint with elastic coupling
Two crossing continuous bars (e.g. scaffolding poles) are connected by an elastic coupling
element (complete example see below):
rotational displacement
spring spring
Dialog 'List of External Stifness Matrices'

This button for external stiffness matrices in the tabsheet 'Structure' calls the following dia
log. It contains a list of all superelements introduced for the actual construction stage:
B-48 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
With the check boxes in the column 'active' the super elements can be activated or deacti
vated. Furthermore, there is a factor by which all elements of the stiffness matrix are multi
plied (stiffness factor).
This button deletes the selected super element from the actual construction stage.
The legend button generates a tabular output of the degrees of freedom involved in the
selected super element.
Complete Example for Joints with Coupling Springs
The diagram is a framework (plane frame) whose poles are connected by elastic node con
nectors shall be modeled in STATIK.
K4 S9 K5 S10 K6
The node connectors
have the following stiff
nesses:
Displacement springs:
S6 S7 S8 sDX = 90 kN/m
sDZ = 90 kN/m
K1 S4 K2 S5 K3 Rotational springs:
sRY = 13 kNm/rad
S1 S2 S3
z
The user interface of STATIK does not offer any means of modeling this structure. External
stiffness matrices, however, allow the modeling of the node connectors. The idea is the fol
lowing: At each crossing point two nodes Ki1 and Ki2 are introduced (at the same location).
The vertical members are connected with the Ki1 and the horizontal ones with the Ki2
nodes. The not yet connected horizontal and vertical members will now be connected by
external stiffness matrices containing the desired stiffness properties between the nodes
Ki1 and Ki2.
STATIK-8 B-49
Ki2
Ki Ki1
An external stiffness
matrix connects the
nodes Ki1 and Ki2 with
the desired stiffnesses
Side view
Procedure:
1) Input the structure (members and support nodes) as shown in the figure above. The
members should not cross but start or end at crossing points (if necessary, select the
members going through crossing points and use the function 'Intersecting Members'
in the context menu).
2) Introduce dual nodes in the connector points and give them the user defined names
K1..K6.
3) Each dual node consists of a primary and a secondary node. Connect the horizontal
members (S4, S5, S9, S10) with the secondary nodes (settings in the eccentricity tab
sheet of the member dialog):
The setting is made in the

tab sheet 'eccentricity' of
the member dialog
4) Create a text file named PKUPPL.SIN (anyname.SIN) in the subfolder 'INP' of the calcu
lation folder. It defines the displacement parameters that are connected by the external
stiffness matrices (one line per matrix). The first matrix, for example, connects the pa
rameters DX,DZ,RY of the node K1 with the same parameters of the node K1.2. The com
plete file looks as follows:
OPTION PARTIAL_INPUT 2
Y 'E1' A 'WKUPPL' K 'K1' 1 3 5 K 'K1.2' 1 3 5
Y 'E2' A 'WKUPPL' K 'K2' 1 3 5 K 'K2.2' 1 3 5
Y 'E3' A 'WKUPPL' K 'K3' 1 3 5 K 'K3.2' 1 3 5
Y 'E4' A 'WKUPPL' K 'K4' 1 3 5 K 'K4.2' 1 3 5
Y 'E5' A 'WKUPPL' K 'K5' 1 3 5 K 'K5.2' 1 3 5
Y 'E6' A 'WKUPPL' K 'K6' 1 3 5 K 'K6.2' 1 3 5
END
B-50 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
STATIK works internally with the 6 degrees of freedom DX,DY,DZ,RX,RY,RZ in each node,
numbered from 1 to 6. The DOF's DX,DZ,RY of plane frames thus have the numbers 1 3
5. By appending '.2' to a node ID, the secondary node of a dual node is denoted. <Tab>'s
may not be used but multiple spaces are allowed.
The input follows the syntax described by the following flow chart:
'WKUPPL' was chosen as filename for the stiffness matrix files which means that a file
named 'WKUPPL.ESA' must exist in the same folder (see next point).
5) Create a text file with the name WKUPPL.ESA in the same subfolder 'INP'. It should con
tain the terms of the coupling stiffness matrix (lower half of the symmetric matrix) which
is the same here for all node connectors:
90.0
0.0 90.0
0.0 0.0 13.0
-90.0 0.0 0.0 90.0
0.0 -90.0 0.0 0.0 90.0
0.0 0.0 -13.0 0.0 0.0 13.0
6) Import the file PKUPPEL.SIN defined in point (4) using the button in the tabsheet
'Structure'.
. When importing such a file (with an arbitrary name) all possibly existing external stiffness
matrices are deleted, i.e. all needed matrices must be included in the imported file.
7) Use the button to show the dialog with the list of the existing external stiffness ma
trices. It should now contain the 6 matrices:
8) Deactivate the entry 'check for multiple substructure' in the menu „Settings“ > „Toleran
ces / Further settings“.
Rigid and elastic connections mixed
If there are both rigidly and elastically connected displacement parameters in a dual node
the rigid connections are introduced as nodal constraints (as for the scissor joints described
on page B-42).
STATIK-8 B-51
B 7.5 Nodes
node dialog, buttons for direct creation of nodes with the most
see B 7.5.3 common support types (see hint at cursor)
B 7.5.1 General
In the analysis model nodes are the points at which the equilibrium conditions are
formulated, leading to the global system of equations for the whole structure. Nodes are
introduced everywhere where member elements connect and at all free member ends.
This is done automatically by the program and in general the nodes are of no direct interest
to the user. Nodes with special attributes, like support conditions, however, have to be
input explicitly.
Nodal Coordinate System

A nodal coordinate system (X', Y', Z') is assigned to every node, whose default directions
correspond to those of the global coordinate system. In this system the displacement de
grees of freedom of a node and, thus, also possible nodal loads, support conditions and re
actions are defined. In the nodes created by the user the nodal coordinate system can be
rotated arbitrarily. This is meaningful, above all in the case of supports which do not act in
global directions.
Nodes on a Member Line

If a node is created on a member line, the member for the calculation model is subdivided
into member elements. If no specific attributes are given for such a member (see below),
then it only serves the purpose of subdivision of an input member. This is probably only sel
dom of interest, since a member subdivision for the calculation model alone can be
achieved using the member attributes more easily. A frequent application, however, is the
creation of support nodes on a continuous beam, which was input only as a single member.
Fig. B−4 Support nodes on a continuous beam
Truss Nodes
If all members connected to a node have truss hinges (see page B-38) the node is called a
truss node. Its instable rotational degrees of freedom are eliminated and thus may not be
loaded by moments.
Reference Nodes
There are cases in which an input applies to a specific node. This is the case, for example,
when scaling the displacements of a load case, if one wants to use them as a predefined de
formation. This is done by assigning a value to a displacement component in a specified
node. For this purpose an input node must be present there, which has an identifier, to
which one can refer.
B-52 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
B 7.5.2 Display of Nodes
Use of the Layer Buttons

What should be visible from the nodes can be controlled via the layer buttons.
supported nodes (support symbol) node input without support
generated nodes
ID's of the visible nodes node orientation
There are two types of generated nodes:

a) Nodes resulting from the geometry of the input members, i.e. where members intersect
touch or end unless a node has been explicitly entered by the user..
b) Nodes resulting from automatic member subdivisions (see page B-46)
By default the layer button 'generated nodes' only displays the generated nodes of type (a).
Those of type (b) can be switched on by means of the entry 'Layer properties' in the context
menu of the layer button.
Setting the Symbol Size

The symbol size of the supports and node symbols can be influenced using this button in
the tab sheet 'structure'.
B 7.5.3 Node Dialog Overview

The Nodes dialogue serves to input and modify nodes and their properties. It is activated
by
S clicking on the Nodes button
S <RMB> with selected nodes > „Properties“

S clicking on a selected node or double clicking on a node
The numerous node properties are distributed over several tabsheets of the Node dialog.
ID / display options see B 7.5.7

node constraints see B 7.5.6
node orientation see B 7.5.5
support conditions... see B 7.5.4
Create node with set pa Apply set parameters for Search nodes with
rameters (= point input) selected nodes given properties
STATIK-8 B-53
B 7.5.4 Node Dialog - tab sheet 1 - Support conditions...
support conditions
for information
see B 7.5.6
Support conditions
Support conditions can be formulated in the nodes introduced by the user. It gets each of
the six of freedom (DOF) parameters
DX, DY, DZ: Displacements in directions X, Y, Z
RX, RY, RZ: Rotations about axes X, Y, Z
one of the following support conditions is assigned:
1) Free: not supported / rotation free
2) Blocked: no displacement/rotation possible
3) Elastic: (spring) stiffness value like kN/m according DOF is specified
It should be noted that the nodal degrees of freedom are oriented according the nodal
coordinate system, which - by default - corresponds to the global system.
Z' X'
ÄÄÄ
Z
k
Y
global system
X
ÄÄÄ
rotated system at node k
The buttons in the dialog have the following functions:
for individual settings of DX blocked (only for plane frames)

all DOFs DZ blocked (only for plane frames)
not supported DX, DY, DZ blocked
fixed (all DOFs blocked)
For nonlinear calculations, it can be de

termined for each support displacement
parameter whether
reactions with both signs possible
negative reactions only

positive reactions only
B-54 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
Dual Node
Two standard nodes at the same location are not allowed. If you need this for specifying
nodal constraints you can give a node the property 'Dual node'. Thus a standard node beco
mes a node pair, consisting of a primary and a secondary node.
Connecting Members with Dual Nodes

If a member end point lies on a dual node, the member must specify whether it is connected
with the primary or the secondary node. This is done in the tab sheet 'Eccentricities' of the
member dialog.
Node connections within resp. to double knot

Even with general node connections, it is important whether a relationship to a double
node relates to the first or second node. How this is determined is described for the node
connections (see page B-57).
B 7.5.5 Node Dialog - tab sheet 2 - Orientation
v2
X'=v1
Y'
v1
common plane of
then 3 vectors
v2
The nodal degrees of freedom, i.e. the displacement and rotation components (with any
specified support conditions) are usually defined in the global coordinate directions
(X,Y,Z). You can also orient the nodes individually, whereby the rotated directions
(X',Y',Z') always form a right-handed right-angled coordinate system.
For plane frames the definition of the new X' direction is sufficient. You input the two com
ponents of the direction vector or grab it with the mouse.
For space frames two direction vectors are needed to define the orientation. The first vec
tor v1 defines directly the X' direction and the second vector v2 defines the (X',Y') plane.
The projection of v2 onto Y' has the same direction as Y'.
The two direction vectors can be defined by inputting their components or by grabbing
with the mouse.
STATIK-8 B-55
B 7.5.6 Node Dialog - tab sheet 3 - Nodal Consraints
Definition of a Nodal Constraint

The specification of linear dependencies on displacement parameters among one another
is referred to as node constraints. Typical examples are rigid connections between a group
of nodes or scissor joints.
General formulation of constraints:
S = factor1 * M1 + factor2 * M2 + factor3 * M3+ ...
(S=slave parameter, i.e. dependent displacement parameter, Mi = master parameter, i.e.
free displacement parameter)
Master- / Slave nodes

If there is a connection to one or more parameters of a node, this node is considered the
master nodes.
Nodes with slave parameters are called slave nodes.
Limitations:
S Master nodes cannot be slave nodes at the same time
S Slave parameters may not have any support condition
S A displacement parameter may be used only once as a slave parameter
Input
Nodal constraints are properties of the slave nodes.
Preparations
Nodes for which constraints are to be defined must be input explicitly. Nodes generated by
the program, e.g. at member intersection points, cannot be used for constraint specifica
tions. Particular attention should be paid to the ID's of master parameter nodes since they
are referenced in the constraint specifications.
If you choose the automatic generation of ID's you must have the structure checked before
you can see and use the ID's.
It is strongly recommended, however, to use manually defined ID's that are meaningful and
still the same after modifications of the structure (see chap. B 7.5.7).
In order to see the nodes and their ID's the corresponding layers must be made visible. (see
chap. B 7.5.2).
Constraint Type
Constraints are, as mentioned above, linear relations between a slave and one or more mas
ter parameters. They are always specified as properties of nodes containing slave parame
ters.
B-56 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
Along with the general relation type specified by the formula shown above there are spe
cial relation types that often occur and that allow a simpler specification. Therefore, the
constraint type has to be specified first:
default setting.
If you want to cancel existing connec
tions, so it moves to this setting.
. Only the simpler dialogs for 2D structures (plane frames) are shown hereafter. Those for 3D
structures are just extended by the additional 3 displacement parameters.
General Constraint
The general formula
S = factor1 * M1 + factor2 * M2 + ...
is treated in the dialog as follows:
slave-
parameters
A node with these dialog settings specifies constraints for the two slave parameters dis
placement DZ and rotation RY. The relation for DZ reads as follows:
DZ is equal to 1.0 times the displacement X of node KC5 plus 4.25 times the displacement
Z of node KB12.
When specifying relations between the two nodes of a dual node the secondary node is al
ways considered as slave node.
If the master parameter belongs to a dual node that does not contain the slave parameter
the primary node is addressed by the node ID (e.g. K22) and the secondary node by the
node ID extended by '.2' (e.g. K22.2).
Equal Parameters
This specifies a contraint of the type
Slave parameter = 1.0 * Master parameter .
for grabbing the

master node
This setting reads as follows:

The displacement parameters DX and DZ are equal to the corresponding displacement pa
rameters of the master node with the ID 'KP'.
. Settings like the one above are normal properties and can be applied to a series of selected
nodes.
Equal Parameters for Dual Nodes

This connection (only active with double nodes, setting in register 1 of the node dialog see
page B-55) corresponds to the type „Same parameters“ with the specialty that the master
node is not a third node but the first node of the double node pair and is therefore not expli
citly specified got to.
STATIK-8 B-57
. For dual nodes all constraint properties belong to the secondary node, which means that
the secondary node is a slave node and the primary node a master node.
With the settings shown above, a scissor joint like the one described on page B-42 can be
defined.
Rigid Connection
The checked parameters are rigidly connected with the master node.
The program thus introduces the connection relationships required for a rigid connection
to a master node for every selected slave parameter, which contain terms with displace
ment and rotation parameters of the master node.
An example for the use of rigid connections is a rigid membrane connecting the nodes in
a story floor in a skeletal model of a building. Here the displacement parameters DX and DY
and the rotation RZ of all nodes except an arbitrary master node in a floor are rigidly con
nected with the master node.
B 7.5.7 Node Dialog - tab sheet 3 - IDs / Display Options
distance
angle
IDs
In order to refer to nodes in the numerical output, these have to have IDs (names). If you
leave the setting as shown STATIK provides the ID automatically.
For large structures the IDs have to exhibit more order, without having to identify each
node. For this prefixes are useful. The ID of such nodes consists of the prefix, followed by an
automatically generated number.
Using 'manually' you can also identify nodes with your own name selection. This is recom
mendable for all nodes that are referred to elsewhere (e.g. for master nodes of nodal
constraints).
. The checking and the automatic generation of IDs is not done immediately, but only when
checking the structure, but it can be started manually.
. The automatic assignment of IDs is done sequentially according to the geometrical posi
tion of the nodes in space and cannot be influenced.
B-58 STATIK-8
B 7 Structure
Display Options
You can decide whether a node's ID should be displayed if the corresponding layer button
is pressed.
By switching on the control panel 'with ID', it is often not done because an acceptable auto
matic positioning of the ID can from the program, given the different views, projection pos
sibilities and switchable layers, can not be expected. But STATIK provides good support for
appropriate placements:
To influence the positioning of the ID labels you can select one or more nodes and then
S set the corresponding parameters in the node dialog (shown above) (distance in mm
on screen independent of zoom factor, angle with reference to 3:00 hours counterclock
wise)
S or use the command 'Move label' in the context menu for positioning the labels interac
tively.
B 7.6 Construction Stages
If you want to analyze a structure in different variants you can do it by successively modify
ing and calculating. In order to keep all calculated variants it is better to make copies of a
calculation and then modify each copy individually.
However, if you consider loadings on a structure in different states (e.g. construction
stages) whose effects cumulate you need the 'construction stages' concept of STATIK. It al
lows the combination of results of loadings applied in different construction stages of a
structure.
Working with construction stages needs the program option 'Specialities' and is described
in Chap. E 3.
B 7.7 Display Settings
The button shows a dialog, which is also accessible with the menu „Display“ > „Structure“
(see page B-14).
STATIK-8 B-59
In a first group, the scaling factors can be set for the presentation of the respective symbols.
The factors relate to the basic setting of the symbol size, which is performed in menu „Dis
play” > „Symbols”.
Member render offset:
without Offset with Offset
Depending on the setting of the

offset, the members are
extended or shortened at the
rendered appearance. This can
possibly unsightly gaps are
avoided.
B 7.8 Documentation of the Structural Data
A printable list of all structural input data is generated.
B 7.9 Check Input / Reset Calculation
Checks the structure as far as possible for correctness of input . Instabilities for example can
be detected only by the solution process.
After a successful check, the check button becomes inactive and the button for resetting
the structure to the unchecked state is enabled.
After relevant modifications of the structure it is automatically reset to the unchecked state.
After errors in a calculation a reset may help to solve the problem.
B 7.10 Import of Structural Data
Imports structural data (without loadings) from an external file. At present only the STATIK
recovery format (text file) is supported. Please contact Cubus for detailed information.
B 7.11 Export of Structural Data
Exports structural data (without loadings). Only the DSTV format is supported in the cur
rent version of STATIK. Please contact Cubus for detailed information.
B-60 STATIK-8
B 8 BIM
B 8 BIM
The tab sheet 'BIM' contains the interface for three-dimensional, component-oriented data
exchange. Here, a 3D model of a structure can be read from a file and displayed. The BIM
data can then be used to create the calculation model. There is also an update function
available so that the calculation model can be updated after changes in the BIM data. Since
STATIK is a program for frame structures, it only makes sense to import BIM models of build
ings that have a skeleton structure (e.g. steel structures, halls, etc.). Buildings with slabs, col
umns and walls should be processed using the CEDRUS program, which also has a BIM in
terface.
. For the BIM interface a license for the option '3D' is required.
B 8.1 Introduction
„Building Information Modeling“ (BIM) enables the exchange of three-dimensional, digital
building data between the planning partners involved. STATIK has a BIM interface, which
allows a three-dimensional, component-oriented model to be read in from a CAD file (e.g.
architectural model) and a calculation model to be created using this data. With the current
version of STATIK, 3D models can be imported from BIM files in IFC format.
BIM model calculation model

An imported BIM model cannot be used directly for static and dynamic analysis. There are
several reasons for this:
S BIM models are volume models that describe the three-dimensional geometry of the
components. A calculation model, on the other hand, only consists of coordinated sur
faces and axes that represent the static system.
S In the BIM model, all components are depicted geometrically as detailed as possible,
while in the calculation model only the structurally effective structural elements are
permitted. These should also be defined geometrically as simply as possible so that the
results can still be checked.
S It is characteristic of the majority of the CAD 3D models that occur in practice that they
mostly only convince in a selected plan view or as a rendered view. Most CAD systems
do not guarantee consistent, three-dimensional data, i.e. they allow substantial draw
ing inaccuracies (e.g. overlaps). However, consistent data are the basic prerequisite for
a useful calculation model.
In order to obtain a reasonable calculation model, the geometry of the components from
the BIM model must be reworked.
Interactive extraction of the calculation model

The volume model of a component from a BIM file can be automatically converted into a
STATIK member with a cross-section and member axis, provided that the component is a
beam, a column or a beam. The result is a frame structure with countless eccentric member
connections. This makes the static model of the structure very confusing, which leads to
results that are hardly verifiable in static and dynamic calculations. In addition, the verifica
tions according to codes are very complex because almost every member is stressed due
to inclined bending and torsion due to the eccentric member connections. The direct con
version of a BIM model into a frame model therefore rarely makes sense.
For this reason, STATIK offers an interactive extraction of the calculation model. Although
it is possible and sensible to convert some of the BIM elements (e.g. columns) directly into
members with the same geometry, the user can also selectively only take the cross-sections
from the BIM model and construct the member axes manually by picking up the coordi
nates. This interactive way of working is explained in section B 8.3.
STATIK-8 B-61
The module BIMlink

With BIMlink, STATIK has an interactive program module that enables data exchange via
BIM files. Thanks to the integrated update functionality, the calculation model can be up
dated more easily when changes are made to the original BIM file. BIMlink is explained in
the next section.
B 8.2 BIMlink
STATIK is integrated into the BIM-based, digital planning process via the BIMlink window.
This can be opened in the tab sheet 'BIM' using the „Start BIMlink“ button (see figure
below).
Tab sheet 'BIM'
Like the main window of the Cubus program, the BIMlink window is a graphic editor, which
has a drawing area, a menu, a control tab sheet, drawing tools and layer switches. BIMlink
works in the 3D view and manages the 3D BIM model, which is read from a BIM file (see im
age below).
BIMlink window with opened import dialog
B-62 STATIK-8
B 8 BIM
B 8.2.1 Tab sheet 'Import'

In this tab sheet, the 3D BIM data is read from a file in IFC format.
A BIM file can be read in with the [Import] button. Existing data will be deleted. Files of the
following formats are supported:
S IFC Version 2x3
S IFC Version 4
With the button [Reset] all existing BIM data are deleted.
In a BIM file, the material data are only saved as names. For the structural calculation, these
names must be assigned to building materials, which is done in the 'Assign building materi
als' dialog. This is opened with the button opposite.
This button opens the 'Element filter settings' dialog. In this dialog, minimal geometry di
mensions can be specified for the individual element types (such as columns, beams).
Once the BIM model has been read in and the imported components (= BIM elements)
checked using the 'BIM element' dialog (see next two sections), you can return to the main
STATIK window by closing the BIMlink window.
B 8.2.2 Representation of the BIM elements

When reading the BIM file, all components (= BIM elements) relevant for the structural cal
culation are filtered out of the mass of the data read in and assigned to an element type (e.g.
beam, column). Only geometric objects that correspond to the filter settings are read. This
enables many invalid or unnecessary objects to be filtered out of the 3D BIM data.
A graphic field is created for each BIM element read in and displayed in the graphic area.
The BIM elements are stored in the layer group 'BIM', where is a layer for visibility control
for each element type.
With these layer switches, the display can be influenced as follows:
display all BIM elements
display BIM elements as axes with cross-section instead of volume
draw BIM elements in the color of the building material
STATIK-8 B-63
B 8.2.3 Dialog BIM elements

Each BIM element has an attribute dialog that shows the most important properties.
Activation:
Active = considered in the model
Element type:
according to type filter (see tab
sheet 'Import')
Geometric dimensions
Building material:
automatically according to the
assignment (see tab sheet
'Import') or explicitly
Configuration of the help text on
the mouse pointer
Information from the BIM file
B 8.2.4 Tab sheet Update

In this tab sheet, a new version of the 3D BIM data can be read from a file. After a successful
file import, the newly imported BIM elements are compared with the existing ones and the
changes found are immediately displayed graphically.
The representation of the BIM elements shows a good overview of all innovations in the
model. Unchanged BIM elements are light gray, new ones or those that have been modified
in terms of geometry or building material are shown in color. The changes are divided into
the following 5 groups (new, deleted, etc.), the visibility of which can be controlled by a
switch in the Update layer group.
B-64 STATIK-8
B 8 BIM
B 8.3 Extract the calculation model
As soon as the BIM model has been imported using the BIMlink dialog, the extraction of the
frame model can start in the main window of STATIK. As explained in B 8.1, the calculation
model is usually extracted interactively by the user, which is explained in the following sec
tions.
B 8.3.1 Representation of the BIM elements in STATIK

The imported BIM elements are saved as 3D graphic objects in the BIM layer group. The dis
play of the BIM elements can be controlled using the following layer switches:
Display BIM elements
Display inactive BIM elements
Display BIM elements as axes with cross-section instead of volume
Draw BIM elements in the color of the building material
Display after update of the BIM model

If the BIM data was updated using BIMlink, additional layer switches in the BIM group help
to update the frame model. Depending on the switch position, selected BIM elements are
highlighted and others are drawn in light gray. These layer switches represent the following
types of BIM elements:
new
deleted
moved (with unchanged dimensions)
with changed geometry (e.g. member axis, orientation)
with other changes (e.g. building material name)
STATIK-8 B-65
B 8.3.2 Transfer of the cross section from the BIM element

The member axis of the static model often does not match the center of gravity of the BIM
element (see B 8.1), which is why a member element cannot be generated directly from the
BIM element. The member axis and cross-section must therefore be entered in two steps.
Proceed as follows:
1. First open the member dialog (see below). The cross-section can now be taken directly
from the BIM model using the button opposite. After pressing the button, select the cor
responding BIM element. STATIK now creates a cross-section based on the building ma
terial and the cross-sectional geometry and places it in the „Cross-section“ input field
of the dialog.
Member dialog with BIM button
2. Now press [Insert] and construct the start and end point of the member using the
graphics editor. This is usually done by conveniently tapping the coordinates of BIM
elements or members that have already been entered.
Automatic generation of the cross section

Before generating a new cross-section, a search is made for a suitable one in the list of those
already used. If the search is unsuccessful, a new cross section is created based on the build
ing material and the geometry of the BIM element. If the building material is steel, the first
step is to look for a corresponding cross-section in the list of all rolled profiles (= profile li
brary from AVENA). If this search is not successful, a new parameterized steel cross section
with identical masses is created. If it is a BIM element made of a different building material,
a parameterized cross-section is always generated.
. A large part of the beams and carriers of a frame structure must be constructed using this
method, since the static model does not match the construction.
B 8.3.3 BIM element: Automatic generation of a member

If the member axis of the static model coincides with the center of gravity of the BIM ele
ment, a corresponding STATIK member can be generated directly for a BIM element. This
is also possible for a group of BIM elements in a single action.
B-66 STATIK-8
B 8 BIM
Proceed as follows for the automatic generation of members from BIM elements:
1. Open the bar dialog and switch the selectability of the BIM elements by pressing the
button in the lower area of the dialog:
2. Now select all BIM elements for which you want to generate member elements.
3. Now press the [Introduce for selected BIM elements] button (see image above), which
brings up the following dialog:
If you now press [Yes], a new cross-section will be created for each member generated
analogously to B 8.3.2. If you choose [No] the cross-section currently selected in the dia
log is used for the new members.
. The vertical elements (= columns) of a skeleton structure can usually be created directly
from the BIM elements using this method, since the axes in the BIM and static models are
congruent.
B 8.4 Export to IFC File
You can export your STATK structure into an IFC file. The export function is available in the
main menu „File“ > „Export“ > „IFC“.
In the export all trusses and beams are saved as a „Coordination View“ model into an IFC
file of version IFC2x3.
The export is only supported, if the input data check was successfully. For members with
variable cross sections the cross section at the members’s start is used for all of the member.
STATIK-8 B-67
B 9 Surfaces
Selection of a de Administration of surfaces with:

fined surface [New], [Settings], [Delete]
In the tabsheet 'Surfaces' the surfaces are defined, which serve as a basis for the transfer of
distributed loads to members and/or nodes. It contains the following buttons and input
fields:
Selection of the members
and/or nodes
that should carry the loads see B 9.2.2 page B-70
Input of outline see B 9.2.3 page B-70
Input of openings in surface see B 9.2.3 page B-70
Check of active or of all surface(s)
. The loads are input in the tabsheet 'Loads'.
B 9.1 Model of the Load Transfer
The Load Surface is an arbitrary polygonally enclosed plane surface, which can also in
clude polygonal openings.
The loads act on this surface, which then transfers the loads to selected members and/or
nodes. The nodes and the axes of the members, respectively, which should resist the loads,
have to lie on the surface (tolerance can be set).
Point load
Line load
Area load
Load surface = plane 'skin', Opening in surface

on which the loads act
The load transfer is carried out completely automatically by means of an FE plate analysis,
for which the load surface is the plate and the load resisting members form the linear sup
ports. The support forces are then the loading of the members.
Smoothing
As the only parameter the smoothing, i.e. the ratio of the plate stiffness to the stiffness of
the supports, can be influenced by the user in a limited way. If this ratio is increased, the vari
ation of the reactions is less (they are 'smoother'), if it is reduced, the variation is greater
(they are more uneven or erratic - i.e. less smooth) and for a uniformly distributed load there
may even be changes of sign.
B-68 STATIK-8
B 9 Surfaces
B 9.2 Input
B 9.2.1 Create a New Surface

With this button as many new surfaces can be created, as desired. A surface, however, is
only completely defined, if its outline and the load carrying members are input. The fol
lowing dialog is displayed, which also comes with the adjoining button for modifying pa
rameters:
Only used for mass distributions (Dynamics),

see page C-4
It serves to give the surface a name, to define the plane in which the surface lies and to spec
ify the amount of smoothing (see below).
To delete the actual surface (not possible if it is in use, i.e. referenced by a loading).
Plane
The plane, in which the surface should lie, is a normal working plane, as in STATIK, for an eas
ier handling of three-dimensional structures.
You can either select an existing plane with the help of the combo box or, using the button
to the right of it, define a new plane.
. Subsystems cannot be deleted if they are referenced by existing surfaces.
Smoothing
To control the smoothing move the 'Sliding Control' to the left for less smoothing or to the
right for more smoothing. First inspect the generated loads for medium smoothing and
then try with a different setting if you are not satisfied with the result. Equilibrium should
be fulfilled in each case.
STATIK-8 B-69
B 9.2.2 Load Carrying Members and Nodes

This button brings up the dialog to define the members and/or nodes, to which the loads
are applied:
There are two ways of selecting the members that are to resist the loads:
With the automatic selection you have three control fields, one for all members in the U
direction, one for all in the V direction and one for the remaining members. You can also use
them in combination. All three together implies all members in the plane.
For more complex cases there is the manual method. Select members and then click on
the buttons [+], to add these to the resisting elements or on [-], to remove them from the
resisting elements.
The currently set resisting elements are shown in a special color. If the setting is according
to your requirements, you can [Close] the dialog.
The definition of a surface is now complete. With the exception of the definition of the
planes all settings can be changed at any time.
. If you want to use nodes (e.g. top of a column member) for carrying loads these nodes must
exist as node objects and therefore be introduced beforehand.
B 9.2.3 Outline and Openings of a Surface

A surface must have one outline and may have any number of openings.
With these buttons you start the input of the outline or of an opening in the surface. You
need the polygon tool of the Graphics Editor, which is automatically started.
. Polygons defining openings may not intersect or touch one another or the polygon for the
outline.
false ok
. Outline and opening polygons may not intersect load-carrying members at very small
angles. End points of load-carrying members should either lie exactly on such polygons or
at a clear distance from them:
Load carrying
member
Outline
false ok ok
B-70 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
B 10 Loads
All kinds of loads acting on a structure are defined in this tabsheet.
Loads tab sheet for standard loadings:
Actions active loa Loading administration Buttons for Display

ding with: [New], [Modify], load elements options, le
B 10.5 [Duplcate], [Delete], gend, checks..
[Loading list]
B 10.3
Loads tabsheet for surface loadings:
Buttons for load Display of Load

elements and generated import
selection of load loads and
surface masses B 10.4
Loadings see B 10.2 page B-72

Loading types:
S Loading see B 10.2.2 page B-74
S Combination loading see B 10.2.3 page B-82
S Loading generators see B 10.2.4 page B-82
S Influence lines see B 10.2.5 page B-91
S Mass distributions see B 10.2.6 page B-92
S Mass combinations see B 10.2.7 page B-93
B 10.1 Important Terms concerning Loads
Load Elements
Load elements are the basic objects for defining loads, e.g. point loads, line loads, area
loads, etc. .
Load Case
A load case is a load configuration used for verifying a structure for a particular design crite
rion. It usually consists of a combination of actions prescribed by a code with the corre
sponding load and combination factors. The term load case is only understood in this way
in STATIK. It should not be confused with the term loading described below.
STATIK-8 B-71
Loading
A loading in STATIK consists of an arbitrary number of load elements. Loadings are the basic
items for which results can be calculated. They can be combined and used in envelope spe
cifications.
Loading
Examples:
- self-weight
- live load span 1
- vehicle in position 1 (e.g. 4 wheel loads)
Load element
Strictly speaking, this only applies to loads of the type 'load' and combination load. In order
not to inflate the user interface unnecessarily, something else runs over the loads, such as
Load generators or mass distributions. For this purpose there are load types which are de
scribed in detail below.
Action
The very general term action is given a more restricted definition in the Cubus programs.
In actuality an action consists of one or more loadings, which all belong to the same type
of action, such as permanent loads, live loads of category A, snow loads, etc. Actions are the
units from which action combinations are formed. An action combination, for example,
could be
1.35 * dead load + 1.5 * live loads .
Action combination
Action ≅ Load case
... ...
plus or ...
Action * Action *
Loading Loading Combination coeff. Combination coeff.
. If an action consists of more than one loading, these loadings may not occur in just one
combination (e.g. live loads unfavorably positioned on several spans of a bridge). Different
combinations are to be considered for design purposes which have to be defined in a su
perposition rule that also belongs to an action.
Limit state specification

In general, for dimensioning there are several limit states and for each limit state several
load cases or action combinations that have to be considered. The limit state specifications
are a summary of all action combinations to be investigated for a given limit state (e.g.
ultimate load). On their basis the limit values of individual result components for the corre
sponding limit state may be determined.
B 10.2 Loadings
B 10.2.1 Administration of Loadings

Each loading has a number of properties, which are summarized in the Loading dialog. It
appears when
S creating a new loading
S duplicating a loading
S modifying an existing loading
B-72 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
and looks as follows:
1
Action that is to be
assigned to the loa
ding;
Depends on the type
of structure (buil
ding, highway
bridges ..., see
Menu „Settings“ >
„General...“); Identification of
User-defined ac the loading
tions are possible Any text to de
scribe the loading
Construction stage
Inactive loadings are in which the loa
not solved ding acts
'Exclusive' loadings If the system is
assigned to the only stable for 2nd
same action will only order calculations
act 'either-or' in (under initial
automatically gene tension forces)
rated envelope spe
cifications Must be checked
for loadings with
Such loadings can surface loads (a
also be used as mix with loads on
mass distributions nodes and mem
for dynamic analy bers is not possi
ses ble)
Normally only the specified surface loads are
listed in the text legend of a loading. Check this
box to include also the generated member and
nodal loads
1
First the loading type has to be chosen. Normally it is the standard type 'Loading'. The possi
ble types are described below.
With this button you delete the selected loading and
this button will display the list of all specified loadings:
The buttons at the top of the list window offer the following functions:
New loading, modify loading (same as in tabsheet 'Loads')
Delete marked loadings
Mark all empty loadings (for deleting)
Generates a legend of all marked loadings
STATIK-8 B-73
Adapt load elements to structure:

Load elements are input geometrically as point or line objects possibly anywhere in space.
Only during the check of the loadings does the program make the link between these ob
jects and the nodes and members of the structure if possible, i.e. if the objects lie on nodes
and/or members. If you make changes to the geometry of the structure the load elements
may not lie on the structure anymore. This function tries to find the members on which the
loads may lie by moving them along their lines of action. Of course, this is not always possi
ble and depends on the changes made to the structure.
Change action assignment
For transformation of generated loadings to normal loadings:

Loadings resulting from load generators are always deleted and generated anew after a re
set of the structure. So modifications to such loadings would not be saved and, therefore,
are not permitted. With this function generated loadings can be changed to standard load
ings that no longer know about their originator.
Transformation of combinations to standard loadings:
Hide generated loadings (for better overview)
Shows printable list of loadings
Print entry for list of loadings
B 10.2.2 Type 'Loading'

These are the standard loadings used for entering load elements. Depending on the setting
in the loading attributes dialog one of the following two types of load
elements can be input
S loads acting directly on nodes and elements
self weight / accelerations see page B-75
line loads see page B-76
point loads see page B-79
S loads acting on a surface see page B-79

area loads see page B-81
line loads see page B-81
point loads see page B-82
B-74 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
Self-weight / Acceleration Loads
This dialog permits the specification of acceleration loads, which only act on the masses of
the members obtained from their cross sections. The loads are the inertial forces caused by
the specified acceleration.
The load element is introduced as a point object that can be placed anywhere after pressing
the button [Create].
For the frequent case of self-weight an option field is provided, to which an acceleration in
the Z direction of 10 m/s2 (can be changed) belongs.
The loads act either on all members or on the members of a subsystem if one is selected in
the dialog. (see B 5.4).
It is simplistically assumed that acceleration loads are applied centrally to the member
main axis, that is that the mass of the member cross-section, in which acceleration loads
acting actually coincides with the cross-sectional center of gravity. For sections that are
composed of different materials and those with static inactive parts this is not generally the
case. In cases where this assumption seems inadmissible must dispense with the use of ac
celeration loads, respectively it must be entered in addition the torsional moments occur
ring.
Line and Point Loads

In contrast to the acceleration loads, line and point loads are input as geometrical objects
(lines and points), whose reference to the structure is only established when checking the
loadings. During input they can be modified using the Graphics Editor like general drawing
objects.
For the analysis, however, all line and point loads have to lie exactly on the member axes and
nodal loads on the nodes. Overhanging loads and loads in open space are not allowed.
Load point
not on
structure
overhanging
Loads on multiple members

With multiple members (siehe Seite B-46) with the same axis of the rod, the load is assigned
to the base bar of the group. If none of these members of the base member, so get an error
message.
. With multiple members with the same member axis can thus be provided with only one of
these members with point and line loads. This does not apply acceleration loads, since
these are not entered geometrically.
For Point Loads see page B-79
STATIK-8 B-75
Line Loads
This button leads to the line load dialog used for uniformly or linearly distributed loads:
see p. B-77
switch on for uniform

distribution, switch off
for trapezoidal loads
see p. B-78
see p. B-77
see p. B-77
activates the line tool

for drawing the load
line
Local, global, projective
Value per unit

Model Direction
length
local member
local along member axis
coordinate system
global global along member axis
perpendicular to
projektive global load direction
(projection)
. After the input of a load there is, as mentioned above, no link yet between the load element
and the structural member on which the load will act. For local loads this means that a cor
rect display of the load directions is generally not yet possible, since the corresponding
member and therefore its local coordinate system is not yet known (exception: structure
lines). After checking a loading, the display of its loads is adapted and correct as long as
there is no reset of the loading to the unchecked state.
B-76 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
The load types strain and curvature
These are used above all for temperature loads and are always defined in the local coordi
nate system. If one denotes by v(x) the local displacement of a point on the member axis
at a distance x (with the displacement components vx, vy, vz and the rotation components
r x, ry, rz) the distributed loads for the directions x, y, z are defined as follows:
dv x drx
ε: x: åx + κ: x: Ëx + *)
dx dx
dv y dry
y: gy + *) y: Ëy +
dx dx
dv dr
z: g z + z *) z: Ëz + z
dx dx
*) components of minor practical importance.
Example for temperature load:
z α: thermal
expansion co
∆To efficient
y x
h
∆Tu
DTo ) DTu DTo * DTu

åx + @a Ëy + @a
2 h
Create for selected members:
members are only

selectable if this but
ton is pressed
A line load may span over several members if they lie on a straight line without gaps. But
one often wants to introduce a line load on several members that do not fulfill this condi
tion. For such cases there is the possibility to select the desired members first and then in
troduce the specified load on all these members by clicking the button [Create for selected
members].
This is an input help. The result of such action is the same as if the loads would all have been
drawn individually.
Create for selected member row:
members are only is not active if

selectable if this but selected members
ton is pressed are not in a row
The program further supports the input of a constant or linear line load on a not necessarily
straight row of members.
linear dis
tribution
member distances
row from row
ends
mark for start

of member row
STATIK-8 B-77
The button is active if one member or several mem

bers in a row are selected. As the figure shows the load needs not to begin directly at the
start or end exactly at the end of the member row. Clicking the button calls the following
dialog:
The start of the row

is important for tra
pezoidal loads and
for distances
The arbitrarily chosen start an end points of the member row can be exchanged by clicking
on the corresponding button.
Load eccentricities
Z
eccen‐
trizity member eccen‐
trizity
load line
Line loads of forces may have eccentricities. This possibility is limited to vertical loads (Z di
rection) for forces in global directions.
The directions of the eccentricities are defined as follows:
for global and projective forces:
In the directon of the vector product of the Z-vector of the global coordinate system and
the vector of the load line (not allowed for vertical load lines).
local forces in direction
x: eccentricities possible in local y and z possible
y: eccentricities possible in local z
z: eccentricities possible in local y
B-78 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
Point Loads
This button leads to the point loads dialog:
activates the point

drawing tool for de
fining the load point
For point loads it must be specified whether the load is acting on a member (in the local or
global direction) or on a node (in the nodal coordinate system).
Local point loads on members are not allowed at member ends since the directions would
not be clearly defined if several members were to meet in such a point.
Prescribed displacements and rotations of nodal parameters require a blocked support of
the corresponding parameters.
Surface Loads
point load
line load
area load
load surface = plane skin,

on which the loads act
In the case of 3D structures (space frames), with the exception of the self‐weight of the
member, one often has to do with surface loads. Examples are floor loads, roof loads, facade
loads, loads transmitted through a carriageway, pressure loads like wind, water, etc.
Assigning such loads by hand to the members of the structure is very time-consuming, is
a source of errors and is difficult to check. For this purpose STATIK provides the facility of
surface loads, which the program assigns automatically to the desired members.
Before defining surface loads (point loads, line loads or area loads) you have to select a load
transmission surface (subsequently abbreviated to surface) on which the loads are to act.
Such surfaces are defined in the tabsheet “Surfaces“ (see chapter B 9).
STATIK-8 B-79
Load transfer model
The load transfer of surface loads is carried out by means of an automatically generated
Finite Element plate model, whereby the surface (load transmission surface) forms the
plate with constant thickness and the projection of the load transmission members onto
the surface are the line supports (freely rotating about their axes), on which the plate is
supported. The reactions of this support are in fact the sought member loads, which are
statically equivalent to the input loads. Attention is drawn to the following points:
1) A reduced plate stiffness is assumed over the support lines, so that the influence of the
loads is kept as local as possible - an assumption which one usually makes in hand calcu
lations.
2) The ratio of plate stiffness to support stiffness has a relatively big influence on the distri
bution of the reactions. If it is increased the reactions are more uniformly distributed
(smoother), whereas if it is reduced the reactions vary more strongly and changes of
sign are frequent. This stiffness ratio, designated in the program as the smoothing fac
tor, can be changed by the user within certain limits.
3) The load distribution is determined on the basis of the vertical components acting on
the plate. For the components in the plane of the plate the same distribution is assumed.
Whether this is permissible in a specific case has to be decided by the user. For loads
which do not deviate by more than 45 degrees from the vector normal to the loading
surface, this assumption is generally adequate.
4) Since no moments are transferred from the surface loads to the load-carrying members,
these members must build some grid or strip system and the surface loads should lie
within such a grid, i.e. the loads should generally be surrounded by load carrying mem
bers. “Overhanging loads“ are possible but the result of the load transmission should be
checked by the user.
A more exact determination of the load transmission would require a very complex model,
which would include the stiffnesses and structural action of the loading surface (roof sheet
ing, facade, bridge deck...) as well as that of the overall structure. In this case this would rep
resent an unjustifiable effort.
The generated member and nodal forces can be inspected both graphically and numeri
cally.
. To check the plausibility of the results one should, without fail, look at the generated
loads graphically!
If the automatically generated load transmission does not meet your requirements in a spe
cific case, then you have no alternative but to input the desired member loads by hand.
Input of surface loads
It is not always advantageous to actually specify an area load as a surface load in STATIK. If
the effort for inputting the loads directly on members is not significantly higher this
method should be preferred. When using surface loads one should be aware of the model
used in STATIK for transferring such loads to member and nodal loads.
A loading may contain either nodal and member loads or surface loads. Set the dialog ap
propriately when creating a new loading since this property cannot be changed later
Before load elements can be specified in a surface loading, a surface must be selected. For
this purpose there is a selection box offering all surfaces defined in the tabsheet Surfaces:
Within the same loading loads on different surfaces can be specified.
B-80 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
Area Loads on Surfaces

Use this button to define area loads on a surface:
Local: normal to surface (onlyZ) in

direction w of the correspon
ding working plane
Projective: load value per surface area
normal to load direction
For linear (i.e. non uniform) load distribu
tions different load values are assigned
to three arbitrary points of the load poly
gon, thus defining the load distribution
plane.
By default these are the first 3 points of
the polygon. Using the arrow buttons the
points can be assigned to other polygon
points.
Calls the polygon drawing tool to input

the load polygon
area load
value 2
value 1
value 3 load polygon

surface
Line Loads on Surfaces

Use this button to define constant or trapezoidal line loads on a surface:

ding working plane
Projective: load value per surface area
normal to load direction
Calls the line drawing tool for drawing

the load line
STATIK-8 B-81
Point Loads on Surfaces

Using this button the point loads on a surface are specified:

ding working plane
Calls the point drawing tool for drawing

the load point
B 10.2.3 Type Loading Combination

Results of loadings can be combined by means of result combinations, specified in the tab
sheet Analyses. For nonlinear analyses or analyses according to 2nd order theory such su
perpositions of results are not admissible. In these cases the loadings involved must be
combined to a new loading before calculation. STATIK offers this possibility with the load
ing type Loading Combination. Loading combinations are treated like normal loadings
with the exception that the may not be used in other loading combinations.
. Loading combinations are always assembled at calculation time. Thus changes of the load
ings involved are always accounted for in loading combinations.
. Combined results from loadings acting in different construction stages are only available
via result combinations. A loading combination of such loadings is not possible.
After closing the dialog 'New Loading' the following self-explanatory dialog for the specifi
cation of the combination is shown:
Load factor
The list on the left contains all combinable loadings. Loading combinations may not be
combined.
Loading combinations are displayed as follows:
A double click on this box opens the dialog shown above for editing the combination.
B 10.2.4 Type Loading Generator

Strictly speaking a loading of type 'Generator' is not a loading. It consists rather of a set of
instructions for the generation of loadings. Therefore, results are not available for a load
generator itself but only for the loadings generated by it.
B-82 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
If Generator has been chosen as loading type the desired generator type can be selected
from a list box:
B-83
B-85
B-86
B-88
B-89
Generated loadings are not editbale as long as they are not transformed to standard load
ing (a feature offered in the loading list dialog).
If a loading of type generator is deleted, its generated loadings are deleted as well.
Generator for Road Traffic Loads

It generates the loadings for the load model 1 (SIA 261, Eurocode) as well as for the horizon
tal loads. It is designed for girder bridges that are modeled by a structure line (or several in
a row). The necessary parameters are specified in the following dialog:
The load generator only works on structure

lines. In this field the name(s) of the structure
line(s) on which the traffic acts must be entered
(',' separated). If more than one name is given,
the structure lines must form a chain.
Distance between axle load group positions.

The positions will be uniformly distributed within
a span
The alpha factors are code specific coefficients
covering specific traffic properties (see e.g. SIA
261, chap. 10.3).
b/2 b/2
z ey
ez
y
Structure line cross section with its

input axes
b = width of carriageway
ey = eccentricity of carriageway in y‐direction (for vertical loads)
ez = eccentricity of carriageway in z‐direction (for horizontall loads, see below)
Vertical loads - Layout in longitudinal direction
The distributed loads q are introduced in spans and analyzed in unfavourable combina
tions. Sections between two supports or columns (members connected with structure
line) are considered as spans. Whether a structure line point acts or can act as a field limit
is set in its dialog:
STATIK-8 B-83
The axle load groups are positioned as follows:
d d
centrical over supports plus at an distances between supports:

arbitrary distance d before and 'axle load every...' in dialog
after support
Vertical loads - Layout in transverse direction

At first the number of lanes and their width is evaluated, based on the specified width of the
carriageway and the prescriptions in the codes.
. The road traffic generator may only be used for girder bridges with constant width and ec
centricity of the carriageway (see above).
The positioning of the loads in transverse direction accounts for the maximum vertical load
(VL) with the maximum corresponding torsional moments (T) as well as for maximum tor
sional moments with corresponding vertical loads which leads to 4 different positionings.
The following example with a width of carriageway of 7.0 m illustrates this for distributed
loads:
position 1: qk1
max VL, Tmax qk2 qkr
position 2:
max VL, Tmin qk1
qkr qk2
position 3: qk1
max T, Vlcorresp.
position 4: qk1
min T, VLcorresp.
Actions
If the SIA code is selected the loadings containing the vertical loads are assigned to the pre
defined action 'Load model 1' .
For Eurocode compatible codes the distributed loads and the axle loads are assigned to the
different actions 'Load model 1 q (UDL)' and 'Load model 1 Q (TS)' since their ψ‐factors
differ.
Horizontal loads
There are starting braking and centrifugal forces, the latter not yet implemented.
The lower part of the generator dialog concerns horizontal loads. The different parts can be
generated by request.
An eccentricity ez of the carriageway re

lated to the structure line leads to sec
tion force moments due to horizontal
loads
B-84 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
The horizontal loads are assigned to the action 'Horizontal loads'.

The braking forces are introduced as follows:
S The distributed loads act uniformly on the whole length of the bridge alternatively in
both directions.
S The axle load groups are introduced alternatively over each support and with both
signs.
The portion of the braking forces in the transverse direction can optionally be considered.
Generator for Non-Motorized Traffic

It generates vertical loads (load model 1 SIA 261, Eurocode) and optionally horizontal loads
in the direction of the carriageway axis. The necessary parameters are specified in the fol
lowing dialog:
The load generator only works on structure

lines. In this field the name(s) of the structure
line(s) on which the traffic acts must be entered
(',' separated). If more than one name is given,
the structure lines must form a chain.
The Generator supports an optional second

footpath with loads independent of footpath 1
Horizontal loads are only generated if this field

is switched on
b
z
ey
A
ez
y
cross section with its A = footpath axis

input axes Structure line
b = width of footpath
ey = eccentricity of footpath axis in y‐direction (for vertical loads)
ez = eccentricity of footpath in z‐direction (forhorizontal loads)
Vertical loads
The vertical loads qk are multiplied by the width of the footpath and introduced as eccentri
cal line loads in spans unfavourably positioned. Sections between two supports or columns
(members connected with structure line) are considered as fields. Whether a structure line
point acts or can act as a field limit is set in its dialog.
Horizontal loads
The horizontal loads qhk act in the footpath axis along the whole bridge alternatively in
both directions.
STATIK-8 B-85
Load model 2 / maintenance vehicle

The load model 2 accounts for the local effects of a maintenance vehicle (Qk = 10 kN). It
should not be decisive for the section forces in the longitudinal direction and is therefore
not considered by the load generator.
Generator for General Moving Loads

This generator allows the generation of loadings, consisting of a definable load group, at
arbitrary positions along a given track. Since the load group positions are mutually exclu
sive, the generated loadings are marked for exclusive superposition (see chap. B 10.2.1).
The track may consist of several independent parts (e.g. the two rails of a crane runway).
After creating a new loading generator of the type general moving loads the buttons used
for configuring the load generator are displayed in the tabsheet 'Loads'.
The load elements entered with these buttons define the moving load group. It may
consist of an arbitrary combination of load elements and can be set up anywhere on the
track (see figure below).
track
load group
. All elements of a load group (handle point inclusive) must lie anywhere on a track on which
a load positioning polyline will be placed.
This will introduce the handle point that is permanently connected to the load group. If the
load group is set up at a certain location by a position point (point of the positioning poly
gon, see below), the handle point of the load group comes to rest on the position point. A
load group can only have one handle point.
load group
handle point
generated posi
tions of the load
group
positioning
points
B-86 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
Button for creating a positioning polyline, whose points define positioning points for the
load group (see figure above).
The positioning polygon has the following dialog:
aus
off
ein
on
For automatic filling of polyline segments with

evenly distributed position points
The track is the row of members and/or struc

ture line segments along which the load group
moves, i.e. on which the positioning points lie.
It is implicitly defined by the points of the po
sitioning polyline. If an unique definition is not
possible in this way, a subsystem can be
used instead.
Note: for an implicitly found track, a corre
sponding subsystem is automaticaly created.
[Create] opens the polygon tool for drawing the positioning polyline. More than one posi
tioning polyline may be defined, each with its own track (see example below).
The points of the positioning polyline are positioning points for the load group, i.e. each po
sitioning point corresponds to a position of the load group, whereby in each case the
handle point of the load group comes to lie on the positioning point. The positioning points
too have a properties dialog:
The loads of the group are multiplied by the factor

set in this point (esp. useful for combination points,
see example below)
No loading will be generated for inactive positioning

points. However, such points may be useful for a
unique definition of the track.
If this field is checked no loading is generated for

the positioning point. The created load group at this
combination point will, however, be added to the
position it is combined with.
The fields of the dialog are normally set as shown above. The following example of a crane
runway shows how they can be used for special cases:
The effects of the three positions A, B, C of the crane load of the entire structure should be
analyzed.
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.6
0.2
C
The crane beam without crab has a self-weight of 80 kN. The crab weight together with the
maximum payload amounts to 400 kN.
STATIK-8 B-87
positioning polyline 2
(positioning points 4,5,6) 6
4 5
3
A
1 2 positioning polyline 1
(positioning points 1,2,3)
load group with

handle point
The load group consists of two concentrated loads of 0.5 kN each (total load = 1 kN).
Two positioning polylines are introduced, the first one with the numbers 1, 2, 3 and the se
cond one with the numbers 4, 5, 6. The points (1, 4) correspond to the crane load position
A, (2, 5) to position B and (3, 6) to position C. The points 1, 2 should be in the same place.
Since two polygon points in the same location are not allowed, they are input with a small
distance in between, which should not have a significant influence on the results.
The fact that the positions 1, 4 (analog 2, 5 and 3, 6) belong to the same loading is taken ac
count of with the setting
for positioning point 4. The correct load values are achieved by setting the respective load
factors in the positioning points.
Positionspunkt 4
Positionspunkt 1
The factors are found as follows:

for crane beam: 80*0.5 = 40
for crab: 0.8 * 400 = 320 in point 4
0.2 * 400 = 80 in point 1
Generator for Unfavourable Pattern

Loads that may act in any combination are easily treated by the generator for unfavoura
ble pattern. A loading for additive superposition is automatically generated out of each
load element (often a line load on a span of a continuous beam) defined in the generator
loading.
In order for the superposition to take place additively, the control panel
in the properties dialog for loads must be switched off (default).
If you want an exclusive superposition for special cases, you can switch on the control panel.
Example: Continuous beam with 3 spans
in generator loading de
fined load elements (3)
the 3 generated loa

dings
Load groups
If the loadings to be generated should contain more than one load element, these load
elements can be combined to load groups. In the options tabsheet of the load element dia
logs there is a field 'Group ID for load generator'. If several load elements have the same
name in this field, they are treated as a load group and will always act together:
B-88 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
Loading Combinations from Limit State Specification

Results for loadings from nonlinear analyses and calculations according to 2nd order the
ory may not be superimposed. Limit state specifications in STATIK generally lead to super
position of results and are therefore not directly usable if nonlinear results are involved.
One can only consider fixed loading combinations and use limit state specifications that
just compare the results of these loading combinations.
With the generator type 'Loading combinations from limit state specifications' STATIK of
fers the possibility to work with the usual limit state specifications also in cases where non
linear results are involved. The generator creates all possible loading combinations result
ing from a limit state specification. After pressing [OK] in the loading dialog, the following
dialog is shown:
Limit state specification for which the

loading combinations are to be gene
rated
Sometimes it is not easy to estimate the
number of combinations that would be
generated by a limit state specification.
Some tousands or even ten tousands
are easily possible. For efficiency rea
sons one should limit the number of
generated combinations. If it is to big,
the limit state spec should be simpli
fied.
The name of the generated limit state
specification with the nonlinearly calcu
lated combinations
It is normally not sufficient to simply generate the loading combinations. The necessary
special calculations for these loading combinations and the corresponding limit state spec
ification must also be specified, which invokes a lot of work in the case of many combina
tions.
STATIK-8 B-89
Nonlinear calculations
If 'Nonlinear Analysis' is marked in the lower part of the dialog shown above and a name for
the limit state specification is given the program executes the following steps when the
loads are checked:
S For each one of the generated loading combinations a special calculation of the type
'Nonlinear analysis' is created:
S A limit state specification with the given name is generated that looks as follows:
just one active action with

faktor 1.0
The action specification for the uniquely active action 'nonlinear' looks as follows:
This is a valid limit state specification since no superpositions (just comparisons) are in
volved.
Calculations according to 2nd order theory

If one needs the generated loading combinations for analyses according to 2nd order the
ory, the corresponding special calculations are not created automatically, since the neces
sary imperfections (initial deformations), which are very important for such calculations,
cannot be generated automatically.
B-90 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
B 10.2.5 Type Influence Lines
Basics
With STATIK influence lines for displacement and reaction quantities can be calculated in
the nodes as well as for member section forces.
Influence lines are determined by Land's method. For each influence quantity at a particular
position (e.g. moment My at a certain position on the member) a load case has to be de
fined.
The calculated displacements of an influence line loading have to be interpreted according
to the type of moving load (e.g. force in the global Z direction, moment in the local Y direc
tion, etc.). The type of moving load is not chosen before the results are output. Thus with
an influence line load case different influence lines can be output.
Influence line examples for section force My over the second support:
influende quatity = moment y

influende point
influence line for a moving force Fz:
influence line for a moving moment My:
Input
This load element button is the only one for influence line loadings. It shows the following
dialog for introducing the influence quantity:
After specifying the influence quantity select [Create], to input a point for the position (on
a node or member, respectively).
. In the case of influence lines for reaction components the corresponding displacement
component has to be fixed. Vice versa, in the case of influence lines for displacement com
ponents they may not be fixed.
. If one wants to get an influence line for a displacement component anywhere on a member,
a node has to be introduced there. This doesn't have to be a support point and otherwise
does not need any special properties.
STATIK-8 B-91
B 10.2.6 Type Mass Allocation
General
For a 'Natural vibrations' analysis (program option dynamics) a mass distribution or a mass
combination is needed (see Ch. B 10.2.7).
Mass distributions are very similar to loadings and are therefore treated in the 'Loads' tab
sheet.
Loadings as mass distributions

Loadings can be used as mass distributions if they contain only negative vertical forces and
have the setting in their loading attributes dialog. The forces
are converted to masses by division of their values by the acceleration due to gravity de
fined in the menu „Settings” > „Tolerances/Further settings”. No rotational components
are considered for the loads generated by the load element 'dead load' (see Self masses be
low).
Input
Similar to loadings there are self masses, line masses and point masses.
Self masses
The values for the self masses result from the definition of the member cross sections. Self
masses consist of the following components:
S Translational line masses along the member axes [t/m].
S Rotational masses along the member axes for all three directions [m2t/m] (see below
under line masses).
The corresponding dialog allows the following settings:
The self masses can be generated for all

members or for the members of a subsys
tem
to suppress the rotational components
Line masses
. For point and line mass on multiple members it is the same as for point and line loads (siehe
Seite B-75).
B-92 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
Line masses include as a standard part the mass/unit length [t/m]. If desired, rotational
parts can be specified. With a rotational mass (mass moment of inertia) the moment of in
ertia of a member with respect to an angular rotation about the corresponding axis is taken
into account.
Input of rotational masses and the axes

about which they act
See line loads
. The rotational masses about the local axes y, z are normally of less importance. For torsional
vibrations, however, the torsional masses about the member axis x are essential.
Point masses
Point masses may have translational and rotational components.
Point masses can be introduced in nodes

or on members
Eccentric connections are supported only

for nodal masses. The eccentricities are
defined in the nodal coordinate system
Rotational masses in nodes are defined in

the nodal axes and rotational masses on
members in member axes.
B 10.2.7 Type Mass Combination

A mass combination combines several mass distributions and/or loadings marked with
'gravity loads only'. It is defined like a loading combination (see chap. B 10.2.3) and can be
used for dynamic analyses instead of a single mass distribution.
This possibility is used by the building module of CEDRUS when creating a STATIK model
for earthquake analyses. The masses are generated for each story and then combined to the
total mass used for the vibration analysis.
STATIK-8 B-93
B 10.3 Representation, Legend
To the right on the tabsheet /Loads/ there are several buttons for the graphical and tabular
representation of the loads for documentation and checking purposes.
Automatic adaption of the scale factor for the graphical representation of the loads.
Shows a dialog for individual settings for the representation of the loads. The same dialog
is also available by the menu 'Display > Loads...' and described on page B-15.
Displays a tabular documentation of the active loading. If you need this for all or a series of
loadings it is more efficient to do it in the loading list dialog.
Buttons for either checking the active or all loadings. It is not necessary to do this manually
since the program does it automatically before the calculation of results. A manual check,
however, is recommended for surface loads.
Resets a loading to unchecked. Such a reset is necessary (and done automatically by the
program) after changes that influence a loading. It should never be necessary to use this
button.
These buttons are active for surface loadings in the checked state. They are used to view the
generated member and nodal loads and the generated masses.
B 10.4 Import of Loadings
This button is used for the import of loading data from external text files (LIN format). For
details contact Cubus AG.
B 10.5 Actions
Basics
Actions are only used for limit state specifications (see page B-72).
An action of a certain category exists in a calculation as soon as this category has been assi
gned to a loading:
Available action category
for structure type building:
The available action categories depend on the selected structural type and code (see menu
„Settings“ > „General...”). The list can be extended by user-defined categories (see actions
dialog below).
B-94 STATIK-8
B 10 Loads
Actions Dialog
This button on the very left in the tabsheet /Loads/ opens the actions dialog. It contains all
the action categories used so far in the calculation as well as possible user-defined cate
gories.
predefined stan
dard categories
userdefined
category
Each action category has a type-dependent set of load and possible combination factors
needed for setting up design situations, i.e. limit state specifications.
The column 'Name' contains the names of the action categories, followed by the names of
possible subcategories. For user-defined categories, which differ only in their sub-category
names, only the names of the subcategories are displayed.
Button used to create a new user-defined action category.
Button for deleting user-defined action categories that are not used anymore. Standard ca
tegories disappear automatically from the list if they are no longer referenced.
Changed factors of standard categories can be reset to their initial values by this button.
Shows a printable list of the actions dialog.
The column 'Set' supports the concept of action groups (see chap. B 11.3.4).
STATIK-8 B-95
B 11 Analysis
No input is needed in this tabsheet for standard calculations according to 1st order theory
and results for the defined loadings.
For more special purposes the following specifications are possible here:
Special analyses see B 11.1 page B-96
Result combinations see B 11.2 page B-103
Limit state specifications see B 11.3 page B-104
Response spectra definition see C 2.1 page C-8
Accelerogram see C 5 page C-36
B 11.1 Special Analyses

All kinds of analyses except 1st order theory calculations without imperfections are called
special analyses and must be specified here.
seeB 11.1.1 pageB-97


B 11.1.10 SeiteB-102

Opens the dialog containing the input special analyses specifications:
B-96 STATIK-8
B 11 Analysis
If offers the following buttons:

S Definition of a new special analysis. It opens the dialog shown above with all possible
special analyses.
S For modifying or viewing the marked special analysis specification (double click on the
line has the same effect)
S Duplicates the marked special analysis specification (not possible for all types of
analysis)
S Deletes the marked analyses line(s)
S Checks all active analysis specifications
Analysis specifications may be deactivated in the column 'Active'. This is useful if you don't
want to lose a specification that causes problems upon checking which is done automati
cally on entering the Results tabsheet. Special analyses are sometimes also deactivated by
the program. This may occur after critical modifications of the structure or of loadings invol
ved in the analyses.
B 11.1.1 1st Order Analyses with Initial Deformations

This analysis type is not very useful normally. It is offered mainly to determine the pure 2nd
order effect of a 2nd order calculation with an initial deformation.
Selection of the loading

Automatically generated analysis
name under which the results will be
available
The analysis name is made up of

the loading name + '_I_' + identifier
given here
Leads to the dialog for the definition

of the initial deformation
B 11.1.2 Dialog for the Specification of Initial Deformations

The codes prescribe system imperfections to be taken into account for 2nd order calcu
lations. These imperfections are called initial deformations in STATIK. Such initial deforma
tions can be defined not only for 2nd order calculations but also for the 1st order calcu
lations described here.
Initial deformations are coordinate differences added to the nodes of a structure. They
can be derived from the displacements due to a loading or a stability mode shape or they
can result from a skew arrangement of the structure.
. Initial deformations have an effect on the nodal coordinates only. Members between nodes
remain straight.
STATIK-8 B-97
Input
Loading (or mode shape) whose scaled nodal dis

placements are to be used as initial deformations
Scaling:
The displacements of the chosen loading are
multiplied by a factor, so that the displacement
component in the given Direction in the node, spe
cified by its Node ID, assumes a prescribed Value
Skew arrangement: dx
Z
Zfix
X
tanZX = dx/h
Example for a correct scaling for a 'proportional deformation'

If pre-deformations are derived from displacements of a load case or a buckling shape
(setting 'proportional ...'), scaling is required, because the displacements will hardly have
the desired size. For this purpose, the desired value for a displacement component is speci
fied at a certain point. The displacements are then multiplied by a factor so that they have
the required value at the designated location.
? 2.5cm
Kref node ID
input in dialog:
displacement desired initial

due to loading deformation
'Wind'
B 11.1.3 Analyses according 2nd Order Theory
Basics
The influence of deviation forces due to normal forces in the structure are considered in
analyses according to 2nd order theory. Beforehand, of course, the normal forces (called in
itial normal forces) have to be known.
. Compression forces reduce the stiffness of members (and may lead to instability) and
tension forces have a stiffening effect.
Each loading or loading combination can be analyzed according to 2nd order theory. Since
a superposition of 2nd order results is not permissible, one often makes such an analysis for
a loading combination with the correctly set load factors.
B-98 STATIK-8
B 11 Analysis
In standard cases the required normal forces are taken automatically from the 1st order
results of the respective loading (combination). This proceeding is not possible for struc
tures that are not stable according to 1st order theory. They may be stable according to 2nd
order theory thanks to the stiffening effect of initial tension forces. For such cases there are
other methods for the input of the initial normal forces (see below).
The solution is based on the equation:
Q = -( K + KG (N) ) A
Q : vector of the structure's nodal forces
K : linear-elastic stiffness matrix of the structure
KG (N) : geometrical stiffness matrix of the structure
A : sought nodal displacements of the structure
i.e. the stiffness matrix for 1st order theory is extended by the ”geometrical stiffness ma
trix”, which depends on the normal forces and the geometry.
Like the 1st order theory, the 2nd order theory is valid for small displacements only.
Furthermore, it can only be applied if the actual normal forces in the structure do not differ
considerably from those obtained from 1st order analysis.
Suitable for 2nd order theory: Unsuitable for 2nd order theory:
Carries mainly due to normal

forces induced by deformations
(normal forces of 1st order=0)
Fig. B−5 Suitable and unsuitable structures for analyses according to 2nd order theory
. The standard limit state calculation procedure uses superposition of results, which is not
permissible for 2nd order results. This should be considered when using limit state specifi
cations. They should only compare results, i.e. find extremal values for a series of 2nd order
results, and not use any superposition.
Whereas for analyses according to 1st order theory exact formulas can be used, the deter
mination of the geometrical stiffness matrix is based on discretised assumptions regarding
member deformation (cubic parabolas). The accuracy of a 2nd order analysis depends on
how well the deflected shape can be approximated by such parabolas. This is improved if
the members are subdivided by intermediate nodes.
As a basis for a subdivision that gives sufficient accuracy in practical cases, the following
suggestion may be adopted:
Prismatic members should be subdivided such that there are about three members
between two points of inflection of the expected additional deformation due to ef
fects of 2nd order theory .
Examples:
subdivision
not necessary
subdivision necessary!
STATIK-8 B-99
Input
List box to select loading

Automatically generated analysis name under which
the results will be available
By default, the required initial normal forces are taken

from the 1st order results of the analyzed loading. For
special cases there are other methods for setting up
these normal forces (see below)
With or without initial deformation
the analysis name is made up of the loading name +

'_I_' + identifier given here
leads to the dialog for the definition of the initial de

formation (see chap. B 11.1.2)
Methods to determine the initial normal forces
1) From 1st order results of the analyzed loading: This is the default method. The nor
mal forces are taken from the automatically calculated 1st order results of the analyzed
loading.
If the structure is not stable for a 1st order analysis other methods are needed.
2) From 1st order results of another loading: The normal forces still come from 1st order
results but from another loading. Of course this loading should be assigned to a special
construction stage that is stable in a 1st order analysis.
3) From 2nd order results with N=...: A 2nd order calculation of the analyzed loading is
carried out to get the initial normal forces. For this calculation small initial tension forces
are used to stabilize the structure. For this purpose the user specifies a tension force that
is applied for all members. It should be just big enough to stabilize the structure without
distorting the static system significantly.
If a structure is stable according to 2nd order theory only the loadings defined for this struc
ture or construction stage cannot be solved according to 1st order theory. Since by default
all loadings are always solved for 1st order, this would lead to error messages. To prevent
this a loading can be given the property 'Do not solve for 1st order' in the loading property
dialog:
B 11.1.4 Nonlinear Analyses
. Requires the program option 'N'

Possible nonlinearities are support components, which can only resist positive or negative
reactions and truss members, which can only resist compression or tension (struts and ties).
These properties are specified in the Attributes dialogs of the nodes and members.
Even if nonlinear nodes and members are defined, all loadings are also automatically
solved linearly. For those that also have to be solved nonlinearly, a special analysis has to
be defined here.
B-100 STATIK-8
B 11 Analysis
option field for analysis according to

2nd order theory
for selection of loading
ID for result output
The loadings defined here for a nonlinear analysis are offered in the Results tabsheet analo
gous to normal load cases for results output, but under the branch 'Nonlinear Results'.
For a detailed description see Vol. G.
B 11.1.5 Eigenvalue Analysis for Stability
. Requires the program option 'S'

The result of a stability analysis is a factor λ, by which a given (variable) loading may be in
creased, until the structure becomes unstable as well as the corresponding buckling mode
shape. An optional fixed loading can be applied before the variable loading starts to act and
is increased. The factor λ again refers to the variable loading.
. may be smaller than 1.0 or negative.

A stability analysis is specified by the following dialog:
The results in the Results tabsheet

can be called under this ID
(buckling mode shape with corre
sponding λ factor)
Convergence tolerance; normally
the preset value is O.K.
For a detailed description see chap. E 4.
B 11.1.6 Long-term Analyses
. Requires the program option 'L'

This module is capable of modelling the effects of creep and shrinkage of concrete mem
bers and the relaxation of prestressing tendons. Typical applications of this module are the
determination and control of vertical exaggeration in balanced cantilever bridges or the
simulation of stress redistribution due to a staged construction process.
All calculations are executed on the system level, i.e. the long‐term characteristic is speci
fied for whole members. Therefore differentiating behaviour of cross-section elements (e.g.
in composite structures) cannot be directly modeled except by introducing multiple ec
centrically connected members.
For a detailed description see Vol. I.
STATIK-8 B-101
B 11.1.7 Eigenvalue Analyses for Dynamics

. Requires the program option 'D'
For a particular mass distribution the first n eigenfrequencies of the structure can be deter
mined together with their mode shapes.
The specification of mass distributions corresponds largely to that of loadings and is there
fore carried out in the Loads tabsheet (see chap. B 10.2.6).
For a detailed description see chap. C 1.
B 11.1.8 Response Spectrum Analyses for Earthquakes

Response spectrum analyses are used to verify the seismic safety. The resulting section
forces can be used in the module 'Reinforced Concrete Analysis' for the design of the rein
forcement.
For a detailed description see chap. C 3.
B 11.1.9 Lateral Force Method for Earthquake Analyses

These simplified response spectrum analyses are used to verify the seismic safety. The
resulting section forces can be used in the module 'Reinforced Concrete Analysis' for the
design of the reinforcement.
For a detailed description see Ch. C 4.
B 11.1.10 Time History

A time course simulation is used in structural dynamics to determine the deformations and
stresses over time. These calculations serve to demonstrate earthquake safety. The results
can be used in the 'Reinforced concrete analysis' module for reinforcement design.
For a detailed description see chap.C 5.
B 11.1.11 Reinforced Concrete Analyses with FAGUS

. Requires the program FAGUS with the option 'A'
The reinforced concrete analysis module in STATIK permits automatic design and analysis
tasks for RC sections for limit state section forces calculated in STATIK.
For a detailed description see Vol. D and the FAGUS manual.
B 11.1.12 Externally bonded Reinforcement Analyses with FAGUS

. Requires the program option 'S' and the program FAGUS with the option 'A'
For a detailed description see chap. E 5.
B 11.1.13 Timber Analyses with FAGUS

For a detailed description see the FAGUS manual.
B-102 STATIK-8
B 11 Analysis
B 11.1.14 Wall pillar

For a detailed description see the FAGUS manual.
B 11.1.15 Steel Member Analyses with AVENA
. Requires the program AVENA

The steel member analysis module of STATIK allows automatic execution of dimensioning
and analysis tasks to steel members a STATIK-structure with this specified loads.
STATIK prepares the necessary data and transfers it to the independent steel member anal
ysis program AVENA. This program performs the required calculations and passes the re
sults back to STATIK, where this can be output numerically and graphically. This corre
sponds to the range of possible analysis that of AVENA.
STATIK allows postprocessing of results with the steel member analysis program AVENA.
For a detailed description see AVENA vol. H.
B 11.1.16 MURUS-Pushover
. Requires the CEDRUS program with the 'Building' and 'Horizontal loads' options, and in
STATIK the '3D' and 'Dynamics' options as well as MURUS-P.
With MURUS Pushover, space frame models generated from CEDRUS can be checked and
verified for the effects of earthquakes. Only the SIA is supported.
For a detailed description, see chap. B in the MURUS manual.
B 11.2 Results Combinations
Results combinations are specified for the superposition of results from different loadings.
They are stored under a given name and are available in the Results tabsheet to be used like
individual loadings.
. In cases where a superposition of results is not permitted (nonlinear or 2nd order calcu
lations) loading combinations should be used. They are defined in a similar way in the
Loads tabsheet (see Kap. B 10.2.3).
STATIK-8 B-103
The following dialog is used for the input and administration of results combination specifi
cations:
List with all defined Define new result combi
result combinations nation (see below)
Actual result Only active result combinations are

combination visible in the Results tabsheetl
Transfer marked loading

to combination
Factor
Transfer factor
Change factor of marked

row
Text view for easier handling of

selected combinations of many loadings Shows printable version
loading
Definition of a new results combination

The common new-button shows the following dialog. It is used to specify the name of a
combination and it is possible to initiate the new combination with the settings of an exis
ting one:
The name to be entered must be

a valid Windows file name
Starting with the settings of an

existing combination may save
input effort
With [OK] one comes again to the dialog “Results Combinations“.
B 11.3 Limit State Specifications
B 11.3.1 Basic Considerations

The following considerations use the terminology of the code SIA 260, which is largely simi
lar to that of the Eurocodes.
The aim of all structural analysis is the dimensioning or verification of a structure. These
tasks are based on limit states which require the specification of design situations with
the associated load cases.
Each load case is characterized by a leading action and possibly, by simultaneously acting
accompanying actions and thus consists of a combination of actions with the load- and
combination factors according to the selected code.
B-104 STATIK-8
B 11 Analysis
An experienced engineer can - at least for preliminary dimensioning - often limit the con
sideration to a few points and also without much effort can recognize the critical load cases
for the investigated design situations.
The strength of a program however lies in the systematic treatment of numerous sections
or points. For many dimensioning tasks it is best to work with limit values of section forces,
reactions or displacements. These are determined by the Cubus programs on the basis of
limit state specifications, which uniquely describe the combination rules for the individual
loading. How these limit state specifications are made up is described below.
B 11.3.2 Overview on the Limit State Specifications (LSS)

The adjacent button calls the following dialog which gives an overview on simple LSS:
Administration of the LSS's Overall factors for each action in to be applied in addition
with the buttons [new], to the combination factors to the right (e.g. for dynamic
[properties] and [delete] coefficients).
Printable tabular do

cumentation of LSS
Add new combi

nation (column)
Automatic gene
ration of the
combinations
Delete selected
Actions marked 'in Use the automatically of all columns
active' are not used generated action specifi
in the LSS cation (otherwise de
fined by usert)
View/modify the selecten specifica

tion of the selected action
The considered actions are listed on the left side of the dialog, while on the right are the in
vestigated combinations of these actions with the corresponding combination factors.
How these combinations came about is clearly seen here: the permanent actions 'Dead
Load' and 'Superimposed Load' are investigated with the factors γsup (here 1.35) and γinf
(0.8). In addition, we have the variable actions, of which once the leading action (γQ = 1.5)
and the wind loads as accompanying action (ψ0 = 0.6) and once the wind action as leading
action (γQ = 1.5) and the live loads as accompanying action (ψ0 = 0.7) are considered in turn.
The load and accompanying factors that are used depend on
S the code
S the type of action (permanent, variable, accidental...)
S the design situation (persistent, transient, accidental)
S the considered limit state (ultimate load, serviceability)
Design situation and limit state are set by the user when creating a new limit value specifica
tion.
The list of actions on the left side of the dialog is created automatically on the basis of the
input loadings, each of which is assigned to an action. The right side with the action combi
nations can be automatically generated, but can also be arbitrarily defined by adding, dele
ting or modifying columns. On this automatic generation see page B-109.
STATIK-8 B-105
STATIK automatically creates the LSS named !ULS for the ultimate limit state (Type 2) for the
standard design situation, if there are no prestressing actions and no action sets (see
below).
Besides, the user can define his own limit state specifications. The button shown opens the
following dialog, in which the design situation and the limit state are specified:
These two limit

states do not occur
in CEDRUS
In the next chapter we will cover in detail the actions not yet dealt with.
B 11.3.3 Actions
Definition of the term 'Action'

The very general term action is given a more restricted meaning in the Cubus programs
and is defined as follows (see also chap. B 10.1 and B 10.5): an action is a combination of loa
dings of a certain category like permanent loads, traffic loads, wind loads, snow loads etc.
according to a specified superposition rule. The superposition rule is called action specifi
cation. It defines, in which combinations the loadings of an action can act with the aim to
find the unfavorable combinations for each result component in all result points.
The limit state specification (LSS) defines how these actions are to be combined (action
combinations) as leading and accompanying actions in different variations to finally get the
limit values, which are needed for dimensioning and verification purposes.
How Actions arises

A property of each loading is the action category it is assigned to. The standard action cate
gories treated in the codes for the selected structure type (like building) are offered for
selection besides user definable action categories. Actions of standard categories exist in
a calculation as soon and as long as they are referred to by a loading. An action of a user de
fined category exists until the category is deleted, which is possible only if it is not used by
a loading.
If more than one loading is assigned to an action category a rule is needed to define how
these loadings may be combined. This rule is called action specification and described
below.
B-106 STATIK-8
B 11 Analysis
Actions List Dialog

The adjacent button to be found to the very left in the Loads tabsheet calls the actions list
dialog. All used standard actions as well as possible user defined actions are listed. New ac
tions can be defined by the user and existing ones deleted (for details see chap. B 10.5):
predefined stan
dard categories
userdefined
category
Action Specification
Part of the comprehensive definition of an action is the combination rule for the participa
ting loadings denoted by Action Specification. Whereas permanent actions often consist
of just one loading, for variable actions a complicated superposition is necessary. Consider,
for example, the live load action on a continuous beam with several spans, where the loads
are placed on the spans in unfavourable positions and where in addition a vehicle load has
to be considered in various positions.
Simple combination scheme E1

One can imagine as a simple combination scheme - here denoted by E1 - the comparison
of all possible loading combinations. This may be represented as follows in a flow chart:
Action = Loading combination
( E1 )
or
whereby: Loading combination = Loading ( * Factor )
Example: Spanwise unfavourably applied load on a three span beam

A B C
The three loadings A, B and C are introduced on the three spans.

The specification of the action 'live load' according to the flow chart E1is :
A or B or C or AB or AC or BC or ABC
In the case of a five span beam one would have as many as 31 loading combinations to com
pare with one another. If, in addition, we had two more fields and let's say a vehicle load in
n possible places, then the user would be quite challenged in his combinatorics skills and
an unmanagable number of loading combinations would result.
STATIK-8 B-107
Extended Combination Scheme E2

However, with the extended superposition scheme - here denoted by E2 - a compact and
managable treatment of all involved loadings is possible. The flow chart looks as follows:
Action = perm. Loading step ( E2 )
optional
plus
where: Loading step = Loading combination

or
Loading combination = Loading ( * Factor )
The scheme is based on an unconditional (permanent) or optional superposition of loading

steps. In contrast to scheme E1 not all possible loading combinations need to be defined
explicitly. It rather defines which loadings can act at the same time and which ones can not.
A loading step either consists of one loading with an optional factor or of several loadings,
separated by 'or', that exclude each other.
Several loading steps may be superimposed (separated by 'plus'). They may act
permanently or optionally.
According to scheme E2 the specification for the above example reads:
A plus B plus C
In the case of a five-span beam with loadings in each span A, B, C, D, E and with an additional
vehicle in 9 positions (a, b, c,. …, i) the specification is:
A plus B plus C plus D plus E
plus a or b or c or d or e or f or g or h or i
According to scheme E1 there would result 319 loading combination, a number that could
not be handled by hand.
. The scheme E1 is contained as a special case in E2 (without 'PERM.' and 'PLUS').
Input of Action Specifications

The input is given in the following dialog (self explanatory):
Übertragungsschaltflächen
für
ST permanent
PL plus
PlSt plus permanent
+ combination
OD or
Alt alternative
Transfer factor
With 'Alternative' a new specification starts, which is evaluated as an alternative to the pre
vious specification. Instead of this possibility, which leads to long and confusing specifica
tions, there is the new concept of Action Sets, which are discussed below.
B-108 STATIK-8
B 11 Analysis
Automatically generated Action Specifications
The program automatically creates for each action an action specification according to the
following simple rules:
Permanent actions: all loadings belonging together are summed up. Thus, such an action
consists of a fixed loading combination.
Variable actions: Each loading, which is assigned to a variable action, is also given at input
the superposition attribute,
Additive loadings (a1,a2,...) can act simultaneously, exclusive loadings (e1,e2,...) exclude
one other (e.g. vehicle in different positions). These actions are constructed according to
the superposition scheme E2 described above as follows:
a1 plus a2 plus a3 plus . . . plus e1 or e2 or e3 or ...
In cases not covered by this simple rule, the specification must be carried out manually with
the help of the dialog shown above. For this purpose the check box in the column 'auto' of
the LSS must be switched off:
B 11.3.4 Limit State Specifications with Action Sets
What is understood by the term 'action group' in the actual Eurocodes is supported in STA
TIK by means of action sets. Here two examples of an action groups:
We consider the traffic loads of a road bridge. According to the code SIA261 they consist
of the two alternatively acting action groups
- load model 1 including the horizontal loads
- load model 3 without horizontal loads.
In other codes for example the following alternative action groups are to be considered
(VL=vertical loads, HL=horizontal loads, CP=concentrations of people):
- 1.0 * VL
- 0.75 * VL + 1.0 * HL
- 1.0 * CP
These alternatively acting action groups belong to one single action that is altogether
considered as leading or accompanying action in a limit state specification.
All actions that are to be considered in alternative action groups are called a set in STATIK.
A set is defined if several actions have the same name (e.g. Road Traffic) in the column set
of the actions dialog. These actions build a set with that name.
STATIK-8 B-109
The following figure shows the input for the SIA261 example above:
Part of the dialog 'Actions'
The automatically generated ac

tion combinations consider the ac
tion set with the two action groups
(dialog shown below)
Double click on set header

calls the groups definition dia
log
B 11.3.5 Limit Values of nonlinearly determined results
With the use of loading combinations or 'plus' in the action specifications, the results of the
loadings involved are superimposed during the process of building the limit values. This is
also the case for action combinations. Such superpositions, however, are not permitted in
nonlinear analyses.
In order, in such cases, nevertheless to obtain useful limit values, the following points have
to be considered:
S One has to restrict oneself to a single action, so that in the limit state specification no
action combinations are produced.
S In the action specifications one may only use the superposition scheme E1, i.e. only 'B1
OR B2 OR B3 ...' , whereby the Bi may only be individual loadings.
To still be able to work with the input loadings, STATIK provides Loading Combina
tions. Hereby the loadings are combined with the required factors to form a new loa
ding for which the nonlinear calculation has to be carried out (see chap. B 10.2.3).
STATIK provides an automatic procedure for generating everything described above,

starting from a standard limit state specification - see page B-89.
B-110 STATIK-8
B 11 Analysis
B 11.3.6 Automatic Creation of Action Combinations

Depending on the design situation and the limit state, for which a limit state specification
is foreseen, the action combinations can be automatically created.
They are constructed according to the following scheme (code-dependent), whereby it is
assumed that an action specification is identical, whether it is used as a leading or as an ac
companying action. The correctness of the created action combinations must always be
checked by the user and, if necessary, adapted to the specific requirements.
SIA 260:
Standard Design Situation, Ultimate Limit State
E d + E(gGG k, gPP k , g Q1 Q kl , y0i Qki) (4.4.3.4)
g G : load factor for permanent actions

Gk : char. value of the permanent action
g P : load value for prestressing actions
Pk : char. value of prestressing action
g Q : load values for leading variable action
Qk1 : char. value of leading variable action
Qki : char. values of accompanying variable actions
y 0 : reduction coefficient for accompanying variable actions
Remark: Only one accompanying action y 0i Qki is taken into account (the decisive one).
Accidental Design Situation, Ultimate Limit State
E d + E(G k, P k , A d, y2i Q ki) (4.4.3.5)
Ad : design value of the accidental action

y 2i : load factor for the accompanying action i
EC/DIN:
Basic Combination (without accidental actions), Ultimate Limit State:
Sd + ȍg G,j ƪ
@ G k,j ) gQ,1 Q k,1 ) ȍy
iu1
0,i ƫ
@ Qk,i () g p @ Pk)
Accidental Combination:
S d,A + ȍG k,j ) A d ) y1,1 @ Q k,1 ) ȍy 2,i @ Q k,i() g p @ P k)

iu1
Gk : char. value of the permanent actions

Qk,1 ,Qk,i : char. values of the first and other variable actions
Pk : char. value of prestressing action
Ad : design value of the accidental action
g G : partial safety factor for permanent actions (1.35 and 1.0)
g Q : partial safety factor for variable actions
g P : partial safety factor for prestressing actions
y 0, y1, y 2 : combination factors for rare, frequent and quasi-permanent actions
STATIK-8 B-111
B 12 Results
result tree output value type of component section a) b) c)

output definition
a) Do not display inactive members

b) Settings for results output
(see below)
c) Execution command
B 12.1 Results Tree
Before you decide about output quantity, type of output, component, etc., you select an
element in the results tree, e.g. a loading, a limit state specification, a special calculation, etc.
All other input fields in the results tabsheet adapt to this selection.
The first branch of the result tree is called 'Loadings linear, 1st order'. It contains all input and
possibly generated loadings, which are normally all calculated automatically according to
1st order theory and can be selected for output.
If there are limit state specifications a branch called 'Envelope results' is listed in the results
tree. It contains all existing limit state specifications. It nearly always exists since the specifi
cation !ULS is normally generated automatically.
For all other possible branches the user must have input the respective specifications, e.g.
results combinations or special calculations.
minimum result tree maximum no. of branches in the result tree
loading related results

see chap. B 12.4
see chap. B 12.6

see chap. B 12.5
A selected results element in the results tree affects the available output quantities. A
chosen output quantity affects the possible types of output etc. The possible settings in the
Results tabsheet therefore depend on each other from left to right.
The following chapters describe some general considerations and preconditions concer
ning the results output. They are followed by the chapters mentioned in the figure above.
The results for special calculations are treated in the respective chapters.
If the program issues a message that the system is not stable, the results tree displays a new
branch at its lower end called 'InstabilityCheck' . For details see chap. B 12.7.
B-112 STATIK-8
B 12 Results
B 12.2 Result Layers
For each graphical result initiated by the button a new layer is created in the layer group
Results:
Note the following remarks about these result layers:

S The result layers are identified by continuously increasing numbers.
S The latest n layers persist, older ones are deleted. The number n is preset to 6 and can
be modified in the menu „Settings“ > „Tolerances / Further settings…„ > „Further
settings“ in the input field 'Max. No. of result layers'.
S Thus, the latest n result images can be viewed again without recalculation by pressing
the corresponding layer button. When pressing the <shift> key simultaneously, exis
ting visible layers remain visible. This allows a combination of images, e.g. for displaying
several section force components in the same image.
S The general context menu of the layer buttons offers some features that may be useful
also for result layers:
- 'Labels visible': annoying labels can be made invisible.
- 'Exclusively visible': all other layers (e.g. structure layers) are temporarily switched off.
- 'Sublayer visibility ': With special results it can happen that certain information is not
visible in the standard view and can be switched on by switching on the corresponding
sublayers.
S The result layers are deleted when the program is closed.
B 12.3 General aspects concerning member results
B 12.3.1 Section Specification

Member results are calculated and output in sections that may be specified anywhere and
in any number. The graphical output is also based on the section specification (linear
connections between section result points). So give attention to the section specification
for getting smooth result curves.
These three buttons control the section specification. The first two are used to choose one
of the two types of section specification. There is a quick section specification valid for all
members and an individual specification mainly for design purposes called design section
specification. Some types of results require the use of design sections. The third button is
used to edit the settings of the chosen type of specification.
Quick Section Specification

The quick section specification is chosen with the adjacent button. If available it should be
preferred since for section force and cross section results it accounts for the applied loads
and therefore leads to more accurate result curves (e.g. shear force discontinuity due to a
point load). In zones without loads the section forces are linear and no additional sections
are introduced.
The edit dialog for the quick section specification looks as follows:
STATIK-8 B-113
For displacement results the sections are defined as set in the dialog. For section force and
cross section results, however, the criterion for the section definition are the loads applied
to a member in the loadings that contribute to the requested result. In zones with distribu
ted loads, for example, the section density corresponds to the settings in the dialog, whe
reas in zones without loads, no sections need to be introduced for accurate result diagrams.
If result diagrams are not smooth enough a smaller section spacing can be set in the dialog.
If results from different sources (e.g. from loadings and response spectum analyses) are to
be combined, all these results must be calculated in the same sections. A load-dependent
section specification is therefore not feasible. For that purpose there is the design section
specification described next.
Design Section Specification

The design section specification is load-independent. It is part of the member properties
and is fixed for all types of results. Changes in the design sections mean changes of the
member properties, which causes a reset of the calculation including the deletion of all
results.
The edit button shows the section specification tabsheet of the member dialog that is
treated in detail in chap. B 7.2.10:
This type of section specification can be used for all kinds of results. For results used for
postprocessing (like reinforced concrete analyses), for response spectrum analyses and for
prestressing results it is mandatory.
B 12.3.2 Restricting Result Output to selected Memebrs or Nodes

If objects like nodes, members, structure lines or structure line segments are selected the
result output is restricted to these objects.
Otherwise the results are output for all visible objects. Possibilities for reducing the visi
bility are
S Working planes
S Clipping (see chap. B 5.3)
S Subsystems (see chap. B 5.4)
S Name filters (see chap. B 5.5)
B 12.3.3 Reference Systems and Sign Conventions for Member Results
Section Forces
Section forces are normally defined along the member axis in the member's own local
coordinate system (for the definition see chap. B 7.2.2).
In cases where the center of gravity of a cross section does not lie on the member axis (only
possible for cross sections with axis points, see page B-35), the output can optionally be
requested along the center of gravity axis in the directions x', y', z'. For prismatic members
the local directions remain the same (x'=x, y'=y, z'=z). For members with variable cross sec
tions the directions may differ a little. The direction y' may suffer a small correction, lying
in the plane that is defined by the axes x' and y and z' results form x' and y'.
B-114 STATIK-8
B 12 Results
Along with the directions the sign conventions need to be defined. The six section force
components of a space frame member act positively on the section boundary belonging
to the start of the member in the directions shown in the figure below. For plane frame
members the same rules apply for the components N, Vz, My.
z
center of gravity
Mz of the cross sec
tion or axis point
start of
y respectively
member
Vy
N
My T
Vz x
. Note that the local y and z axes can differ from the direction of the principal axes of the cross
section (for unsymmetrical cross sections).
Cross Section Results

As cross section results stresses and strains are available. The cross section is assumed to
lie normal to the member axis. Positive result values signify tension. More about cross sec
tion results is found in chap. B 12.4.4.
Displacements / Deformations
Although joint displacements are available in tabular form for single loadings one is usually
interested in member displacements. Single displacement components can be requested
in local or global directions.
In cases where the center of gravity of a cross section does not lie on the member axis (only
possible for cross sections with axis points, see page B-35), the output can optionally be
requested along the center of gravity axis in the directions x', y', z'.
B 12.3.4 Graphics Results (Diagrams)

Member results are displayed as so called diagrams. For each member a separate diagram
is drawn. It is a polygon with its vertices (= exactly calculated result points) in the specified
member sections.
Diagram with its verti

ces in the result points
Colors, line and filling styles can be configured in the menu 'Display > Colors / Line type...'
separately for screen and printed output.
Diagrams are selectable objects with the following partly shown context menu:
Of interest here is especially the item 'Attributes...', that leads to the menu for individual
labeling (see below).
STATIK-8 B-115
B 12.3.5 Labeling of Result Diagrams

Result diagrams have an automatic labeling that can be modified afterwards.
Automatc labeling
The settings for automatic labeling are made in the dialog 'Settings for output' which has
the following section for the output of single result components , e.g. normal force, etc.
If 'Standard' is selected each member is labeled.

These settings are not available for the output of total displacements, for which only the
maximum values for each component are labeled.
Labeling manually
The item 'Attributes...' in the context menu of a result diagram shows the following dialog
for an individual labeling of diagrams:
Activates the standard labeling mode: if you click on any part of a diagram a label will be
placed on the nearest result point.
Activates the mode for labeling the maxima of a diagram: if you click anywhere on a dia
gram a label will be placed on the nearest maximum point (of the side you clicked on) :
The labeled maximum

depends on where you
click on a diagram:
The other buttons have the following functions:

deletes a label by clicking on it
selects all diagrams
labels all selected diagrams
deletes the labeling of all selected diagrams
B 12.3.6 Scaling of Result Diagrams

All result diagrams need a scaling that is controlled by a scaling factor. For displacement
results the diagrams drawn correspond to the effective displacements multiplied by this
scaling factor. For other quantities it is the factor by which the results are multiplied before
they are drawn in the length unit of the structure.
B-116 STATIK-8
B 12 Results
The settings for scaling are input in the dialog 'Settings for output' in the following section:
With the setting 'Automatic' the program tries to find an appropriate scaling factor for each
result image individually. The diagram shows the latest used factor as a reference value for
a possible needed modification.
Switch 'Automatic' off if you want to specify a specific scaling factor. This may be necessary
if you want to compare e.g. the displacements of different loadings visually. The program
would possibly choose different factors with the setting 'Automatic'.
The settings remain stored, separately for different result quantities and components.
B 12.3.7 Highlighting maximum values

Some result quantities allow an emphasized presentation of values greater than a specified
critical value.:
The settings for an emphasized presentation of critical values are input in the dialog
'Settings for output' in the following section::
B 12.3.8 Restrict tabular result output to individual sections

Output tables may become extremely long and difficult to handle. If individual sections are
defined (see member dialog below) and design section specification is selected, the output
can be restricted to these individual sections.
The setting is again made in the dialog 'Settings for output' , which contains the following
section for tabular output:
STATIK-8 B-117
B 12.4 Results for Loadings

Here the results for loadings according 1st order theory are described. The following bran
ches of the result tree yield the same results, partly with small extensions, and are therefore
included in this chapter:
...
The result quantities described in the following chapters are available.
B 12.4.1 Displacements
The instruments for setting the output type and the components look as follows:
displaced
graphics tabular member axes
see below component- displaced wire-

wise output frame or rendered
Some of the following statements refer to graphics output only, others to both graphics and
tabular output. This should be self-explanatory and is not discussed in detail.
Types of Displacement Output

In most cases one is interested in the displaced state of the structure, a global output type
for which the button [L] for 'local' may not be activated.
The figure below shows the possible types of graphical representation with the correspon
ding button settings:
displaced displaced rendered
member axes wireframe displacements
rendering off rendering on
The output can also be obtained for single displacement components (this is the only way
for response spectrum analyses). Depending on the source of the displacements (loading,
mode shape, response spectrum analysis, ...) there are different types for the output:
Global / Local
The results refer to either the global or, with the button [L] pressed, the local member
coordinate system.
Total / Relative
Normally one is interested in the total displacements referred to the undeformed initial po
sition of the structure. For this type of output the button [R] may not be activated.
B-118 STATIK-8
B 12 Results
If the relative button [R] is activated (only possible in combination with [L]) the displace
ment components refer to a given displaced straight reference axis as shown in the fol
lowing figure:
reference axis A' - B'

(displaced points A,B) output dis
placement preselected member
local z re row A - B defining the
lative reference axis
For this local-relative output the following conditions must be fulfilled:

S Before pressing the execute button a single member or a member row must be selected
and thus defining a straight line with its start and end points A,B (lying on the member
axes).
S The selected members must form a chain and have the same local coordinate direc
tions. The local x-directions must be the same as the direction A-B.
The displaced points A’ and B’ define a reference axis with respect to which the required
displacements are defined in local directions (component-wise). The reference axis can be
considered as the linearly distributed displacement which has to be subtracted from the
standard local displacements to get the desired local-relative results.
Interstory Drift
This type of output is only available for building structures with defined earthquake analy
ses. The relative horizontal displacements from story to story (interstory drift) are output
as they are required for certain verifications of seismic behaviour. The results are limited to
vertical members. For an easier visualizaion straight lines from the bottom of the members
to the displacement values at the top of the members are drawn.
Output variants for cross sections with axis points

If a structure contains members whose cross sections have axis points, the member axis can
differ from the center of gravity axis. In these cases the results are available in both systems,
i.e. in the list of the available quantities there are the two entries 'Displacements AP' for the
output related to the member axis (axis points) and 'Displacements CG' for the center of
gravity related output.
STATIK-8 B-119
Animation
Animated displacement are often easier to understand. An animation cycle can be ac
tivated by the <F5> key. Continuous animations are controlled by the following dialog,
called by the menu „Display“ > „Animation“:
In 2D mode In 3D mode
To store an animation cycle
as a video in AVI-format
Animation speed
Animation of Rotation about

the displace a vertical axis
ments
Settings for Output

This button shows a dialog with additional settings for the chosen result, depending on the
output type.
Graphical output:
for total displacements:
see chap. B 12.3.6
Only for special calculations

with initial deformations
The maximum values for each component are labeled.

For component-wise output:
Global components are normally
output in their respective global
directions. In cases where they
would not be visible there is the
other representation (e.g. dis
placement X for a member in
X-direction)
see chap. B 12.3.7
Numerical Output:
Only for special calculations

with initial deformations
Only active if design section

specification is selected
*)
*) 'Individual sections' means those
sections that were introduced as
single sections in the member
section specification.
B-120 STATIK-8
B 12 Results
B 12.4.2 Reactions
Here the instruments are very limited and there is no dialogue with additional settings for
the output of results:
graphic numeric
graphics output:
only non-zero values are
labeled
The labeled values in the graphics output are related to the nodal coordinate system. In the
tabular output the values related to both the nodal and the global coordinate system are
output.
B 12.4.3 Section Forces

graphic mumeric
for component-
wise graphic
output
By default the section forces are defined in the local member coordinate system (see pages
B-114f).
. For unsymmetrical cross sections the local member axes x,y do not coincide with the princi
pal axes of the cross sections.
If a structure contains members whose cross sections have axis points the member axis can
differ from the center of gravity axis. In these cases the results are available in both systems,
i.e. in the list of the available quantities there are the two entries 'Section forces AP' for the
output related to the local member axis and 'Section forces CG' for the center of gravity re
lated output (for details concerning the center of gravity system see pages B-114f).
Yields the compression line, i.e. the course of the eccentricity of the normal force calculated
as N/My and N/Mz. For this result only graphics output is available.
Settings for Output

output type.
Graphics Output:
see chap. B 12.3.6
see chap. B 12.3.5
see chap. B 12.3.7
STATIK-8 B-121
Numerical Output:
see chap. B 12.3.8
B 12.4.4 Cross Section Results

graphic numeric
result
point
selection of result
point or material
materials
The following stress and strain results, calculated for the homogeneous cross section, can
be obtained:
S Strains and stresses at arbitrary points in the cross section. Besides the automati
cally predefined points shown in the figure below, arbitrary points can be defined in the
cross section. Results in points of the same name have their own column in the tabular
output and can be presented graphically as well. Comparable result points in different
cross sections should therefore have the same names.
!TL !TA !TR
Automatically generated
RP2 result points with their
!AL !A !AR predefined names
(A=Axis, T=Top, B=Bottom,
L=Left, R=Right )
RP1
!BL !BA !BR Individually input result
points
Bounding rectangle Centre of gravity or axis
parallel to cross sec point, respectively, of the
tion input axes cross section
The automatically generated result points are always defined in the standard variant of
a cross section and are therefore independent of the variant.
S Extreme values of strains or stresses in the (not necessarily contiguous) parts of the
cross section with a selected material
Extreme values of stresses or
strains are output for each
concrete part of the section consisting
of a particular material.
All possible polygon corner
points are investigated. The
steel decisive point can change
from section to section and is
not output.
Settings for Output

output type. The dialogs are the same as for section forces (see above).
B-122 STATIK-8
B 12 Results
B 12.4.5 Nodal Displacements

Nodal displacements are available only in numerical form. They are of minor interest since
the member displacements provide more information and can be output graphically.
To find the node ID's shown in the numerical output switch on the layer buttons as shown
on the left.
B 12.5 Influence Lines
Influence lines are displacement results of special influence line loadings (see chap.
B 10.2.5).
The instruments for setting the output type and the type of the moving load look as follows
graphic numeric
text input field for

defining the moving
load
Influence lines are normally requested for a moving vertical force. But they are also available
for other moving loads like forces and moments in any direction and in any combinations.
A eccentrically acting vertical force for example can be specified as a combination of a
global force Z and a local moment X with the value of the eccentricity.
Example 1: Example 2:
track track
‐0.35
moving load: moving load:

Force Global Z ‐1.0 Force Global Z ‐1.0 together with
Moment Local X ‐0.35
The rules for the input of the moving load in the text input field are specified by the fol
lowing flow chart:
K G X factor
Y
M L
Z
K: Force G: global
M: Moment L: local
Example 1: K G Z (standard for vertical force)

Example 2: K G Z 1.0 M L X 0.24
STATIK-8 B-123
Settings for Output
This button shows a dialog with additional settings for the graphics output of influence
lines:
see chap. B 12.3.6
see chap. B 12.3.5
see chap. B 12.3.7
B 12.6 Envelope Results
Envelope results are extremal result values as they are used for design and verification pur
poses. They are available for section force, reaction and displacement components to
gether with the corresponding values of the residual components and for cross section
results (edge stresses).
The superposition rules for the considered loadings is defined by limit state specifications
(see chap. B 11.3.2).
The available output quantities are shown in the following figure:
Displacement envelopes are

only possible for single
components and not for total
displacements. Therefore
rendered representations
are not available either.
The possible settings including the corresponding dialogs 'Settings for Output' are known
from the loading results except the button (see there in chap. B 12.4).
B 12.6.1 Intermediate Results and Values of Residual Components
Often one is interested not only in the extremal values of the requested result component
but also in the corresponding values of the residual components. For checking purposes
the results of the individual actions (combinations of them yield the envelope results) are
of interest as well.
B-124 STATIK-8
B 12 Results
This button opens a dialog with these additional envelope results
Component for which the envelope results are

requested (envelope component)
Corresponding values of the residual

components
Limit values of the envelope component of

the actions contributing to the envelope
results and the corresponding values of the
residual components
You select the desired result and then press the execute button .
B 12.6.2 Decisive Actions and Loadings

Envelope values may be a result of complex combinations of actions and loadings. To trace
back a specific result one needs a list of all decisive action combinations and loadings that
contribute to this result. The decisive action combinations are listed in the standard tabular
output of envelope results and a special table with the decisive loadings can be requested
in the 'Settings for Output' dialog.
One should bear in mind the limit state specification to understand the output:
In the standard tabular output for envelope results there is a column called 'EK' in which the
numbers of the decisive action combinations are output (see above dialog).
In the dialog 'Settings for Output' a detailed table with the decisive loadings can be reques
ted (for tabular output only):
STATIK-8 B-125
With this setting a second table with the corresponding information will be appended to
the table with the envelope results:
. If the action specifications contain loading combinations (either real combinations or loa
dings with a factor<>1.0) the legend of the limit state specification identifies such combi
nations with names like Ci, which are also used in the tabular output of the decisive loading.
So you may need an output of this legend to understand the table with the decisive loa
dings.
B 12.7 Instability Check

For the basics concerning instability see chap. B 2.3.
Reports the program upon solution that the system is unstable, at the bottom of the result
tree will an entry 'instability Check' with one branch per existing construction stage appear.
The instability check is based on the stabilization of the structure using small springs and
the introduction of unit loads for all degrees of freedom. Degrees of freedom with large va
lues are likely to be unstable.
The following figure show a tabular output of an instability check:
the compact view shows only

the suspected nodes
A graphics output with the adjacent button settings shows likely unstable degrees of free
dom:
rotation RX
displacement Dx
layer settings for the
visibility of the nodes
and their ID's
B-126 STATIK-8
B 12 Results
With these button settings the deformations due to instability can be displayed graphically
and animated.
With the button pressed, the deformed wireframe is displayed and rendering may be
switched on:
. The described method for finding the cause of an instability is very helpful in many cases,
especially if there are just a few and clear reasons causing the problem.
Big differences of stiffnesses within a structure may also lead to numerical problems and
cause the instability message. The instability check will not help in such cases nor can it
treat external stiffness matrices correctly (see chap. B 7.4).
STATIK-8 B-127
B-128 STATIK-8
C 1 Natural Vibrations
Vol. C Dynamic Analyses

STATIK‐8
The dynamic analysis module of STATIK comprises
S C 1:the calculation of natural vibrations
S C 2:the definition of Design Response Spectra for earthquake analyses, p.C-8
S C 3:the response spectrum analysis (ch. ), p.C-17
S C 4:the lateral force method of analysis, p.C-28
S C 5:the Time History analysis, p.C-36
S C 6: STATIK models generated by the CEDRUS building module, p.C-49
. As to the specification of a natural vibration analysis . chap. C 1.2
C 1.1 Basics
In STATIK, the natural vibrations of frame structures are analyzed according to the theories
of 1st and 2nd order. With the theory of 2nd order, for the member stiffnesses the influence
of initial axial forces, which are determined from the section forces for any arbitrary loading,
is taken into account.
The results of the analysis of natural vibrations are the mode shapes, the associated eigen
frequencies and the modal participation factors for the response spectrum method.
To achieve this, the following eigenvalue problems have to be solved:
(K - ωi2 * M) * φi = 0 (1st order theory)
((K + KG (N))- ωi2 * M) * φi = 0 (2nd order theory)
ωi : eigenvalue (angular frequency) of the i-th mode
φi : mode shape of the i-th mode
M : mass matrix of the structure
K : elastic stiffness matrix of the structure
KG (N) : geometrical stiffness matrix of the structure
Theoretically, as many eigenvalues can be determined as there are degrees of freedom in
the structure. In practice, however, only the n eigenvalues with the lowest eigenfrequen
cies are of interest. The number of eigenvalues n to be determined can be specified by the
program user.
The calculation of the eigenvalues and mode shapes is carried out iteratively, whereby the
analysis is continued until the relative change of all required eigenvalues from one iteration
step to the next is less than a given tolerance. Its value can be specified by the user. It is suffi
ciently small when the results do not change for a further reduction of this value.
In principle, the determined mode shapes are arbitrary with respect to their amplitude.
They are normalized (i.e. scaled) by the program so that the following condition is fulfilled:
φ iT * M * φ i = 1
Another frequently encountered normalization method sets the largest displacement pa
rameter of each modeshape to 1.0. STATIK supports both types of normalization for the nu
merical output of mode shapes.
STATIK‐8 C-1
. The participation factors output for all eigenfrequencies for ground motions in the X-, Y-
and Z-directions (see below) are proportional to the scaling of the mode shapes and thus
depend on the type of normalization.
C 1.1.1 Modeling of the Structure
For a suitable modeling of the structure with respect to its stiffness basically the same rules
apply as with conventional statical analyses. Regarding member discretization, however,
the following has to be considered:
Whereas under static loads a member gives exact results, for dynamic analysis it may have
to be subdivided in order to obtain sufficiently accurate results. This is because the pro
gram approximates the mode shapes for each member with cubic parabolas.
A frame structure with many members will probably give the desired mode shapes without
additional member subdivision. But without subdivision a simple member gives unaccep
table results even for the lowest eigenvalue, as is shown in the table below. As a rough
guide, it is recommended to introduce at least 2 beam elements for each half wave of a
mode shape.
L natural vibrations in lateral direction:
ωi = EI
µ
(π i / L)2 ( i = 1, 2, 3, ...)
EI
i number of elements per member ω

mode shape 1 2 3 4 5 6 exact
1 1.110 1.004 1.001 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.0

2 5.087 4.440 4.047 4.016 4.007 4.003 4.0
3 11.160 9.990 9.165 9.072 9.036 9.0
4 20.350 18.570 17.760 16.370 16.190 16.0
5 33.220 28.230 27.750 25.660 25.0
6 45.770 44.640 40.060 39.960 36.0
. STATIK offers in the member dialog an easy way to subdivide members just for the calcu
lation.
Influence of Stiffness on the Vibrational Behaviour of a Structure:
From the equation for the natural frequency of a single degree of freedom system
w+ Ǹmk (k: stiffness, m: mass)
it follows that that both stiffness and mass appear in the square root in the expression for
the eigenfrequency. If, for example, one reduces the stiffness of the whole structure by 50%
to take into account the cracked state of concrete (such stiffness factors can be input for the
members), then the period of the fundamental mode of vibration is increased by the factor
1.41.
For some structures it is possible that together with the fundamental mode of vibration of
the whole structure numerous local eigenmodes occur, which may not be of interest for the
particular analysis (e.g. for hinged members, cables or vibrations in one direction, which are
prevented by fixing devices that are not modeled). This can often be prevented by increas
ing the stiffness of individual components, e.g. the non-relevant bending stiffness of cable
members. Such measures of course must not influence the investigated behaviour of the
structure as a whole.
C-2 STATIK‐8
C 1.1.2 Modeling the Mass of a Structure

In addition to statical considerations, for dynamic analyses the mass distribution has to be
carefully modeled. If the modeling of the masses is too approximate (e.g. only concentrated
masses in the nodes) in some circumstances not all desired mode shapes can be deter
mined.
In an analysis several mass distributions or combinations of mass distribution can be de
fined, from which for one specific dynamic analysis only one is selected. A mass distribution
can comprise the following mass elements:
S Eigenmasses (automatically provided by the cross sections):
Eigenmasses are treated like line masses, whereby rotational components are automat
ically taken into account. In the case of members of variable cross section it should be
observed that the mass distribution between the start and end of the member is nor
mally assumed to be linear. However, if in the analysis a subdivision is requested for a
member, then the cross section is geometrically interpolated between each intermedi
ate point leading to a more exact mass distribution.
S Line masses:
These consist of one component with the unit [t/m], providing the necessary inertia
forces for accelerations about the axis (centre of gravity) of the member and rotational
components with the unit [tm2/m] to take into account the inertia moments for angular
accelerations about the axes of the local coordinate system. The distribution is constant
or linear along the member or structure line axes.
S Concentrated masses in the nodes and at arbitrary positions on the members with a
translational component (unit [t]) for the displacements DX, DY, DZ and rotational com
ponents (unit [tm2]), separately for the rotations RX, RY, RZ.
Concentrated masses can also have eccentricities. If they lie on members, then they are
eccentricities in the local directions y and z and for nodal masses in the global (or the
nodes' own) directions X, Y, Z.
A concentrated mass is an idealized model for a mass having real dimensions. It must
be situated at the centre of gravity of the mass. However, since concentrated masses can
only be input at structural nodes or on member axes, their actual position has to be de
fined with eccentricities.
If the assumption of concentration of the total mass at a point is inadequate, then the
corresponding rotational components have to be introduced. These are the mass iner
tia moments about the corresponding axes of rotation. They are calculated using the
equation
Q+ ŕ r òdV ; with r as the distance of a volume element from the axis of rotation
2
Input of Mass Distributions

Due to the close analogy of the mass distributions with loads their input is put together
with the load input. A new mass distribution is specified like a new load, whereby in the se
lection field 'Type' instead of 'Load' 'Mass Distribution' is selected. The input dialog is de
scribed in detail in Ch. B 10.2.6.
Analogous to the loading combinations there are also combinations of load distributions.
Thus, for a new load select the type 'Mass Combination'.
Loads, for which the check box 'only gravity loads..' in the properties dialog has been acti
vated, can be used directly as mass distributions in mass combinations.
. Members for which neither an eigenmass nor a distributed mass is input, are assigned a
mass of size 1e-4 * eigenmass automatically by the program. In this way meaningless mode
shapes can be avoided, while the eigenfrequencies are hardly affected at all.
. The total mass as well as the position of its centre of gravity is output graphically and nu
merically for the individual mass distributions and also for mass combinations (Legend in
the Load tabsheet).
STATIK‐8 C-3
Loadings used as Mass Distributions

Ordinary loadings may also be used as mass distributions provided that they only contain
negative vertical load elements and that they have the setting
in the loading dialog. The loads become masses by
multiplying their values by the acceleration due to gravity, defined in the menu „Settings“
> „Tolerances / Further settings“ (input field named 'Gravity'). No rotational components
are considered for self-weight loads (see below under eigen masses).
Surface loadings used as mass distributions

Considering what is said above, surface loadings too can be used as mass distributions. The
surface loads are treated as follows:
surface properties:
Always ON for structures

generated by CEDRUS
building module -
else by default OFF
off: on:
The load area is subdivi
ded into 'finite elements'
whose masses are assu
med to be concentrated at e
their centers.
These point masses are A A
moved or eccentrically
connected to the nearest load carrying
load-carrying member or member
node.
point mass projec point mass eccentically

ted. i.e. moved on connected to member
member
On acceleration (translational or rotational) of point A additional inertia moments occur

due to the eccentric connection of the point mass. Of these inertia moments only the fol
lowing components are considered:
S for point masses on members only the component about the local z axis of the member
coordinate system
S for point masses on nodes only the component about the Z axis of the node coordinate
sytem .
This procedure is suitable for building structures generated by the CEDRUS building mo
dule. For structures input by hand the user must consider the usability of surface loads as
mass distributions. It is often better to assign masses directly to members.
C-4 STATIK‐8
C 1.2 Specification of a natural frequency analysis
Natural frequency analyses are special analyses thatcan be specified using the button on
the left in the tabsheet 'Analysis'. The button displays the dialog with the list of the specified
special calculations. Proceed as shown in the following figure:
1 Introduction of a new
special analysis
Dialog for selecting the desired

type of analysis;
select
'Eigenvalue analysis (dynamics)'
3
Specification dialog for dyna

mic eigenvalue analysis
Identifier of the eigen

value analysis
All mass elements are

provided with an
additional eccentricity
in the global directions
STATIK‐8 C-5
C 1.3 Result Output

The result tree in the 'Result' tabsheet contains all the special analyses specified in the tabs
heet 'Analyses', therefore also the defined eigenvalue analysis:
Returns the eigenvalue table for analysis

Returns eigenmode table by frequencies
Returns the eigenmodes grouped according to
the modal masses for each direction of excitation
Among the identifier that was entered in the specification of the natural vibration calcu
lation, see the showed list a basic entry under which a tabular representation of the natural
frequencies (see below) is available. Just below there are the entries for the waveforms.
They are numbered from 1 to the number of required eigenvalues.
Example of 'Table of Eigenvalues':
based on eigenmodes
normalized according to:
φiT * M * φi = 1
In the third table the mode shapes with their modal masses are listed separately for the di
rections of excitation X, Y and Z. The lists are sorted according to decreasing effective
modal masses mex, mey, mez. This table is especially useful in the case of a response spec
trum analysis, in which it is usually requested that for a considered direction of excitation
the sum of the effective modal masses of the considered eigenmodes is a certain percent
age of the total mass. If this is 90%, then according to the above output for the X-direction
the eigenmodes 1, 4, 6, 23 and for the Y-direction the modes 2, 3, 5, 8 have to be considered.
In the Z-direction practically no mass is excited by the first fifteen modes.
C-6 STATIK‐8
Mode shapes in different representations:
For the tabular output of the mode shapes the scaling can be selected in the following
dialog:
S normalization according to φiT * M * φi = 1 ([M]-normalized = default setting)

S normalized for maximum displacement Dmax=1m (Dmax designates a single displace
ment parameter rather than a total displacement of a point in 3D); the participation fac
tor shown in the title corresponds to the direction of excitation that is defined by the
direction with the maximum displacement found
S the factor input field is only active for [M]-normalization; all output values are multiplied
by this factor
For scaling type 'max. displacement=1' the title of the output table also contains the partici
pation factor (see above):
STATIK‐8 C-7
C 2 Design Response Spectra

For the earthquake analyses, the User may select a design response spectrum of the ground
acceleration from a national code or he may specify his own curve. Several design spectra
may be used in one calculation.
C 2.1 Specification of Design Response Spectra
This button is used for the input of design spectra. It is found in the tabsheet 'Analysis' as
well as in the specification dialogs for the response spectrum and lateral force method
analyses.
The button calls the spectrum list dialog 1 :
- edit
- delete
- view
1 selected spectrum
Import spectrum from other calculation
(text file with extension '.SPK' in
'INP'-folder)
2
List of all de

fined spectra Identifier of the
in the actual spectrum
calculation
for non standard

parameters of S,
TB, TC, TD
with this setting

the importance
factor can be gi
ven explicitly
C 2.2 Standard Spectra of Supported National Codes
The input of standard spectra according to the national codes listed in dialog 2 is accom
plished in dialog 3 , as it is shown above for the code SIA261. Do not forget to set the be
haviour factor correctly and the checkbox for vertical excitation if the spectrum will be used
for an analysis in the vertical direction.
The following paragraphs describe the standard formulas of the supported codes.
C-8 STATIK‐8
Swiss SIA 261

The design value of the horizontal ground acceleration (agd) for the 4 seismic zones is de
fined as follows (paragraph 16.2.1.2):
Zone Z1 Z2 Z3a Z3b
agd [m/s2] 0.6 1.0 1.3 1.6
The soil classes determine the section boundaries TB, TC and TD together with the value of
the parameter S for the design spectrum (paragraph 16.2.2.2):
Soil TB TC TD S
classes [sek] [sek] [sek]
A 0.15 0.40 2.00 1.0
B 0.15 0.50 2.00 1.2
C 0.20 0.60 2.00 1.15
D 0.20 0.80 2.00 1.35
E 0.15 0.50 2.00 1.40
The structure classes determine the importance factors f (Paragraph 16.3.2):
Structure Class I II III
Importance factors γf 1.0 1.2 1.4
The spectrum Sd(T) is defined by the following formula:
0 v T t T B :
agd b
S d(T) + g @ S @ 0.67 ) T q0 * 0.67
TB
ƪ ǒ Ǔƫ @ g f
agd
T B v T v T C : S d(T) + b 0 @ g @ S
q @ gf
agd T
T C v T v T D : S d(T) + b 0 @ g @ S @ C @ g f
T@q
agd T @T agd
T D v T : S d(T) + b 0 @ g @ S @ C2 D @ g f w 0.1 @ gf @ g
T @q
agd = horizontal ground acceleration (see above)

g = gravity acceleration
T = vibration period of a linear single-DOF system
β0 = spectral amplification factor = 2.5 @ h
q = behaviour factor
f
Ǹ(5 ) c10@ 100) w 0.55
= importance factor
= damping correction factor + ǒ c + 5%, h + 1 Ǔ
Vertical seismic action (paragraph 16.2.4.2):

During a vertical analysis performed using the response spectrum method, the parameters
α, and q are automatically adjusted with the following values:
Sdv = 0.7 Sd
qv = 1.5
In this calculation only seismic loads in the Z direction (= vertical direction) may be entered.
Dimensioning value of the ground displacements (§ 16.2.4.3):
u gd + 0.05 @ g f @ a gd @ S @ TC @ T D
. The spectral values in the above formulas are dimensionless (acceleration * 1/g)
STATIK‐8 C-9
Variant of the SIA261

In practice it often happens that the formulas of the standard spectra are used, but the ac
celeration value agd instead of an earthquake zone and the soil parameters S, TB, TC, TD are
transferred directly and are not derived from a specified soil class. To do this, select 'User-
defined' in the SIA dialog.
Swiss SIA 160 (1989)

The with the gravitational acceleration g normed elastisc acceleration spectra ah /g are de
fined in the Code SIA 160 in figure 27 (page 70) for stiff and middle-stiff soil in the four Zones
1, 2, 3a und 3b.
ah/g
Zone 3b stiff soil
0.3
middle-stiff Zone 3a
soil
Zone 2
0.2
Zone 1
0.1
2 3 10 33 Frequency [Hz]
The deformation coefficient k is determined in accordance with paragraph 4 19 72 of the

code (page 71) as follows:
deformation coefficient k
Values from linear constant

table 33 interpolation 1.0
1.0
10 Hz 33 Hz frequency
For the Design coefficient Cd see paragraph 4 19 73 in code SIA.

The maximum modal amplitudes Yi,max calculated according to equation [4], page C-22 for
the ith eigenvalue as follows:
Y i,max + ai @ 12 @ S a(w i) @ 1 @ C d

wi K
with
a
S a(w i) + gh @ g
ai = Modal participation factor for the ith Eigenvalue
C-10 STATIK‐8
Eurocode EC8 (ENV 1998-1, January 2003)

Zone factor : maximum horizontal base acceleration A = α ⋅ g
(g : gravity acceleration = 9.81 m/sek2).
Soil type A, B, C, D, E: specify the range limits TB,TC und TD
and other parameters of the spectrum
Soil type „user-defined”: The parameters TB,TC , TD and S
can be specified by the user
Values of the parameters describing Type I
Soil type TB TC TD S
[sec] [sec] [sec]
A 0.15 0.40 2.00 1.0
B 0.15 0.50 2.00 1.2
C 0.20 0.60 2.00 1.15
D 0.20 0.80 2.00 1.35
E 0.15 0.50 2.00 1.4
Values of the parameters describing Type II

Soil type TB TC TD S
[sec] [sec] [sec]
A 0.05 0.25 1.2 1.0
B 0.05 0.25 1.2 1.35
C 0.10 0.25 1.2 1.5
D 0.10 0.30 1.2 1.8
E 0.05 0.25 1.2 1.6
With these parameters the design spectra for horizontal excitations are defined as follows:
0 v T t T B :
b
ƪ ǒ
S d(T) + A @ g I @ S @ 2 ) T q0 * 2
3 TB 3
Ǔƫ
b
T B v T v T C : S d(T) + A @ g I @ S @ q0
b T
ǒ Ǔ
+ A @ g I @ S @ q0 C
T
T C v T v T D : S d(T)
w 0.20 @ A @ g I
ǒ Ǔ
b T T
+ A @ g I @ S @ q0 C 2 D
T
T D v T : S d(T)
w 0.20 @ A @ g I
A = base acceleration = g 2.5 @ h

T = period of corresponding eigenmode
0 = spectral amplification factor =
I = Importance Factor
Ǹ(5 ) c10@ 100) w 0.55

q = behaviour Factor
= damping correction factor + ǒ c + 5%, h + 1 Ǔ
STATIK‐8 C-11
Vertical seismic excitation:

For the vertical components of the seismic action the design spectrum is defined by the ex
pressions above with the vertical design ground acceleration, Av replacing A and the fol
lowing parameters:
Type Av/A TB TC TD S
[sec] [sec] [sec]
Type I 0.9 0.05 0.15 1.0 1.0
Type II 0.45 0.05 0.15 1.0 1.0
Dimensioning value of the soil displacements:
d g + 0.025 @ a g @ S @ TC @ TD
Variant of the EC8

In practice it often happens that the formulas of the standard spectra are used, but the soil
parameters S, TB, TC, TD are transferred directly and are not derived from a specified soil
class. To do this, select 'User-defined' in the Eurocode dialog.
Greek Code GRN

Zone factor α : maximum horizontal base (ground) acceleration
A=α⋅g
(g : acceleration due to gravity = 9.81 m/s2).
Soil Type A, B, C, D: specify range limits T1 and T2
of the spectrum:
Soil Type A B C D
T1 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.20
T2 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.20
C-12 STATIK‐8
With the input coefficients the design spectrum is defined as follows:
0 v T t T 1 : ƪ
R d(T) + A @ g I 1 ) T Q b *1
T1 q 0
ǒ Ǔƫ
T 1 v T v T 2 : R d(T) + A @ g I qq b 0
ǒ Ǔ
2ń3
R d(T) + A @ g I qq b 0 2
T
T 2 v T :
T
R d(T) + at least0.25 @ A @ gI
A = base acceleration = α . g
T = period or corresponding eigenvalue 2.5 @ h
β0 = spectral amplification factor =
I = importance factor
q = behaviour factor
= foundation factor
= damping correction factor + Ǹ(2 ) c7@ 100) w 0.7 ǒ c + 5%, h + 1 Ǔ
Seismic excitation vertical (only for vertical analysis):

The parameters α, and q are used for a vertical response spectrum analysis, whereby the
program automatically carries out the following adjustments:
v = 0.7
v = 1.0
qv = 0.5 q (at least 1.0)
C 2.3 User-defined Spectra
The microzonation of certain areas lead to special spectra, which can not be covered by the
standard parameterized types. Such non standard spectra are defined either by a single
curve (and hence an implicit damping, often used for buildings) or by a set of curves cover
ing a range of damping coefficients. Single curve spectra can be used for both the response
spectrum and the lateral force methods of analysis. Multi curve spectra are applicable for
response spectrum analyses only.
The input procedure is described for both types of definition here after.
STATIK‐8 C-13
The following example shows a spectrum defined in the form frequency vs. acceleration.
It is based on an importance factor g f =1 and a behaviour factor q=1.0.
ah [m/s2]
the spectrum is only
usable for a response
ξ=5% spectrum analysis (RSA)
3.0 if
ξ=10% 1) its frequency range co

vers the frequencies of all
2.0 considered eigenmodes
ξ=15% 2) the damping coeffi

cients used in the RSA
1.0 specification lie between
5% and 15%.
0.5 1 2 3 10 33 100 frequency [Hz]
The spectrum is input in the dialog 'Spectrum user-defined' as a text according to the fol
lowing input scheme:
B_USERDEFINED
V_DISPLACEMENT VS. FREQUENCY SFAC sfac QDEF qd

B_ACCELERATION PERIODE
PERIOD
PSEUDO_VELOCITY
FOR A_DAMPING_IMPLICIT W_VALUES xj vji

LOGARITHM_INTEPOL.
DAMPING_VALUES ξi STEP ∆x vji
Rules of use for a syntax scheme

In such a scheme, you have to follow the lines like a train on rails to respect the syntax. Every
first letter defines a keyword. Any text without spaces can be added to a keyword for expla
nation. The underlined keywords are mandatory. „VS.“ (for „versus“) is a key word here that
can be omitted.
Each numerical value must be specified with a point instead of the comma (for example
„1.0“).
The entire definition must be written on one line. In order to make the commands easier to
read, it is possible to enter the text in several lines by ending each line (except the last one)
with the „/“ character.
The format is otherwise free. At least one space is required to separate two syntactic ele
ments (keyword or numeric value).
Additional remarks for the input of the spectrum

If three values xi are announced after „D”, then there must be, after „W” for each xj or after
„S” for each Dx, three vji values.
The sfac=g f /q scalar is a factor by which all input spectral values vji are multiplied.
If, for example , the input spectral values are based on a importance factor g f =1 and a
behaviour factor q=1.0, the spectrum can be directly adapted to other values of these two
factors by a matching value sfac=g f /q .
If one wants to change the previously defined spectrum with a behaviour factor 1.0 for e.g.
a behaviour factor of 2.0, then the value 0.5 has to be set for sfac instead of 1.0, and 2.0 has
to be set for qd instead of 1.0.
C-14 STATIK‐8
qd is the displacement behaviour factor, by which displacement results calculated with a

design spectrum are to be multiplied according to the codes (SIA 261:16.5.5.1: qd=q, EC-8:
qd=q, 'unless otherwise specified'). The input value for qd has no inluence on the spectrum
(i.e. the spectral values, and from these the computes internal forces, have already been
reduced by the behaviouor factor included in the spectrum, but the displacements have
not to be reduced).
Often the input consists of only one curve. Instead of 'DAMPING_VALUES..' one has to
choose 'A_DAMPING_IMPLICIT' (see also the section C 3.2.2 “Settings for Damping”,
p.C-19).
. It is advisable in any case, to verify the numerically entered spectra graphically (see chap.
C 2.4)
Input for the example above:
By way of this example, the most important rules for

the interpretation of the input scheme are illustrated.
Remarks:
- The whole input text consists of a single line, whe
reby it can be interrupted anywhere by using a line
continuation symbol '/'.
- From the words written in capitals at least the initial
letter must be used.
- All numerical values must have a decimal point.
Otherwise, the input is format-free. Between the indi
vidual elements (words, numbers) there must be at
least one blank.
If these rules are violated the program gives a cor
responding error message.
Example 2: elastic spectrum given in sections with formulas (one curve):
Am einfachsten erzeugt man die

Wertetabelle in einem
Tabellenkalkulationsprogramm
(z.B. Excel) und kopiert sie
dann in den Spektrumsdialog.
Die Zeilenfortsetzungszeichen '/'

am Ende der Zeilen müssen
noch hinzugefügt werden (nach
Leerschlag).
Hier wurde ein Verhaltensbei
wert von 2.0 und ein Bedeu
tungsfaktor von 1.0 angenom
men (-> Sfak 0.5 Qdef 2.0).
STATIK‐8 C-15
C 2.4 Graphical Representation of Spectra
For a graphical check of the input:
C-16 STATIK‐8
C 3 Response Spectrum Analyses

As a supplment to this chapter, C 6 covers in detail the application of the response spec
trum analysis method for buildings generated by the building module of CEDRUS. The
manual of CEDRUS itself contains useful information in the chapter 'Example with earth
quake analysis.
. How to specify a response spectrum analysis see ch. C 3.2
C 3.1 Basics
C 3.1.1 Principle of Modal Analysis

The following dynamic equilibrium formulation is the basis of the principle of modal analy
sis on which also the method of response spectra is based:
.. .
M A(t) ) C A(t) ) K A(t) + F(t)[1]
with
M : global mass matrix of the structure
C : global damping matrix of the structure
K : global stiffness matrix of the structure
..
A(t)AAA A(t) : vector of nodal accelerations, nodal velocities or nodal displacements
F(t) : external load vector
With the transformation of [1] among other things with the help of the assumption:
A i(t) + fiY i(t) [2]
where:
A i(t) : i‐th modal component of the displacement vector A(t)
fi : vector of i‐th mode
Y i(t) : modal coordinate (amplitude) of the i‐th mode
the system of equations [1] is uncoupled into n independent scalar equations of motion
(n=No. of eigenvalues), written for the i‐th mode, as follows:
.. .
Y i(t) ) 2c i w iYi(t) ) w 2i Y i(t) + F i(t)[3]
where:
ci : modal damping of mode i
wi : circular frequency of mode i
F i(t) : modal loading function of mode i
By solving the uncoupled equations of motion for their amplitudes and superposition of
the mode shapes scaled with these amplitudes one obtains the desired structural re
sponse.
Literature on modal analysis:

R.Clough, J.Penzien: „Dynamics of Structures” (Mc Graw Hill College, Boston, 1975)
K.J. Bathe: „Finite‐Elemente‐Methoden”, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1996
STATIK‐8 C-17
C 3.2 Response Spectrum Analysis (RSA) Specification
A prerequisite is a natural vibrations analysis with the desired number of eigenvalues (see
chap. C 1.2 ).
Specifications for response spectum analyses are defined and managed in the tabsheet
'Analysis' using the adjacent button 'Special Analyses':
2
1 Define a new special
analysis.
(Adjacent buttons to mo

dify or delete a selected
analysis row)
A dialogue with the available

analysis types appears;
select 'Response Spectrum

Analysis'
3
The dialog for defining or editing the parameters of a RSA specification looks as follows:
Upper part of dialog:
Mandatory ID with which the

results are addressed
ID of vibration analysis to be
used
Selection of the eigenmodes

to be used (see below)
if used the two lists must corre

spond exactly
Damping coefficients are used in the following places:

- in the standard spectra of the codes SIA-261, EC8and GRN and in
user-defined spectra (multi curve type)
- for the C.Q.C. method
C-18 STATIK‐8
C 3.2.1 Selection of the Eigenmodes to be considered

S Use all eigenvalues: use all eigenvalues requested in the eigenvalue analysis.
S Use the n most important eigenvalues for each direction: the eigenvalues are sorted
for each direction according to decreasing effective modal mass, i.e. those that give the
greatest contribution come first. One can specify how many of the first n eigenvalues
should be used, separately for the horizontal and vertical directions.
S Effective modal masses as percentage of the total mass: Analogous to the previous
option, in each direction (horizontal or vertical) the n most important eigenvalues are
used, where n is fixed by the program such that at least the sum of the considered effec
tive modal masses corresponds to the specified percentage of the total mass. If this per
centage cannot be reached no error message is given.
S Selection of eigenvalues: Only the specified eigenvalues are used. The numbers corre
spond to those of the table with the calculated eigenfrequencies (sorted according to
increasing eigenfrequencies).
C 3.2.2 Settings for Damping
a) For parameterized spectra:

S For all eigenmodes according to spectra: the value of the damping coefficient ξ de
fined in the spectrum dialog will be used to generate the spectra for all eigenmodes.
S For all eigenmodes: the value of the damping coefficient ξ given here will be used to
generate the spectra for all eigenmodes, hence overruling the value set in the spectrum
dialog. To set ξ = 0 is admissible.
S General values: Individual ξ values for all modes. A list of value couples i , mode num
ber i is given here. This list must correspond to the list of eigenmodes to be analysed (see
dialog shown above).
b) For user-defined spectra:

For multi curves, the specified damping coefficients ξ (one for all modes or individual)
must lie between the spectrum curves with the lowest and highest damping values.
The setting 'For all eigenmodes according spectra' doesn't make sense here and is not
allowed.
For a single curve, since damping is implicitly included in the given spectral curve, all
settings here for ξ are ignored by the program.
STATIK‐8 C-19
C 3.2.3 Response Spectrum Analyses (RSA)
Lower part of dialog for envelope Combinations column
Berech
nung
Each avtive Excitation direction:

row represents Normally either horizontal
an individual OR vertical. The horizontal
RSA direction is defined by the
angle with respect to the
global X axis.
Spectral values are multi
plied by the given factors,
which are normally set to
1.0 .
. The five analyses shown in the dialog above are not typical and do not make sense in this
configuration. They simply illustrate the possibilities of the program.
An RSA specification usually consists of at least two or more RSA's, whose results may be
combined in different ways to obtain a total result.
An RSA is always made for a certain direction of the seismic action, often in one of the global
coordinate directions X, Y or Z.
The RSA specification dialog offers six rows for the definition of individual RSA's. They con
tain the following fields:
activate factor for

row vertical
excitation
Name of the RSA
name of superposition method:
spectrum - sum of absolute va
to be lues
excitation direction and used - SRSS
factor - C.Q.C
The different methods of superposition are described above in the chapter dealing with the
fundamental theory.
For studying purposes: A special case is given by the method of superposition 'sum of abso
lute values', when the eigenmodes to be considered are set to 'Selection of eigenvalues' (in
the upper part of the dialog) and only one eigenvalue is requested. In this case, of course,
there is nothing to superimpose, but the result values are output with their original signs
(not the absolute values).
C-20 STATIK‐8
C 3.2.4 Combining RSA Results
Usually RSA's are carried out for the excitation directions X and Y and in special cases also
for Z. The corresponding dialog settings look as follows:
For a combination of these results STATIK-6 offers the following methods:
S No combination, just envelopes of the results for selected RSA's
S SRSS (square root of the sum of squares):
This is the most common method for combining the results for orthogonal excitation
directions (usually X, Y and possibly Z)
S 1+0.3...: an alternative method to SRSS; the results of this method are the maximum va
lues of the following linear combinations of the results for the directions X, Y and possi
bly Z, EAX, EAY(,EAZ) :
1.0 EAX + 0.3 EAY ( + 0.3 EAZ )
0.3 EAX + 1.0 EAY ( + 0.3 EAZ )
( 0.3 EAX + 0.3 EAY + 1.0 EAZ )
S Absolute: a simple adition of the results (of limited practical use)
The combinations are set in the dialog as follows:
Combinations
column
These 3 RSA's are com

bined by the SRSS me
thod
These 2 by 1.0_0.3...
Build envelopes
An activated checkbox in the combinations column says that the corresponding row is
combined with the row immediately above. KA123 in the figure above for example com
bines the results of three RSA's by the SRSS method. A combination of more than three
RSA's would not make sense, since there are only three orthogonal directions.
Maximum values are built by comparing combination results and selected RSA results.
They are calculated if the corresponding check box is active. RSA's are considered for the
maximum value evaluation if they are checked in the column 'Max +'.
STATIK‐8 C-21
C 3.3 Maximum response
In the response spectrum analysis method one is interested in the maximum response of
the structure for a given seismic loading. The starting point for the analysis are the uncou
pled equations of motion [3] of the structure. The modal loading function Fi (t) is thereby
replaced by:
..
F i(t) + G i a(t)
where:
..
a(t) : seismic base acceleration acting on the structure
Gi : modal participation factor for the i‐th mode
The modal participation factors are defined as follows:
G i + fTiF 0 + f TiM e
with:
fi : ith eigenvector of the structure
F0 : vector of the mass loads of the structure, on which the seismic
acceleration ä(t) acts
M : global mass matrix
e : vector for the excitation direction
e.g. for X direction: e + Ǌ ǋ, Y direction: e + Ǌ ǋ

1
0
0.
.
0
1
0.
.
The modal maximum responses Y i,max can now be calculated with the help of the spectral
values of a given response spectum as follows:
Y i,max + G i S d(w i) + G i w1 S pv(wi) + G i 12 Sa(w i)[4]

i wi
with:
S d (wi) : spectral value of the relative displacement
S pv (wi) : spectral value of the pseudo-velocity

S a (w i ) : spectral value of the absolute acceleration
The response spectrum describes the maximum response of the single degree of freedom
system (simple oscillator) [3] with a given damping value and variable eigenfrequency for
the seismic loading ä(t)). The ordinate of the response spectrum can vary with frequency
or period, as abscissa Sd , Spv or Sa can be used.
The analysis is reduced therefore to using the given response spectrum for the determina
tion of the spectral values of the modes with the frequencies i (and damping values i ) and
the determination of the maximum modal amplitudes Y i,max of the eigenvalues according
to equation [4].
With [2] one obtains for the maximum displacements of mode i:
A i,max + fiY i,max[5]
With the maximum displacement of a mode not only the maximum displacement
components for this mode are known in all points of a structure but also the maximum sec
tion forces and reactions can be calculated immediately.
Superposition Methods for the Maximum Modal Contributions

Since the maximum amplitudes of the considered modes do not all occur at the same time
the problem is how the results of these modes are to be combined to obtain a suitable total
result for design purposes. A simple addition would be too conservative.
C-22 STATIK‐8
Basically one cannot superimpose the mode shapes themselves but only the scalar result
values calculated for each mode, such as a section force, displacement or reaction
component at a certain point of the structure.
The following notation is used for the subsequently described superposition methods:
E: a result quantity of interest, e.g. the normal force in a point of the structure
Ei : the value of E due to Ai,max (max. displacements of mode i)
Emax: the maximum value of E (all considered modes combined)
Addition of the absolute contributions
ȍŤ E Ť[6]
n
E max + i
i+1
This method is of no importance in practice since, as mentioned above, the results are too
conservative.
SRSS method (Square-Root-of-Sum-of-Squares)
E max + Ǹȍ n
i+1
2
E i [7]
This method assumes that all modal responses can be taken as independent of each other.
Otherwise the method is unconservative. According to Eurocode 8 two modes may be
considered as independent of each other, if their periods Ti and Tj (Ti<=Tj) satisfy the con
dition Ti<=0.9*T j. This method is the only one mentioned in the SIA261 and is default in
STATIK-6.
Complete Quadratic Combination (C.Q.C.)
E max + Ǹȍ ȍ n
i+1 j+1
n
Eiå ijEj [8]
with the correlation coefficients:
8 Ǹcic j ǒci)rc jǓr 3ń2

å ij +
(1-r 2) 2 ) 4c ic jrǒ1)r 2Ǔ ) 4 c2i )c 2j r 2ǒ Ǔ
wj
r+w = modal damping coefficient
i
Properties of å ij : 0 ¬ å ij ¬ 1; åij + å ji; å ij + 1für i + j

Thus [8] can be written as follows:
E max + Ǹȍ n
i+1
E2i ) ȍ ȍ E å E [8a]
n
i+1 j+1
n
i ij j
ip j
If the modes are not independent of each other as described for the SRSS method above
the C.Q.C. method should be used.
If the 2nd term under the root of [8a] is getting smaller and smaller the C.Q.C. method con
verges to the SRSS method as can be seen from [8a]. This is the case if damping is getting
smaller, the ratio r of two neighboring frequencies is getting bigger or if Ei*Ej of modes with
dependent frequencies is very small.
STATIK‐8 C-23
Combining Results of different Excitation Directions

A response spectrum analysis is always made for a given excitation direction, say the hori
zontal X direction. For a complete analysis at least an analysis for the horizontal excitation
direction Y (perpendicular to X) has to be done and maybe also one for the vertical direction
Z.
Combination of results for excitations in X,Y and possibly Z direction

Let the effects of the excitation directions X,Y,Z be denoted as EEx , EEy , EEz. These effects
may be combined using one of the following methods:
1) E Emax + EEx ) EEy ) EEz generally too conservative
2) E Emax + ǸE Ex
2 2
) E Ey ) E Ez
2
standard
3) E Emax + Max(EEmax1, E Emax2, EEmax3) alternative to (2) according to EC8
E Emax1 + 1.0EEx ) 0.3EEy ) 0.3EEz
Combination of excitations in any direction

In such cases a simple envelope of all result values is considered:
E Emax + Max(EE1, E E2, AAA)
Envelopes for Design Purposes

Design procedures are often based on the maximum value of a section force component
combined with the corresponding values of the residual components.
The results of the response spectrum method are individually calculated (positive) maxi
mum values of each result component. The maximum value of the moment in a point may
not occur at the same time as the maximum of the shear force of which even the sign is un
known. So there is no exact way of calculating corresponding values, e.g. of residual
components. Simplifying assumptions are needed like in the approach suggested by C.
Katz (D-A-CH Mitteilungsblatt Band 84, März 2009), which is implemeted in STATIK and sub
sequently described.
E denotes the effects such as section forces, displacement components or reactions in a
certain point of a structure. For space frames these effects consist of 6 components. Sought
are the values Ek,tot (k=1..6) of all components. For one component Ee we seek the (positive)
maximum value and of the residual components the corresponding values (acting to
gether with Ee) with the correct signs.
For design purposes E must be considered with both signs.
The summation in the following expressions is effected with respect to all considered
eigenmodes.
For the SRSS method
E k, tot + ȍ f E
n
i+1
i k, i ; fi +
Ee, i
Ee,max
; E e,max + Ǹȍ n
i+1
2
E i (+ SRSS method)
For the C.Q.C. method
ȍ å E
n
E k, tot + ȍ f E
n
i+1
i k, i; f i +
i+1
ie
E e,max
e, i
; E e,max + Ǹ ȍ ȍ E å E (+ C.Q.C.method)

n n
i+1 j+1
i ij j
C-24 STATIK‐8
C 3.4 Results of Response Spectrum Analyses

For each response spectrum analysis specification there is a corresponding branch in the
result tree in the tabsheet Results:
Tabular record of the

2 specified RSA's
Offer the usual results like

Diagrams of the spectra section forces, displa
used showing the peri cements and reactions for
ods of the used eigen the selected RSA's, combi
modes nation or
maximum values
Diagrams of the spectra used: For each RSA a diagram of the spectrum used can be re
quested. All eigenvalues considered are plotted in this diagram.
C 3.4.1 Use of the results
Direct Use
The following unsigned (i.e. positive) results are available for all specified RSA's and all pos
sibly specified combinations and maximum values:
S reactions,
S displacements in all design sections,
relative displacements of end of members with respect to start of members for vertical
members (interstory-drift of buildings),
S section forces in all design sections
S accelerations (inertia forces included) in all design sections
Without algebraic sign in each support resp. in each section of the results in the structure
be available.
The displacements can also the relative displacement of the member ends with respect to
the member start for vertical member be obtained. These results are in buildings (horizon
tal story deflection = Interstorey drift) requires.
Use in Limit State Specifications

RSA results may be combined with results of other actions to obtain limit values.
STATIK‐8 C-25
For structures generated by the CEDRUS building module the necessary limit state specifi
cations are generated automatically (see chap. C 6.4.2). For other structures proceed as fol
lows:
1) Specify a user-defined action of type 'accidental' named 'Earthquake':
2) Create a new limit state specification (tabsheet 'Analysis'):
3) Activate the action 'Earthquake':
4) A double click on the action line 'Earthquake' leads to the following dialog for the action
specification:
C-26 STATIK‐8
Here the results of the combination AS1_K2 are to be considered for the limit values.
Copy the respective entry from the list on the left to the specification on the right using
the button [ ].
Since the program knows that it is a response spectrum analysis result both signs are
considered automatically.
Close the dialog with [OK].
5) Back now in the limit state specification dialog, create the action combination with the
designated button:
Use in FAGUS reinforced concrete analysis

The section forces from a response spectrum analysis can also be taken into account for a
reinforced concrete analysis. For more information on this topic, see PartD, „R.C. Analyses“.
Loads from torsion

If it is a STATIK calculation that was generated from the CEDRUS building module, the tor
sional loads are generated automatically.
In the case of direct modeling of a structure in STATIK, these torsional loads must be explic
itly specified by the user.
The torsional loads, which must be taken into account both with the response spectrum
analysis and with the lateral force method for the design of a building, are described in de
tail in Section C 6.3.2, pageC-53.
. See also chap. C 6.3.2 for the potential treatment of according to standard to be considered
for buildings accidental eccentricity of the center of mass.
STATIK‐8 C-27
C 4 Lateral force method of analysis
C 4.1 Basics
The implementation of the method in STATIK is partly different for calculations generated
by the building module of CEDRUS (hereinafter called generated building models) and for
calculations input by hand (called general models).
C 4.1.1 General
The lateral (i.e. equivalent static) force method is the simplest method for the analysis of the
seismic action on a building. It is restricted to structural systems that can be represented
by two plane structural models whose behavior is mainly determined by their fundamental
modes of vibration and thus not substantially influenced by the contributions of the higher
modes. Regarding the requirements for using the method see the corresponding codes.
The total horizontal (lateral) force due to seismic action is determined as follows for each
principal direction:
F d + Sd(T 1)G totl
Sd : ordinate of the design spectrum for the fundamental period of vibration T1
Gtot : Total weight of the structure consisting of the dead loads and part of the live loads
according to the respective codes
: mass reduction factor of 0.85 for recording the ratio of the modal mass of
the fundamental vibration to the total mass for buildings with at least three
horizontally movable floors and T1 < 2TC (not provided in all codes,
not even in SIA 261))
The distribution of the total lateral force over the structure is described later. It is different
for generated building models and general models.
C 4.1.2 Distribution of the total lateral force for general models

Again the distribution is based on one of the following three shapes of an assumed eigen
mode {f}:
1) {f} = fundamental vibration mode for one of the directions X, Y or Z
2) Corresponding to an assumed eigenmode with a linear course in the Z direction for the
directions X, Y. The load vector is determined as in 1) above, with an artificial eigenmode
with deflection increasing linearly in Z in the corresponding direction X or Y is assumed
for {f}.
3) {f} = {1,1,1, ... 1}
The load vector is proportional to [M]*{f} ([M] = mass matrix, {f} = assumed eigen
mode). It is scaled so that the total force in the considered direction is equal to the total
force Fd.
C-28 STATIK‐8
If necessary a base level can be specified for the distributions of type 2 and 3.
the load distribution corresponds to one of
structure: the following three displacement shapes
(real or virtual eigenmodes):
(1) (2) (3) (2) (3)
If a base level is specified only

the masses above this level are
considered (only available for 2)
and 3) )
fundamental linear constant
vibration By default the base level is assu
displace displace med at the lowest level of the
mode ment ment structure
Graphics of loadings for general models

A graphical display of all nodal loads has proven to be rather confusing. Therefore just a sim
ple diagram is plotted, which shows by way of illustration the mode shape on which the
load distribution is based as well as a possible base level.
C 4.1.3 Distribution of the total lateral force for generated building models
The distribution of the total lateral force over all stories can either be based on the calcula
ted fundamental eigenmode or this eigenmode can be assumed to increase linearly over
the height. In the first case, the formula is:
s iG i
F di + Fd
Ss jG j
Fdi : lateral force on story i
Fd : total lateral force
si , sj : weight factor for story i,j
Gi ,Gj : weight of story i,j (Gtot = sum of all Gi)
For a linear shape (as assumed in the code SIA 261) the formula can be written as follows
z iG i
F i + Fd
Sz jG j
zi : story levels
Graphics of loadings for generated building models

Normally you will see not only a horizontal force at each story level but also a moment
about Z. This moment has nothing to do with the torsional loadings prescribed by the co
des but rather with the fact that there usually is no node at the location of the center of mass
where the force has to be introduced. So it has to be introduced in a nearby node together
with the necessary correction moment.
STATIK‐8 C-29
Loading for
lateral force analysis LFA
in direction X
Distribution according
linear displacement
Total lateral force = 562.1 kN
Display of the lateral force loading Display of the lateral force loading
for a generated building model for a general model
C-30 STATIK‐8
C 4.2 Specification of a lateral force analysis (LFA)
. IN STATIK LFAs are based on a natural frequency analysis even if the used fundamental peri
ods are not taken from it. Thus a natural frequency analysis must be specified (see ch. C 1.2)
before an LFA specification is possible .
LFA specifications are special analyses and therefore are treated in the tabsheet 'Analysis'.
Use the shown button to open the dialog 'Special analyses':
1 Define a new special

analysis
A dialog with the available

analysis types appears;
Select 'Lateral force method'

3
Select the eigenvalue specification

on which the LFA is based (thus de
fining the mass distribution and
possibly the fundamental periods)
see C 4.1.1
Select for each direction:

- automatic = from natural
frequency analysis
- max = maximum spectral value
- period given explicitly
Direction Z only active for deforma
tion prop. eigenmode
see Important note on page C-32
see C 4.1.3 and C 4.1.2

The force distribution starts from
this level upwards. Masses below it
are not considered.
(not available for
'prop. Eigenmode'!)
STATIK‐8 C-31
Fundamental periods of the building
They are needed to read the spectral value Sd from the spectrum and can be evaluated
automatically by an eigenvalue calculation or input explicitly. If one decides to use the ma
ximum spectral value the periods are not needed.
Sdmax
Sd
T1
Domain of validity of the LFA
Important note
STATIK is not able to detect whether the lateral force analysis is applicalble for a given
structure.
However, the following condition is checked for (insufficient) protection against comple
tely unusable fundamental vibrations. It is not taken from any standard and can be changed
in the dialog:
If the fundamental vibrations are adopted from a natural vibration calculation, the ratio of
the effective modal mass of the fundamental vibration used to the total mass must not fall
below a predetermined value of 40% (can be set in the dialog). Otherwise, the program
issues a warning and switches to max for the corresponding direction (= maximum spectral
value).
The modes with the biggest

effective modal mass are
assumed to be the
fundamental modes
1 2
1 Fundamental mode in X-direction 2 Fundamental mode in Y-direction

with an eff. modal mass of 343.6 t, with an eff. modal mass of 336.5 t,
which corresponds to 49.3% of the which corresponds to 48.3% of the
total mass total mass
-> 40% condition fulfilled. -> 40% condition fulfilled.
C-32 STATIK‐8
Mass distribution
The mass distribution is taken from the selected eigenvalue specification. Such a specifica
tion must therefore exist even if the calculated fundamental periods are not used.
For generated building models the mass distribution is a combination of all story masses.
The mass of the building is determined by the

mass distributions of the individual stories.
The mass distribution used for an LFA must be

Zi a combination of all these story masses.
The centers of gravity of the story masses are
used as story levels for the calculation of the
distribution of the lateral forces.
C 4.3 Results of a Lateral Force Analysis
The direct results of an LFA are a table with the lateral forces and a graphical output with
the used spectrum including the plotted periods. The result tree contains the correspon
ding branch:
The result branch shown above only shows the evaluated lateral loads. But the program
also generates the corresponding loadings, which are listed in the result branch 'Loadings
linear, 1st order' and for which results like section forces, etc., are available.
Output for generated building models

The table lists the lateral forces for each story together with the story weights and the used
weight factors:
total lateral loads in X- and Y-

directions
Together with the table shown above, a table with the data on the generated torsional loads
is output (see below).
STATIK‐8 C-33
Output for general models
Output of spectrum
The graph with the spectrum shows where the periods of the fundamental vibrations are
used in the spectrum and whichSd values can be read out.
C 4.3.1 Generation of the lateral force loadings
Lateral Force Loadings

The corresponding loadings for the evaluated lateral loads are automatically generated.
They contain forces in the centers of gravity of all stories for generated building models and
nodal forces in all nodes for general models. The loadings are named xxx%X and xxx%Y
(xxx = name of the LFA). They are empty as long as no results are requested for them, so if
you want to see the generated loads call for some results first.
In the case of STATIK models created by the user, the loads for the lateral forces and the cor
responding torsional loads (see below) must be specified explicitly.
Loadings from torsion

If it is a STATIK calculation that was generated from the CEDRUS building module, the tor
sional loads are generated automatically.
In the case of direct modeling of a structure in STATIK, these torsional loads must be explic
itly specified by the user.
The torsional loads, which must be taken into account both with the response spectrum
analysis and with the lateral force method for the design of a building, are described in de
tail in Section C 6.3.2.
C-34 STATIK‐8
C 4.3.2 Example steel hall

An example of an LFA with all the necessary input can be loaded from the menu „Help“ >
„Load examples...“ > „Dynamics“ > „Lateral force method“.
The special analyses include the necessary natural vibrations analysis 'EWA', three LFA's
with different force distributions and an RSA:
Note the mass combination used in the natural vibration analysis, which combines the self-
weight of the structure and the weight of the roof covering, the latter being defined as a
surface loading.
STATIK‐8 C-35
C 5 Time History
A time course simulation is used in structural dynamics to determine the deformations and
stresses over time. The time course simulation is also called time history.
The resolution is carried out by applying a temporal integration operators based on the fi
nite difference method to a transformation, by a projection on a subspace of the initial dis
cretization space, of the dynamic system modeled initially.
The numerical time integration implemented in STATIK is a variant of the Newmark algo
rithm (or method, or generalized second order trapezoid rule), a one step method well
suited to conservative or weakly dissipative structures.
The prior transformation of the system by recombination of modal projections makes it
possible to resolve complex structures extremely quickly.
This method of calculation over time is also called transient analysis on a modal basis.
When the accelerograms of a past earthquake are available, the transient dynamic analysis
is particularly interesting in the context of an expertise. It is a much more delicate tool to
master to conduct earthquake-resistant design.
C 5.1 Basics
C 5.1.1 Principle of Modal Analysis

The principle of modal analysis has been previously described in detail in section C 3.1.1,
p.C-17, in the chapter dedicated to the method of response spectra.
The dynamic equilibrium formulation is written as follows:
.. .
M A(t) ) C A(t) ) K A(t) + F(t) [1]
The essential difference between the modal analysis by integration in time and the re
sponse spectrum method is that the load function F(t) is not limited to the maximum accel
eration but it reflects the variations of the acceleration throughout the earthquake simu
lated. The charging function is described using an accelerogram (seeC 5.5, p.C-44).
After transformation in the modal coordinates system, the system of equations[1] being
uncoupled into n independent scalar equations of motion (n=number of eigenvalues),
the equation for the mode i is written as follows:
.. .
Y i(t) ) 2c i w iYi(t) ) w 2i Y i(t) + F i(t) [3]
where:
ci : modal damping of mode i
wi : pulsation or circular frequency of mode i
F i(t) : modal loading function of mode i
By solving the uncoupled equations of motion for their amplitudes Y i(t) and by superpos
ing the mode shapes scaled with these amplitudes, one obtains the desired structural re
sponse.
In STATIK, these decoupled 2nd order differential equations are solved numerically by a
variant of the Newmark method, called "average acceleration", with the coeffi
cientsβ=¼etγ=½.
Literature on modal analysis:

– Raymond W. Clough, Joseph Penzien, «Dynamics of Structures», McGraw-Hill Col
lege, Boston, 1975
– Klaus-Jürgen Bathe, «Finite Element Procedures», Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs,
1996
C-36 STATIK‐8
C 5 Time History
C 5.2 Specification of a time integration analysis
It is first necessary to carry out a calculation of the eigen modes with the number of eigen
modes desired (seeC 1.2p.C-5).
In the tab sheet 'Analysis', the button shown left gives access to the „Special analyses“ dia
log. To specify a new analysis for time integration, proceed as follows:
Use this button to

create a new special
analysis
In this dialog you choose

[Time integration]
Remark:
A calculation of the eigenvalues
must be determined befo
rehand
When defining a new special resolution of type „Time integration“, the following dialog is
displayed. The same dialog appears if you select a special analysis of this type to modify the
specification.
Upper part of the dialog:
Mandatory ID. Results

will be accessible under
this name
ID of the analysis of the

eigen modes to use
Choice of different
modes to consider
(see below)
if used, these two lists must

match
STATIK‐8 C-37
C 5.2.1 Choice of eigen modes to take into account

S All the eigen modes calculated:
All the eigen modes found during the analysis specified for the eigen modes are used.
S The n most decisive modes by direction:
The eigen modes are classified for each direction according to their decreasing modal
mass, that is to say that the modal mass bringing the greatest contribution is placed first.
It is here possible to define - on the one hand for the directions of excitation X and Y, on
the other hand for the direction of vertical excitation Z - the number n of eigen modes
to be taken into account. In fact, the application calculates as if the numbers of its eigen
modes had been introduced in the last option "Selection of eigen modes to analyze".
The two digits introduced, one for the horizontal analyzes and the other for the vertical
analyzes, unequivocally determine which eigen modes can intervene in calculation.
However, it should also be noted that, for each analysis line (see below), only the direc
tions with a seismic excitation factor> 0 are taken into account.
S Effective modal masses as a percentage of the total mass:
Analogous to the previous option, the n most significant eigenvalues are used for each
direction, whereby n is determined by the program so that the sum of the effective
modal masses taken into account corresponds to at least the specified percentage of
the total masses. If the percentage cannot be reached, there is no error message. The
third table of the natural vibration analysis provides information about this percentage.
If necessary, the number of required values must be increased.
Again, only the directions with a seismic excitation factor> 0 are taken into account for
each analysis line (see below).
S List of eigenvalues:
The listed eigenvalues are used. The numbers correspond to those in the table with the
calculated natural frequencies (sorted by ascending natural frequencies).
If a eigenmode was required by the user, either by requesting a calculation with all the
modes, or by indicating this mode in the list, and if the corresponding effective modal mass
is lower than 0.0001 x the total mass of the structure, this mode will be ignored in the calcu
lation.
The list of modes actually retained for a time integration analysis is given under the 'Results'
tab in the results table.
C 5.2.2 Choice of damping

There are two options for the damping coefficient ξ.
S For all modes: the value of the damping coefficient ξ given here will be used for all the
eigen modes during time integration.
S Individual according to the list of eigenmodes: this option can only be chosen if the
user has previously defined a selection of eigen modes according to the list (seeC 5.2.1,
p.C-38). A list of damping coefficients, classified according to the eigen modes, can be
defined here. This list of damping coefficients must correspond to the list of the eigen
modes used for calculation.
C 5.2.3 Specification of the analysis

As a general rule, the analysis of a structure by time integration is done along two perpen
dicular horizontal axes, with two accelerograms of the same earthquake recorded along
two perpendicular horizontal axes, by the same seismological station, and corrected in a
similar way. To get the „X“ and „Y“ boxes checked. The angleϕ allows the axes of the analysis
to coincide with those of the recording. A detailed description is given in sectionC 5.5.5,
« Orientation of the accelerograms». p.C-47.
C-38 STATIK‐8
C 5 Time History
It is also possible to take into account an accelerogram along the vertical axis by checking
the „Z“ box.
Definition of the accelerograms in Global
the X and Y direction factor
Rotation angle for hori

zontal accelerograms Specify a fixed time t
in [s]
At least one specifica
tion of seismic excitation
must be provided.
For a simple structure, it is also possible to specify a calculation according to a single axis
of analysis, by checking only „X“ for example. However, even in this case, if the angleϕ is not
zero, the two horizontal accelerograms are coupled.
For each axis of analysis, the contribution of each mode selected for this axis is added (su
perposition) at each time t. Finally, STATIK searches for each degree of freedom the maxi
mum and minimum values obtained over time.
If an analysis at a particular time t has been requested, the results corresponding to this
time are also available.
C 5.3 Calculation of extreme values

The decoupled displacement equations [3] of the structure are the starting point of the cal
culation. For each axis of analysis indicated, for each mode considered, the modal load func
tion F i(t) over time corresponds to the values of the accelerogram multiplied by the corre
sponding modal participation factor:
..
F i(t) + G i a(t)
where:
..
a(t) : seismic acceleration of the soil acting on the structure
Gi : modal participation factor for the ith eigenvalue
The modal participation factors are defined as follows:
G i + fTiF 0 + f TiM e
with:
fi : vector of the ith clean form
..
F0 : vector of the masses of the structure on which the seismic acceleration a(t) acts
M : global mass matrix
e : vector for excitation direction
eg. for direction X: e + Ǌ ǋ, for direction Y: e + Ǌ ǋ

1
0
0.
.
0
1
0.
.
If a particular damping i is defined for each mode, the corresponding value is taken into
account during time integration.
Superposition of maximum modal contributions

Since the maximum amplitudes of the individual natural vibrations probably do not occur
simultaneously during an earthquake, the question arises of a suitable superposition of the
results from the individual eigenmodes Ai,max to a maximum result that can be used for the
design.
STATIK‐8 C-39
In principle, the eigenmodes cannot be superposed directly, but only the scalar result com
ponents determined from them. Such result components are, for example, displacement,
section force or reaction components.
The following designations apply to the representation of the superposition methods de
scribed below:
E: denotes the value of the action effect of interest, e.g. normal force at a point in the
structure.
E i: the value of E due to the ith eigen mode A i,max
E max: the maximum value of E following all n eigen modes taken into consideration (with
out sign!)
Addition of values
ȍ E
n
E max + i
i+1
Combination of the effects of several excitations

A time integration analysis can be carried out with one or more excitation directions. The
question of how to combine these calculations is discussed below.
Combinaison des excitations dans les directions X, Y, et éventuellement Z

The effects of the excitation directions X, Y and Z are noted E Ex, E Ey, E Ez. The following
method is used for the combination of these effects:
E Emax + EEx ) EEy ) EEz
Combination of excitations in any given directions

In these cases, we will consider the extreme values of the action effects E Ei consecutive to
the directions of excitations considered as being the determining effects:
E Emax + Max(EE1, E E2, AAA)
Design envelopes
The dimensioning is usually done for the extreme values of the components of the internal
forces, in combination with the concomitant values of the other components of the internal
forces.
The sums in the expressions below are done each time for the n eigen modes considered.
C 5.4 Results of a time integration analysis

After the specification of a time integration analysis as described in the previous paragraph,
the results tree before the calculation looks like this in the tab sheet 'Results':
Question mark indicates that ei

genvalue calculation has not yet
been solved
Only part of the results are directly

accessible
C-40 STATIK‐8
C 5 Time History
If the analysis has the identifier „TH1“, then the following branches appear in the results
tree:
S «TH1-Table» :summary table of modes considered
S «TH1 Min» :minimum values (displacements, reactions, section forces)
S «TH1 Max» :maximum values (displacements, reactions, section forces)
S «TH1 @ t [s]» :values at time t (displacements, reactions, section forces)

The calculation of the eigen modes has not yet been solved and only a part of the results
is directly available. The user can in particular request the table for analysis by integration
over time. This will automatically induce the calculation of the eigen modes. The table looks
like this:
After resolution, the graphs of the modal displacements for the modes taken into account
are available and the tree of results is presented as follows:
The calculation of eigenvalues has been

solved
Minimum values (disp., reaction, section forces)

Maximum values (disp., reaction, section forces)
Values at time t (disp., reaction, section forces)
Modal displacement graphs are now also

available
For the modal displacement graphs, each branch of the tree structure first indicates the
analysis orientation (X, Y or Z), then the mode and its frequency. For each orientation of
analysis, the modes are ordered according to their effective modal mass.
STATIK‐8 C-41
C 5.4.1 Use of results
Direct use
For each analysis by integration over time, the user has as direct results minimum values,
maximum values and, if explicitly required, values at the time of
S displacements
S reactions
S section forces
in each cut of results, respectively in each support of the structure.
In addition, for each direction of analysis, the user has as direct results of the graphs in time
of the modal displacements for all the modes taken into consideration.
Use in envelope specifications

The internal displacements, reactions and forces of a time integration analysis can also be
treated with the results of other actions to create envelopes.
C-42 STATIK‐8
C 5 Time History
To specify such an envelope, it is possible to proceed as follows:

1. In the tab sheet 'Loads', create a user-defined action called 'Earthquake' and of the type
'accidental':
2. In the tab sheet 'Analysis', create a user-defined limit state specification for an 'acci
dental' design situation:
3. Activate the line 'Earthquake':
4. With a double click on the action line 'Earthquake' the dialog for the specification of the
action appears:
The results of the time integration analysis are displayed in the list of loads under the
name of the analysis (here „TH1“) with the suffix „_Extr“. Add this to the specification
with the button .
STATIK‐8 C-43
For the time integration analysis, the results are automatically taken into account with
a positive and negative sign.
Close the dialog with [OK].
5. Create the action combination by klicking the button shown below.
Use in reinforced concrete design

The results of the time integration analysis can also be used for the dimensioning and verifi
cation of reinforced concrete cross sections. For more information, consult Part D
„R.C. Analyses” of this manual.
C 5.5 Accelerograms
Choosing an accelerogram is a crucial step for this type of calculation. To design a structure,
you need at least three to five accelerograms, which have similar characteristics with regard
to the expected earthquake, where the structure is to be built.
C 5.5.1 The dialog for accelerograms

Pressing the adjacent button opens the 'Accelerograms' dialog:
create new accelerogram
edit the accelerogram from the list
delete the accelerogram from the list
Graphics of the accelerogram
import accelerogram
choosing an accelerogram
from the STATIK collection
In this dialog the list of all accelerograms of the calculation is managed. It is therefore empty
for a new calculation.
Accelerograms from the supplied STATIK collection can also be added to the list.
C-44 STATIK‐8
C 5 Time History
C 5.5.2 Selection of an accelerogram from the collection of STATIK
Sources de la collection STATIK

STATIK has a small collection of supplied accelerograms, which come from the so-called 'En
gineering Strong-Motion (ESM) database, a collection which contains data from 'European
Strong-Motion Database' (FP5 1998-2002), 'ITalian ACcelerometric Archive' (ITACA),
'Strong Ground Motion Database of Turkiye' and 'HEllenic Accelerogram Database' (HEAD).
The ESM is compatible with the 'European Integrated Data Archive' (EIDA), thus fulfilling
the international quality standards.
Add an accelerogram from the collection

To add an accelerogram from the collection to the calculation, proceed as follows:
With the adjacent button to open the "New Accelerogram" dialog and select one of the ex
isting ones. Then press [OK].
C 5.5.3 Specify a user-defined accelerogram

There are countless sources of seismic records that you can use for your time integration
analysis. These are stored in non-standardized data formats, which is why you must first
convert them to STATIK's own format.
Each STATIK accelerogram is stored in a text file with the extension ".ACC" and a simple data
format specific to STATIK. These text files can be entered directly in STATIK.
Pressing the adjacent button opens the "Enter / modify accelerogram" dialog:
STATIK‐8 C-45
With the adjacent button an already defined accelerogram can be edited.
You can also generate an accelerogram file with external programs and import it into
STATIK, provided you adhere to the correct data format of the ".ACC" files (see next section).
To read an external ".ACC" file, click the button shown left.
Syntax of an accelerogram file („.ACC“)

An accelerogram file for STATIK is a line-based text file in which all keywords begin with the
„#“ character. Only one keyword is allowed per line, which must always be at the very begin
ning (without spaces). The keywords may only be used in the order below. Comment lines
begin with „##“ and are only allowed before and between keyword lines. No comment is
allowed after the last keyword line.
In the title and subtitle, spaces and tab characters are replaced by „_“ or omitted entirely.
Keywords
«##» : comment lines (free text, is ignored in the calculation)
«#VERSION» : current version number
«#TITLE» : title, which appears in the result output
«#SUBTITLE» : subtitle, which appears in the result output
«#TIMESTEP»: the time step in [s] must be less than 1.0
«#FACTOR» : Factor to convert the values listed below to STATIK unit [m/s2]
«#VALUES» : Acceleration values: Each number separated by spaces or a new line cor
responds to the value of the next time step.
Example
#VERSION 1.0
#TITLE Tolmezzo Friuli NS
#SUBTITLE May 6, 1976 Magnitude 6.4
## STATION_NAME: TOLMEZZO CENTRALE - DIGA AMBIESTA 1
## EARTHQUAKE_BACKAZIMUTH_DEGREE: 118.5
## Original file: IT.TLM1..HNN.D.19760506.200012.C.ACC.ASC
#TIMESTEP 0.00244
#FACTOR 1.0
#VALUES
-0.010
-0.004
0.003
0.009
0.016
0.029
0.035
…
C-46 STATIK‐8
C 5 Time History
C 5.5.4 Representation of accelerograms

Il est possible d'afficher et d'imprimer en une fois de un à trois accélérogrammes, ceci soit
afin de documenter intégralement un séisme avec les 3 enregistrements qui s'y rapportent,
soit afin de comparer deux accélérogrammes. Le gabarit d'affichage est automatiquement
sélectionné en fonction du nombre d'accélérogrammes à représenter
use the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key for multiple

selection
create print entry
With the adjacent button you can create a print entry from the graphic.
C 5.5.5 Orientation of the accelerograms

Seismic stations usually record earthquakes simultaneously in all three coordinate direc
tions: east-west, north-south and vertical.
In the accelerograms from the STATIK collection, these 3 directions are drawn according to
the ESM (and the SEED) with the following letters:
S „E“ for East-West direction
S „N“ for North-South direction
S „Z“ for vertical direction
STATIK‐8 C-47
Applied to the STATIK coordinate system, these 3 directions correspond to the X, Y and Z
axes as follows:
S X: West-East axis, referred to as „WE“
S Y: South-North axis, referred to as „SN“
S Z: vertical axis, referred to as „Up“.
To perform the time integration analysis of a structure modeled in your X, Y, Z system, you
only have to enter the rotation angleϕ in addition to the accelerograms of the directions
described. This corresponds to the deviation from the geographic axes (see figure):
Y
North
East

X
A rotation is then applied to the two accelerograms selected in the „E“ and „N“ axes to ob
tain their equivalents in the X and Y axes.
C-48 STATIK‐8
C 6 Models generated by the Building Module of CEDRUS

The building module of CEDRUS is able to generate complete STATIK models for earth
quake analyses including all the neccessary special analyses specifications. How such a
frame model is built from the slabs, walls and columns of a building is described in the ma
nuals for CEDRUS.
In this chapter the generated STATIK model is discussed in detail. It is important to fully un
derstand this model since there are many possibilities for modifying or expanding the
model, e.g. for strengthening measures.
The description follows the tabsheets of the control register and starts with the tabsheet
'Structure'.
Furthermore C 6.6 gives a description of how the forces in the connecting elements of sepa
rated buildings can be evaluated.
C 6.1 Tab sheet Structure
C 6.1.1 Subsystems
A list of very helpful subsystems is generated:
all columns
columns only bearing vertical loads
storey L1
connected systems of walls

starting at storey L1
all wall pillars

grouped wall pillars
wall pillars only bearing vertical loads
walls in X direction
skew walls
walls in Y direction
A quick 'scrolling' through the various subsystems with the arrow keys is possible with the
following setting (particularly interesting for checking the connected wall systems):
STATIK‐8 C-49
C 6.1.2 Members
Global coordinate system

STATIK's global coordinate system is identical to the one of the CEDRUS building module.
Member stiffnesses
Default values for the stiffness reduction factors are entered in the building module. These
factors can be viewed in the following tab of the member dialog and modified if necessary:
Hinges at member ends

Freely rotating column supports are generated as pin-ended column members. For that
purpose hinges for the components RY and RZ are introduced at the start (bottom) of the
members. Freely rotating wall supports are treated similarly about their weak axis. Their
members obtain hinges for the component RZ at the start.
Members for pillars that should bearing only vertical loads get hinges for the component(s)
DZ (DY) at their upper ends, i.e. no shear forces can be transmitted.
Member Orientation
The local z axis of members for ungrouped pillars (walls) always lies in their plane. This
means that My is the moment about the strong axis of such members and Vz the correspon
ding shear force .
The local y axis of members for grouped pillars with not all segments in a plane point in the
same direction as the X axis of the corresponding story slab in the CEDRUS model.
The orientation of the members can be viewed by means of this layer button.
C-50 STATIK‐8
C 6.1.3 External Stiffness Matrices
For each story with slab stiffness (see CEDRUS manual) an external stiffness matrix is gene
rated. If such matrices exist in a STATIK model the corresponding button in the tabsheet is
enabled and leads to the following dialog:
May not be switched off, otherwise The default stiffness factor set in CEDRUS-6 can
the structure is unstable be modified here (similar to the member
stiffnesses)
C 6.1.4 Nodes
The rigidity of the story membranes are modeled by means of nodal constraints. For this
purpose node objects are generated at the member ends at each story level. One arbitrary
node is the master node without any constraint properties and all the other nodes of the
same level are slave nodes connected to the master node as follows:
The master node is given the ID

'L'+story number
simplest case without slab stiffness
If you add members, which should be integrated into the rigid storey membrane and not
connect to an existing node, you have to insert the corresponding nodes and assign them
the node connection properties shown above.
C 6.2 Tab sheet 'Surfaces'
For each story level (except base level(s)) a surface is generated for introducing the loads.
The visibility of the surface layers can be controlled by their layer buttons (layer group 'Sur
faces'). Change the visibility of all surfaces over the context menu of the layer group button.
STATIK‐8 C-51
C 6.3 Tab sheet 'Loads'
C 6.3.1 Loadings
A typical load list in STATIK, as generated by CEDRUS for a four-story building, looks like this:
Meaning of items:
G: permanent loads on whole building
Q: variable loads on whole building
Q2: Q multiplied by 2. 2 may vary over/within story slabs according to the action cate
gories.
Q0: Q multiplied by 0. 0 may vary over/within story slabs according to the action cate
gories.
GQ2: G + Q2
Li-M: Surface loading of which the mass distribution for story level i will be derived
(permanent loads + 2* variable loads)
M: Mass combination of all story masses Li-M (total mass of building)
*: Mark surface loadings
>: For such loadings CEDRUS did not export loads but section forces. They are treated
like normal loadings except that only section forces are available as results since they
are not solved in STATIK.
?: Mark empty loadings. LFA loadings are empty as long as no results have been
requested for them.
See chap. C 4.3.1 for details.
C-52 STATIK‐8
C 6.3.2 Loadings in torsion

In addition to the lateral force loadings torsional loadings are generated as prescribed by
the codes accounting for
1) the torsional amplification due to effective eccentricities e of the centers of mass
(first term in ekorr below) and
2) the accidental eccentricities of the centers of mass (second term in ekorr below).
The torsional moment MZ,i at story level i results from the eccentricity ekorr,i of the lateral
force FL,i and is therefore
MZ,i = ekorr,i * FL,i
ekorr = ± (0.5e + 0.05b) can vary from storey to storey.
e = eccentricity of the center of mass with respect to the center of stiffness for story i
b = width of building perpendicular to load direction for story i
Loads applied in the center of mass

In the SIA you will find 'ed,sup = 1.5e + 0.05b'. Since 1.0*e is implicitly included in the 3D
model of STATIK we only have to calculate with 0.5e in the formula for ekorr.
Eccentricities calculated for each storey

The eccentricities e are the distances between the centers of mass (calculated in STATIK)
and the centers of stiffness (calculated in the building module of CEDRUS).
The centers of mass can be viewed in the graphical output of the mass combination 'M'
(Loads tabsheet) or in the tabular output of the mass distributions of the stories.
The centers of stiffness calculated by CEDRUS are transmitted to the STATIK model in the
title of the mass distributions of the stories:
The substring SZ = 6.4/8.75 of the title string defines the center of stiffness of the corre
sponding story (X = 6.4 and Y = 8.75, values in [m]). This text may be changed by the user.
Be sure to use the same syntax!
The story widths b may also be overwritten. It is done in the title string of the story mass
distributions where you also find the centers of mass. Append after a space the text B=bx/
by (example B = 6.25 / 9.98). bx is the story width used for a loading in X direction, i.e. mea
sured in Y direction.
The second output table of a lateral force analysis shows all the values used for the torsional
loadings:
STATIK‐8 C-53
Generated loadings
The torsional loadings for an LFA are called xxx%TEX and xxx%TEY (xxx=name of the LFA).
They contain for each story a moment MiZ = Fdi ei,korr about the global Z axis.
For RSAs the torsional effects for the accidental eccentricities of the centers of mass are also
accounted for by introducing torsional loadings similar to those for LFAs with the difference
that only the second term of ekorr is to be considered. The created loadings are named
xxx%TAX and xxx%TAY. The effects of xxx%TAX for example are to be combined with the
effects of an RSA in X direction.
These loadings appear in the result tree in a sub branch of 'Loadings linear, 1st order' as fol
lows ('Erk' is the ID of the LFA):
C 6.3.3 Actions
A typical list of the generated actions with their factors looks like this:
The special -values of the actions Q0, Q2 and Q are used for the automatically generated
limit state specifications (see chap. C 6.4.2) and consider the fact that for the loadings Q0
and Q2 the -values are already included.
The actions of type accidental are also introduced for a correct generation of the limit state
specifications.
C-54 STATIK‐8
C 6.4 Tab sheet 'Calculatios'
C 6.4.1 Special Analyses

The following special analyses are automatically generated:
These special analysis specifications are precisely matched and may not be modified arbi
trarily, especially not their names. If necessary new specifications may be added.
Dyn: Dynamic Eigenvalue Analysis
If necessary the requested number of

eigenvalues has to be increased
STATIK‐8 C-55
Erk: Lateral Force Analysis (LFA)
Changes if need be in this area

see chap. C 4.2
Aws: Response Spectrum Analysis (RSA)
normally no changes needed

see chap. C 3.2
C-56 STATIK‐8
FgErk_P: FAGUS RC Analysis for LFA Results

For the dimensioning of the reinforcement for the pillars (conventional, i.e. no capacity
design).

see chap. C 3.2
For frame models there is an additional specification 'FgErk_B' for the reinforcement design
in the beams.
FgAws_P:FAGUS RC Analysis for RSA Results

This means that the reinforcement is dimensioned in the wall pillars (classic, i.e. no capacity
dimensioning).

see chap. C 3.2
With frame models there is a separate specification 'FgAws_B' for the dimensioning of the
reinforcement in the beams.
STATIK‐8 C-57
C 6.4.2 Limit state specification for the ultimate limit state

The following limit state specifications are generated automatically:
!ULS: for the standard design situation (without earthquake)

This specification is generated automatically by STATIK, regardless of whether the structure
was generated by the building module. It is of no interest here.
!EE!Erk: for LFA results
Action specification
for the LFA action
EE!Erk 1.0, because 2 already inclu
ded in loadings
Lateral force X
positive
Associated torsional
loading positive
In the action „EE!Erk” the lateral force loadings in the X- and Y-directions are combined with
the corresponding torsional loadings (see page C-34) in all 8 possible sign combinations.
C-58 STATIK‐8
!EA!Erk: for RSA Results
Action specification
for the RSA action 1.0, because 2 already inclu
EA!Erk ded in loadings
Torsional loading for ex

citation in X direction
Combination K2 of the
RSA Results in X and Y
direction
The influence of the random eccentricities of the mass with respect to the stiffness centers
to be taken into account according to the code
SIA 261
is introduced with the two loadings (Erk% TAX and Erk% TAY, see page C-54), which are de
rived from the forces of the LFA. These are alternatively examined with both signs in the
limit states superposition.
STATIK‐8 C-59
C 6.4.3 Limit State Specification for the Serviceability Limit State

Such a specification must be input by hand. The following figure is valid for RSAs. For LFAs
the action line EE!Erk must be activated instead of EA!Erk (column 'act') :
2 3
C 6.4.4 Input of Spectra

The spectra defined in the building module are transferred to the STATIK model.
C 6.5 Tab sheet 'Results'
A typical result tree may look as follows:
The results of the LFA are found in the branch 'Lateral force calculation'. The corresponding
loadings, however, are located in the branch 'Loadings linear, 1st order'.
C-60 STATIK‐8
C 6.5.1 Displacement Results

The displacements are calculated using the same design spectrum as, for example, for sec
tion forces. This spectrum includes (i.e. is divided by) a behaviour factor q which has no in
fluence on the displacements (approximately). That's why the displacement results have to
be multiplied by q (see e.g. SIA 261, 16.5.5.1 or other codes). This is done automatically for
all displacement results coming from RSAs or LFAs, also if they are used in limit state specifi
cations.
C 6.5.2 Acceleration Results

What is said above about displacement results also holds for acceleration results, i.e. the
results are multiplied by q.
The inertia force Fi (i = local or global coordinate direction) on a non loadbearing building
part of the mass m can be evaluated using the acceleration result ai of a nearby wall. Ac
cording to SIA261,16.7 the inertia forces are evaluated as follows:
Fi = ai * m / qa (qa according code).
C 6.6 Connecting Elements between Separated Buildings
If separated buildings or story slabs are to be connected by bar-like elements one is interes
ted in the forces acting in these connecting elements due to an earthquake. The following
solution is suggested:
1) In the CEDRUS building model the separated slabs are input as independent slabs at the
same level. Example:
Story slab Li Story slab Lk In the generated STATIK model

there will be two independent sys
tems of nodes. There are no rigid
connections between the two sys
tems as there are between the
nodes of each system.
2) The planned connecting elements are introduced as short members at the desired loca
tion and each of their ends is eccentrically (=rigid) connected to a nearby node of the
respective „slab“:
Input line of connecting member
B
A an existing node nearby
(distance not important)
C D
eccentric connection from node B to
end of member D
connecting member (short piece

of about 0.2m)
eccentric connections in member dialog: Suggested procedure:

(1) draw an auxiliary line from C to D
in the user layer (2) open the member
(4) dialog and create the connecting
member between A and B (3) select
the member leaving the dialog open
and open its eccentricity tabsheet (4)
switch to 'in global coordinates ' (5)
click on arrow button for member start
and then click on point A then B (6)
do the same for member end (7) [Ap
(5) (6) ply]
STATIK‐8 C-61
3) Make sure to transfer only the desired section force components by introducing the re
spective hinge components at the member ends.
Examples:
- normal force only: truss member
- shear force only: check all hinge components except DY at one end of the member:
specification of hinges in
member dialog
The section forces in the connecting members can now be evaluated using LFA or RSA.
In this way relatively quickly several remedial measures can be studied without the STATIK
model must be regenerated in CEDRUS.
C 6.7 MURUS-P - Earthquake verification for masonry buildings
The MURUS-P module, specially developed for Swiss conditions, is available for earthquake
verification of masonry buildings.
Via the main menu „Help“ > „STATIK“ > „MURUS-P: Masonry Building“ you will find a de
tailed description of MURUS-P.
C-62 STATIK‐8
D 1 Overview
Vol. D R.C. Analyses

STATIK-8
D 1 Overview
The Reinforced Concrete (R.C.) Analysis Module in STATIK permits an automatic execution
of design and analysis tasks on R.C. cross sections for the limit state values of the section
forces determined in STATIK.
The analyses are carried out in the modules of the program FAGUS. For questions relating
to FAGUS analyses the user is referred to the manual for that program.
D 1.1 Sequence of an R.C. Analysis

An R.C. analysis involves the following steps:
1) Check the requirements for a reinforced concrete analysis listed in the chapter D 1.2.
2) Set up the analysis tasks as a special calculation in the 'Calculation' tab (described in
Chapter D 2)
3) Carrying out the analysis (Chapter D 3) and viewing the available results in the 'Results'
tab (Chapter D 4).
D 1.2 Prerequisites for an R.C. Analysis

Before a reinforced concrete analysis can be defined and executed in STATIK, the following
prerequisites must be fulfilled:
Required Licence
The user must have a licence of 'FAGUS, Analyses' for the user/system number with which
he is running STATIK.
Preparation of the data
Limit State Specifications

The section forces used for the analyses are provided by the limit state values, for which a
specification has to be available. If there are several analysis tasks, in some circumstances
several different limit state specifications are needed. On limit state specifications see Ch.
B 12.6 as well as page A‐60 of this manual.
Analysis Parameters
For an analysis FAGUS requires a set of so-called analysis parameters. The sets of analysis
parameters available in FAGUS are identified by names and can be selected in the specifica
tion of analysis tasks. They are managed in the menu 'Settings > Analysis parameters' and
described in a separate manual, which is accessible in the menu „Help“ > „Materials and
Analysis parameters“.
Cross Sections with Reinforcement

The members to be analysed have to consist of R.C. cross sections with reinforcement. One
may use parametrized cross sections or cross sections explicitly input in FAGUS.
STATIK-8 D-1
Result Points in the Cross Sections for Additional Results
The R.C. analyses produce a standard set of results, which should be sufficient in simple
cases. By introducing result points in the cross sections (in FAGUS) additional results, e.g.
the stiffnesses of the cross sections, are made available. The result points are described in
the FAGUS manual.
Definition of Design Sections
You have to specify beforehand, in which sections the analyses are to be carried out. Here
one cannot use the quick section specification normally used for the output of section
forces (a button in the tabsheet 'Results') but a so-called design section specification has
to be given, which is defined in the member attributes. For this purpose there is the tabs
heet in the 'Member' dialog shown below:
Besides generated sections (in n sections per member element or in regular intervals) indi
vidual sections can also be introduced in various positions. In the case of negative values
the distances are measured from the end of the member.
Buttons for Fans
In sections denoted by „fan”, no longitudinal reinforcement components due to shear and

torsion are added. They are only possible at the ends of the members and their introduction
is meaningful only at supports (except end supports). Therefore, in the case of continuous
beams, from support to support individual members have to be input, in order to be able
to specify the fan sections as desired. More on fans will be found below in the description
of the dimensioning.
Input Field for Reinforcement Groups
In this input field the reinforcement that has to be used in the analysis is defined. If the field
is empty, the reinforcement defined in the cross section (variant) is used.
If the file is not empty, the reinforcement over the whole member is defined by a series of
reinforcement groups each valid within a given zone of the member. The input consists of
one or more group positions, separated by ';'.
A group position consists of the group name and an optional pair of distance values. Wi
thout distances the group is active along the whole member otherwise within the given
range. Distance values can be input as follows:
number: distance from start of member or from end of member if negative
%-value: with respect to the length of the member
'<', '>': start and end of member
D-2 STATIK-8
D 2 Specifying an R.C. Analysis
Example: UB ; OB < 25% ; OB 75% >

UB: the group UB is active along the whole member
OB < 25%: the group OB begins at the start of the member and ends at ¼ of the
member length
OB 75% >: the group OB starts again at ¾ of the member and ends at the
end of the member
group OB
group UB
L/4 L/4
member length L

Specifications for R.C. analysis tasks are defined and managed in the tabsheet 'Analysis' us
ing the button 'Special Analyses':
1 Button for a new special

analysis
(other buttons to
- modify,
- duplicate or
- delete
a selected analysis line)
select RC Analysis in the dialog

with all special analyses
3
STATIK-8 D-3
If you have just defined a new special calculation 'reinforced concrete analyzes' or called up
an existing one for modification, the dialog shown below is displayed:
ID of RC analysis (later found in

result tree)
A new analysis task is defined by

activating a checkbox in this co
lumn
Limit state specifications to be used

for the analysis task
The section force components for

which the limit states are to be cal
culated and used Analysis parameter set to be used
(see manual 'Materials and Analysis
Parameters)
Special input for prestressing

(see below, not shown here for 2D
structures)
Field for special parameters The analysis can be executed
(see later) for all members or for a sub
system
Input for Prestressed Structures

The IDs of prestressing loadings are marked by a '@'-character and are composed as fol
lows: tendon group ID + '@' + no. of construction stage, e.g. V1@0.
If a selected limit state specification contains prestressing loadings, the structure is
considered as prestressed and all tendons of the tendon groups of these loadings are
considered in the analysis. All these tendons are introduced in the cross section of each
design section with their correct position and initial strain. The initial strain is the difference
in strain between a tendon and its neighboring concrete fiber (see below concerning G1).
It is due to the prestressing force and the strain in the neighboring concrete fibre at the end
of the prestressing process (called decompression strain).
The secondary effects can be influenced by the combination factor for the action prestres
sing in the limit state specification. However, this factor has no influence on the initial
strains in the tendons.
The program needs the following two loadings to evaluate the decompression strains and
the long-term losses:
Loading at the end of the Additional loading for

prestressing process evaluating the long-term
(decisive for decom losses
pression strains)
D-4 STATIK-8
Evaluating the decompression strains in the tendons

The starting point for the FAGUS calculation is the prestressing steel strain å p at the strain-
free cross-section (εx, κy, κz = 0) at point x along the beam. (Marked with DE0 in the drawing
below).
When entering the tendons, however, the tensioning processes on the prestressing jacks
/ cable ends are described. To determine the strain å p, certain assumptions have to be
made:
Då P(x)
DE0 å p + åo ) Då åo +
DE1
A p @ Ep
P After tensioning, the cross-section is generally already deformed (strain level DE1) and a
small (decompression) correction Då must be introduced in order to be able to determine
the FAGUS starting size å p requested above. In STATIK, this is calculated from the prestres
sing load case and the G1 load in each section.
Additional explanations for Då: When tensioning in the prestressing bed, the strains
would be identical to the strains due to tensioning the tendons å o. When tensioning with
a subsequent bond, on the other hand, stretching occurs in the cross sections, which e.g.
depend on the rigidity of the framework. In order to obtain the correct strains in the tend
ons on the unstretched cross section, these strains must therefore be reversed by calcu
lation. The strains generated during the prestressing process are determined on the basis
of the estimated load which acts on the structure at the end of the prestressing process.
This load normally includes the prestressing (part a), which is automatically taken into ac
count by the program and cannot be entered in „G1“ and the following parts to be recorded
in „G1“:
b) the dead weight of the structure
c) the forces exerted by the scaffolding.
Example 1: A simple beam on a very stiff scaffolding will lift off from the falsework after
being prestressed. It will be loaded by parts a) and b).
Example 2: A simple beam on a very soft scaffolding will still be continuously supported
by the falsework after being prestressed. If will be loaded by part a) only, since b) and c) neu
tralize each other. Thus 'no loads' should be selected for G1.
The reality lies somewhere in between, i.e. one will use a loading for G1 containing just a
part of the self weight.
. Explanations on this topic can also be found in the FAGUS manual.
Long-term losses
It is assumed that the effects from the loadings 'prestressing' + 'G1' + 'G2' are relevant for
long-term losses. Thus a corresponding loading must be defined and selected for G2.
Following a calculation, corresponding values can be found in the numerical outputs for
each tendon and for each section.
Restraining forces
With the combination factor for the action „prestressing“ in the selected limit value specifi
cation, the constraint stress can be influenced. However, it has no influence on the pre-
strains.
STATIK-8 D-5
D 3 Analysis Tasks
As may be seen from the dialogue above, there are three different types of analysis tasks:
reinforcement dimensioning, stress and ultimate load analyses. They are explained in more
detail in the following chapters. See also the FAGUS manual for more details.
D 3.1 Reinforcement Design

Here the longitudinal reinforcement in the cross sections as well as the shear reinforcement
are dimensioned. Several dimensioning tasks can be defined, each of which has its specific
limit state specification and analysis parameters. The program proceeds as follows:
S It begins with the first dimensioning task. The determined reinforcement acts as default
for any subsequent design tasks, which may increase individual reinforcement areas as
required, but never decrease any of them.
S Within a dimensioning task the dimensioning is carried out in all design sections and for
all requested actions (= envelope results).
. In the FAGUS check mode (see chap. D 4.2) the dimensioning can be carried out for one sin
gle section force line (without inheriting results from previous tasks or section forces).
The actions for a dimensioning task are defined by the limit state specification set in the
above dialog with the section force components, for which the limit values should be eva
luated. If, e.g. My is requested, the two section force combinations My‐min with the corre
sponding components and My‐max with the corresponding components are investigated.
The section force combinations investigated by the program can be controlled section by
section (see chap. D 4.2).
The results from the dimensioning analyses always represent the final result from all re
quested dimensioning tasks. The headings of the table for the standard result output
looks as follows:
Concentrating the reinforcement in the bottom and top positions (“flanges”) is useful in
many cases (continuous beam, typical beam in frame systems) and therefore respresents
the standard output. Analogous for the upper and lower reinforcement the following col
umns are output:
As (M,N): reinforcement only for bending and if present a normal force
As (M,N,V): As(M,N) plus additional areas due to shear (and torsion);
(more on this in the next sub-chapter)
x/h: max. ratio of the height of concrete compression zone to effective statical
height
In the last column with Asw1 the required vertical stirrup reinforcement is output, if the
cross sections used have such a result point.
In the case of complicated cross sections it is usually necessary to have a specific output of
individual results using result points and result combinations (see FAGUS Manual). In the
column “Asw1” in the above table, for example, such a result point is set. Corresponding to
the identifier“Asw1” there exists for most parameterized cross sections with reinforcement
a result combination giving the required stirrups area in the z‐direction. If a result point
with this name is introduced with user-defined cross sections, its result value appears in the
last column of the above standard table.
. At the beginning of an R.C. analysis the program checks the initial cross section of the first
member. If result points are defined there, additional tables with the result points found are
created and the corresponding table headings are written. Therefore, this first cross section
determines the amount of results. All subsequent cross sections also deliver corresponding
results, if they have analogous result points with the same name.
D-6 STATIK-8
D 3 Analysis Tasks
Additional Longitudinal Reinforcement due to Shear/Torsion

For a more detailed description see chap. „B 9 Shear and Torsion Models for Reinforced Con
crete” in the FAGUS manual.
FAGUS executes its analyses exclusively section by section and takes no account of section
force distributions along the member and also cannot handle the introduction of forces. In
order nevertheless to be able to create in the desired way the results shown in the figure
below in the vicinity of the supports, support sections have to be identified by the attribute
„Fan”. This, as described above, has to be done in the 'Attributes' dialog of the members.
A B
Fächer
Bewehrung für N, M, V, T
Bewehrung für N, M
In 'Fan' sections, therefore, no longitudinal reinforcement due to shear and torsion is added
and the curve of the total required longitudinal reinforcement remains constant until it in
tersects the “shifted line” (see figure).
D 3.2 Stress Analysis

By stress analysis FAGUS understands the calculation of strains and thereby also stresses in
the cross section with given reinforcement due to the action of a section force. Several
stress analyses can be defined, each of which has its own specific actions and analysis pa
rameters.
Actions: Analogous to the dimensioning tasks, an action is specified for each stress analysis
by means of a limit state specification and the section force components, for which the limit
values should be evaluated. For a section force component the stress analysis is carried out
both for the minimum and the maximum value and for the other corresponding section
force components.
Analysis parameters: For each stress analysis task a specific analysis parameter set must
be selected.
Reinforcement: It is assumed in the cross sections as follows:
S If an R.C. analysis includes no dimensioning tasks (these always come first), the rein
forcement is used as defined in the cross section or in the section specification of the
member respectively.
S If there are dimensioning tasks specified in the R.C. analysis, the reinforcement found by
these tasks (see above) is used (without contributions due to shear/torsion).
Results: Results from stress analyses are limit values. On the one hand, a series of section
force combinations are analyzed for each analysis task and, on the other, more than one
analysis task may be specified.
The results of stress analyses always represent the final results from all requested stress
analysis tasks. The table heading for the standard output results looks as follows:
The stress analysis must be activated in „special calculations"
STATIK-8 D-7
Here too „top” and „bottom” only makes sense in simple cases (uniaxial bending, simple
symmetrical cross sections). Besides these standard results, by means of result points, cross
section results and result combinations (see FAGUS‐6), further results can be obtained.
. At the beginning of an R.C. analysis the program checks the initial cross section of the first
member. If result points are defined there, additional tables with the result points found are
created and the corresponding table headings are written. This first cross section deter
mines therefore the amount of results. All subsequent cross sections also deliver corre
sponding results, if they have analogous result points with the same names.
. In the FAGUS check mode (see chap. D 4.2) the stress analysis can be carried out for one sin
gle section force line (without inheriting results from previous tasks or section forces).
D 3.3 Bearing Capacity / Efficiency Analyses

These analyses deliver, for each section, the minimum ultimate load factor (and the maxi
mum efficiency factor, respectively) from all section force combinations and several ulti
mate load analyses tasks, if present. One can thus define several ultimate load analysis
tasks, each with its own actions and analysis parameters.
The reinforcement, as for stress analyses, is that used in previous dimensioning tasks. If no
dimensioning has been specified, the existing reinforcement in the cross sections is used.
. In the FAGUS check mode (see chap. D 4.2) the ultimate load analysis can be carried out for
one single section force line (without inheriting results from previous tasks or section
forces).
As with the stress analysis, reinforcement is used from any previous design tasks. If no
design is specified, the existing or. reinforcement specified in the member design sections.
The use of reinforcement from upstream design tasks usually makes little sense.
D 3.4 General Remarks
D 3.4.1 Members with variable Cross Sections

In the case of members with different cross sections at their start and end points the cross
sectional geometry within the member is interpolated linearly. For this to be possible the
cross sections must match with respect to
S cross section type
S number of points on boundary and input sequence
S number of reinforcement positions and input sequence.
For two cross sections to match in this way, it is best to make a copy of the one and to modify
it accordingly. As materials always those of the member cross section at the start are used.
D 3.4.2 Additional Parameters

Besides the analysis parameters, which are selectable for each analysis task and are ad
ministrated in the menu „Settings“ > „Analysis parameters“ there are some further parame
ters, which are input as a list in the form
param1=value1; param2=value2 ; ...
in the specification dialog.
In the current program version the following parameters are supported:
S BENDING=UNIAX
The whole structure is analysed for simple bending, i.e. equilibrium is only fulfilled
about the neutral axis constrained in the direction of the y'‐axis, but not however for that
about the z'‐axis.
D-8 STATIK-8
D 3 Analysis Tasks
BENDING=BIAX
The whole structure is analysed for biaxial bending (default)
BENDING=COL+,BEAM-
Different treatment of column and beam cross sections (+/-). With the above setting all
columns (COL+) are analyzed with biaxial bending and the beam cross sections (BEAM-)
are analysed for simple bending. Column or beam is a property of the cross section.
S FORCES=N+,VY-,VZ-,MX-,MY+,MZ+
Section force components marked by “-” are set to zero.
S PREFAC=0.0 (for prestressing, default=1.0)
The automatically evaluated decompression strain (see page D-4) is multiplied by this
factor (e.g. 0.0 for prestressing bed procedure)
The check boxex 'Pillar design' and 'Uniaxial design for walls' are only enabled for structures
generated by the building module of CEDRUS (see there).
D 3.4.3 Documentation of the Specification

Before printing the R.C. analyses results, it is advisable to have a print out of the complete
analysis specification, since the different analyses are partly dependent on one another.
Use this button in the specification dialog to create a tabular output with the details of the
analysis specification. The output form has a print entry button.
D 3.4.4 Further Important Hints

For a successful execution of R.C. analyses the following points have to be observed:
S Cross sections that are primarily subjected to normal force should be input as columns
(cross section property). As a consequence all reinforcement bars are increased uni
formly (no tensile edge as with beams).
S For cross sections with biaxial bending suitable reinforcement to resist bending about
the z‐axis also has to be provided. Arranging 'layers' of reinforcement at the bottom and
top edges of the cross section is usually inadequate.
S Combining reinforcing areas using result points:
Unless otherwise specified the summed up reinforcement areas for the bottom and top
edges of a cross section are output. This makes sense in the common case of beam di
mensioning. In other situations more detailed results may be needed. In FAGUS‐6 you
can combine individual reinforcement positions with the help of a result combination
point.
S Be sure to have a meaningful and compatible choice of names among the different cross
sections for any result point that is introduced. If, over parts of a structure, there are cross
sections with result points having the same name, STATIK‐6 can create a figure from the
corresponding results. This of course is only meaningful if the results represent the
same quantity everywhere.
STATIK-8 D-9
D 4 Result Output
D 4.1 Settings in the tabsheet 'Results'
In the result tree (first list field of the result register), in addition to the linearly calculated
loads, the load combinations and limit values, the special calculations that were defined in
the calculation register and are available for the results are also listed. This also includes the
reinforced concrete analyzes:
Choice of desired
Reinforced concrete analysis
specification
In the second list field the requested analysis type and the individual section checks, re
spectively, are selected.
[1] [2]
dimensioning
stress analysis
numerical
ultimate load analysis output
graphical
individual section check output
The choice of an analysis type is only necessary for the graphical output. In the case of a nu
merical output all available results are output and the setting for the analysis type has no
effect. A special case is given by the setting “Check (FAGUS)”, to which we will return in the
next chapter.
The lines “Supplement” in figure [2] stand for supplementary results for the individual anal
ysis types. They are only available after a previous analysis with the setting from figure [1],
since it is only then known which supplementary results are available.
If the setting is for a graphical output, a choice of the available result quantities correspond
ing to the analysis type is presented. For a numerical output this choice is not necessary,
since all results are always created.
dimensioning
stress analysis
ultimate load analysis
supplementary results
In the case of supplementary results a list field with all available result quantities is dis
played.
D-10 STATIK-8
D 4 Result Output
As is usual in the 'Results' tabsheet, the analysis corresponding to the settings is started us
ing the execution button, whereby beforehand certain settings, like the scale factor, label
type, etc., can be made using the 'Attributes' button.
The print entries are made in the usual way both for tabulated and graphical results.
. The first time results are requested for an R.C. analysis ‐ independent of the individual set
tings in the 'Results' tabsheet ‐ all analysis tasks specified in the corresponding specification
dialog are analysed completely. These analyses can be very extensive and take up a large
amount of time. However, the results remain saved for further output of results, until other
results (not from current R.C. analysis) are requested or something is changed, which af
fects the results.
. If response specrum analysis results are included in the actions, they must be calculated
first. This is done by requesting results for these analyses.
. The graphical results are created from the tabulated results, which are themselves based
on the specification of the design sections (member property). If the sections are chosen
to be closely spaced, smoother plots are obtained, but the tables are getting longer too.
In order to reduce the tabular output to the essential sections, one can use the adjacent
button at the top of the table window, with which one can switch between full and reduced
display of results. The print entries also correspond to the selected view.
D 4.2 Checking Analysis Details

The detailed check allows a comprehensive check of the analyses carried out in FAGUS‐6
in any desired section.
With the output quantity switched to “Section Check”, select a member and then press the
execution button. The following window appears:
setting the section wit store actual cross section for

hin the selected mem individual FAGUS analyses
ber
cross section legend Limit value
result rows of
Analysis arrow to select the selected
the analysis line sho section
wing the analysis type
and the section force
combination
Results for individual
analysis line or accu
mulated from top down
to selected line
numerical results
Graphical results for

the analysis set above
Slide switch for increa

sed display
In this window, the cross-sections and the associated section forces in each section can be
viewed separately. If the member (or structural line section) has been divided into several
elements, an additional list of the existing elements appears in addition to the section
selection. The sections are designated with the ordinate with respect to the member (or the
structure line section).
With the adjacent button (next to the list box 'Section') is it possible to output a cross-sec
tion legend for the optionally interpolated cross-section.
STATIK-8 D-11
This button allows one to store the actual cross section under a selectable name for indivi
dual analyses in FAGUS. This is useful especially for interpolated cross sections and for cross
sections containig automatically introduced tendons which would otherwise not be availa
ble.
After moving the analysis arrow (see above figure), the selected analysis line is executed im
mediately and the result is presented graphically in the bottom window.
What is calculated with the section force set depends on the analysis type and the associa
ted analysis parameters as well as on the following setting in the section control dialog:
<>
Analysis type 'Design':

S cumulative: All analysis lines are calculated from the top of the list up to the line with
the analysis arrow. The required values of reinforcement may be increased by each new
analysis line but they will never decrease. The accumulated values of reinforcement are
the start values for the actual analysis line. If they are sufficient for the actual line no
results are output. Otherwise the results correspond to the ultimate limit state for the
calculated values of reinforcement.
S single line: The analysis is based on the actual analysis line only. Previous lines have no
influence.
Stress Analyses:
At first all possible defined design tasks are carried out. The resulting reinforcement is used
for subsequent analyses. Without design tasks the reinforcement defined in the cross sec
tions and possibly in the section specification of the members will be used.
S accumulative: The program analyzes all analysis lines up to the one with the arrow. The
graphical results are based on the selected line only. The tabular output, however, also
shows minimum and maximum stress values from all executed analysis lines, thus pro
viding the stress variations needed for fatigue verifications.
influence.
Analysis type 'Bearing Capacity / Efficiency':

The reinforcement is the same as for stress analyses (see above).
S accumulative: The program analyzes all analysis lines up to the one with the arrow. The
graphic results are based on the selected line only. The tabular output also shows the
minimum ultimate load factor and the maximum efficiency factor, respectively.
influence.
D-12 STATIK-8
E 1 Axis Points
Vol. E Specialities
STATIK‐8
The parts of the program covered in this volume are those included in the option “Specialit
ies” and are treated here together, although they do not have anything to do with each
other directly.
The volume treats the following chapters:
S E1 Axis Points E-1
S E2 Structure Lines E-3
S E3 Construction stages E-10
S E4 Stability Analyses E-14
S E5 Externally Bonded Reinforcement (EBR) E-17
E 1 Axis Points
E 1.1 Definition
input axis point
cross section center of gravity
Fig. E−1 Axis point in a cross section
An axis point is a special point that can be introduced into a cross section (Program FAGUS).
The input of an axis point signifies:
S in FAGUS: The section forces for FAGUS analyses refer to the axis point and not, as other
wise, to the center of gravity.
S in STATIK: The existence of an axis point in a cross section influences the position of the
cross section with reference to the member axis in STATIK. Without an axis point the
cross section lies with its center of gravity on the member's axis and with an axis point
the axis point lies on the member 's axis.
. When using axis points one must take into account that load, displacement and section
force results in STATIK are defined with respect to member axes. At first sight some results
may seem to be paradoxical, as illustrated in the following example.
STATIK‐8 E-1
Vol. E Specialities
a) cross section without b) cross section

axis point with axis point
member's
axis
System: cantilever built-in on the left

Loading: local force x distributed over whole member
Try to explain the following results:

1) Whereas for a) only horizontal displacements result, the cantilever b) also exhibits verti
cal displacements. a) and b) also have different horizontal displacements at the end of the
cantilever.
2) b) has no moment, although the member is curved.
. Section force and displacement results can be obtained either in the local coordinate sys
tem of the member (standard, local x-axis deviates from the center of gravity for cross sec
tions with axis points) or in the center of gravity system (see B 12.4.1). In the principal axis
system, the local x axis is shifted to the principal axis and the directions y, z are retained (ap
proximately in the case of haunches). The corresponding choice of the reference system is
offered if cross-sections with axis points are used in a structure.
E 1.2 Application
S If a cross section changes from one construction state to another, this can only be ac
complished by means of an axis point, so that in each construction state it lies correctly,
since the position of the member's axis remains unchanged. This is important above all
if normal forces occur, which is always the case for example with prestressed structures.
For a more detailed description see E 3.1.
S If one works with axis points, then one does not always need to adapt the geometry of
the member's axis during the dimensioning process to changes in the cross section.
E-2 STATIK‐8
E 2 Structure Lines
E 2 Structure Lines
E 2.1 What is a Structure Line?
Since beam bridges are often not straight both in plan and in vertical section, the correct
geometrical definition of the structure, loads and possibly tendons can be quite demand
ing and requires a lot of effort. In order to simplify this task substantially, structure lines
have been introduced in STATIK.
Structure lines represent an alternative to inputting a series of members and also serve as
reference lines for loads and tendons. Above all they are suitable for modelling beam
bridges, but are not restricted to these structures. As mentioned, they are an alternative to
series of member, that is, it must along a structure line usually not simultaneously still have
normal members.
In the case of a beam bridge, for example, one introduces a structure line along the carriage
way axis (or parallel to it). Normally the carriageway axis is already fixed before the struc
tural analysis and the position of the cross section and the profile of any tendons are de
fined with respect to it.
structure line as basis for

the geometrical definition
of the superstructure
structure line
points
column
(normal member)
structure line
segment
eccentric
connection to
support nodes
STATIK‐8 E-3
Vol. E Specialities
Properties of structure lines:

S In general a structure line is a curved polygon passing through a series of structure line
points. Geometrically the curve is defined by its path in the plan and side view planes.
As the plan view plane one can have an arbitrarily selected reference plane and the
side view plane is the developed elevation surface (=cylindrical surface normal to the
plan view plane through the structure line). How to input this structure line is described
later.
S With a structure line not only a reference line but at the same time a series of members
is defined automatically.
S Structure line segment denotes a portion of structure line between two structure line
points. A structure line segment is closely related to a member but with the main differ
ence that it can be curved. Otherwise it has largely the same attributes. This applies also
to cross section developing, which can be constant or linearly changing over a structure
line segment. Therefore, in places where the cross section changes a structure line point
must be introduced. This is also the case for nodes (supports), which cannot be defined
within a structure line segment.
Structure line segment ≈ curved member
Local coordinate system:
x: tangent to structure line
x
y: parallel to plan view plane z
(u,v)
z: x x y (vector product), For analysis automatic subdivision
projection of z on w with y in straight member elements
same direction as w (number depends on curvature)
(w = u x v)
-> influences direction of y
Plan view plane (u,v):

Property of structure line
can be defined by user
Fig. E−2 Structure line segment

S The structure line is at the same time the member axis. The member axis has here the
same meaning as in members, with the difference that they can change their direction
from point to point.
S In contrast to the standard members, structure line segments may not have any eccent
ric connections. Thus the member axis coincides with the structure line. The correct
cross section positioning is achieved by means of the axis points (see below).
S Structure line points, on the other hand, can be eccentrically connected to nodes (see
chap. E 2.2.4).
S Structure lines cannot ‐ in contrast to members ‐ be automatically cut by other structure
lines, members or nodes, i.e. they can only be connected to other parts of the structure
in their structure line points.
Position of the cross Sections with respect to the Structure Lines

axis point
on structure line
Sfield
Scolumn
Fig. E−3 Axis-and principal points
The axis point of a cross section lies on the structure line. The axis point can be input any
where in the cross section. If none is defined then the centre of gravity is assumed to be the
axis point.
E-4 STATIK‐8
E 2 Structure Lines
In the case of structures with changing cross sections it is always necessary to work with
explicitly input axis points, since otherwise the axes of the centre of gravity would lie on the
structure line and thus the carriageway would exhibit discontinuities (kinks and jumps).
This method of positioning the cross section has the advantage that in the case of cross sec
tional changes no changes in the structure input are necessary, providing that the position
of the axis point with respect to the carriageway axis is not changed.
. For a correct modeling of a structure attention should be paid to the location of the sup
ports (i.e. the nodes). Note the possibility of eccentrically connected structure line points
(see chap. E 2.2.4).
. Member and center of gravity axes do not coincide when working with axis points. Section
force and displacement results can be obtained related to both axis systems.
E 2.2 Input of a structure line
To input structure lines one uses the button shown on the left in the structure tab sheet. It
calls the following dialog:
Each structure line has its own unique identifier (ID) and as a plan view plane an existing or
a newly definable working plane can be selected. The geometrical definition of a structure
line is done separately in plan and side view.
The plan view curve is the basis of the structure line. If a new structure line is defined with
[Create], one automatically enters the input mode for the plan view curve. After leaving the
plan view input by default the side view curve is automatically defined (level everywhere
zero).
With the buttons [Plan view curve] and [Side view curve] the path of these curves can be
modified for an existing structure line at any time.
STATIK‐8 E-5
Vol. E Specialities
E 2.2.1 Input of the plan view curve

One gets to the input mode for the plan view curve either via [Create] or [Modify plan view
curve] in the dialog 'Structure Line'. In this special input mode the graphics area changes
into a 2D mode with some buttons at the upper left of this area:
switch other struc don't show side and This row at the top
ture lines invisible tangent handles boundary of the gra
phics area denotes the
input mode for the plan
view curve
graphics editor tool to input
the plan view curve
plane coordinates u,v

(plan viw plane)
The input of the curve in the plan view is done with the curve tool of the graphics editor in
a first step as for the input of a polygon, i.e. by inputting a series of points, the structure line
points. This produces a curve, which may not have the desired shape. This however can be
corrected in a second step. In inputting the points one should consider that points are to
be defined everywhere where
S other members (e.g. columns) or structure lines have to be connected
S nodes (supports) are to be introduced
S changes of cross sections are foreseen
One is reminded that structure lines are not automatically intersected by members, other
structure lines or nodes, as one is used to with members. One can if necessary introduce
further structure line points at any time. Those that are known in advance however are best
input at the beginning.
To insert new intermediate points select the curve and select 'Introduce Point' in the con
text menu .
E-6 STATIK‐8
E 2 Structure Lines
The exact path of the individual structure line segments (= parts of the curve between two
structure line points) can be determined segment-by-segment by setting the direction and
length of the end tangents. This can be done either graphically by moving the tangent
handles or numerically in the dialog of the structure line points (see figure below).
variation of the tangent variation of the tangent
tangent length in A
end direction in A
curve
section
A A
tangent
handle
α=0: u‐direction,
positive counterclock
wise
Fig. E−4 Tangentenparameter der Kurvenabschnitte und Kurvenpunkt-Dialog

The dialog allows one to work more subtly and modify independently tangent length and
direction.
Once the modification of the plan view curve has been completed, the input mode is exited
using the button [OK] in the header line.
E 2.2.2 Editing the Side View Curve

As soon as a structure line has been introduced by inputting its plan view curve, there is al
ready a default side view curve, which can be modified at any time using the button [Edit
Side View Curve] in the Structure Line dialogue.
The modify mode for the side view curve corresponds to that for the plan view curve. In
stead of the plan view plane however one works in the side view plane:
elevation area
structure
line
elevation plane as develop

trace of structure ment of the elevation area
line in plan plane
By default the side view curve consists of a straight line with points at the start and at the
end of the developed curve, both with a height of v=0. These two points can be moved in
the v‐direction. If the elevation curve is not straight, intermediate points can be introduced.
This is accomplished as with the plan view curve using its context menu with 'Introduce
Point'.
STATIK‐8 E-7
Vol. E Specialities
Otherwise the curve is modified as with the plan view curve, i.e. the points also have a curve
point dialog, in which the tangent directions and lengths can be specified.
. Any introduced intermediate points in the side view curve are not structure line points sub
dividing the structure lines into structure line segments. This function is only for the curve
points of the plan view curve.
Once the modification of the elevation curve has been completed, the input mode is exited
using the button [OK] in the header line.
E 2.2.3 Attributes of the structure line segments

After inputting the structure line curve the attributes of the structure line segments (corre
sponds to member attributes) and those of the structure line points (next chapter) still have
to be specified.
As always, if attributes have to be assigned, first the corresponding objects have to be se
lected. Then the Attributes dialog must be opened (if not already open) and adjusted, and
the new settings are applied to the selected objects with [Apply].
To select a structure line section firstly the structure line is selected. On it the symbols for
its points and segments are shown, whereby the desired segments can be selected.
If several sections have to be modified, it is easier to use the structure line segments button
shown on the left. Thereby the Attributes dialog for the segments is shown and the button
for direct selection of object points is switched on. Thus the two step selection is not neces
sary, and with <ctrl>A all segments can be selected immediately.
Selecting individual structure line segments is done by clicking on the section symbols
(and not on the line):
Section symbol
Structure line with 2 sections
The Attributes dialog corresponds to that for members, with the difference that the tab
sheets for eccentricities and orientations are missing, since the structure line sections do
not have these properties:
E 2.2.4 Attributes of Structure Line Points

To select a structure line point firstly the structure line is selected. On it the symbols for its
points and segments are shown, whereby the desired points can be selected.
E-8 STATIK‐8
E 2 Structure Lines
The dialog with the attributes of structure line points looks as follows:
It contains a possible eccentricity of the structure node connected with the structure line
point as well as settings for load generation (see page B-83).
Eccentric Connections of Structure Line Points

A structure line is normally connected at its structure line points to the 'outside world', i.e.
to support nodes or other members. These connection points can be provided with an ec
centricity:
structure line point
eccentrical
connection with
support node
The eccentricity to be specified points from the

structure line point to the node of the structure and
can also be input with the aid of the mouse
If an eccentricity has been specified for a structure line point, then nothing else can be di
rectly connected to it!
Field boundaries for load generation

The properties listed in the lower part of the dialog are required by the load generator for
road loads and are described there (page B-83).
STATIK‐8 E-9
Vol. E Specialities
E 3 Construction stages
E 3.1 Concept
If one wants to investigate a structure for different variants this can be done by successive
modification and analysis, or preferable, in general, by creating several analysis projects, so
that the corresponding input data is not lost and at any time one can access again the indi
vidual variants.
If, however, one wants to consider a structure in different states, e.g. construction stages in
which loads act, their effects can be cumulative and one needs the concept of construction
stages. It permits the combination of results that can be calculated in different construction
stages of a structure, i.e. each loading can be applied for a particular construction stage and
its results can be combined at the end with those of any other loadings acting in other con
struction stages or used to build limit states.
Each loading is fixedly assigned to a construction stage: Thus the programs knows for
each loading in which state of the structure, i.e. construction stage, is is to be solved.
For a combination of results to be meaningful, the different construction stages can differ
only with respect to certain properties:
Nodes: They can only be introduced or removed in the initial stage. If in one particular posi
tion you only need a support in the n‐th construction stage, then you have to introduce an
unsupported node already in the initial state. The following nodal properties may be
changed for a new construction stage:
S support conditions
S nodal constraints
Members: They can only be introduced or removed in the initial stage. If for example you
need a member only in the n‐th construction stage, then you have to introduce it already
in the initial stage and make it temporarily inactive. The following member properties may
be changed in a construction stage:
S active status of members
S hinges
S member cross section variants
S cross section stiffnesses corrections
S consideration of shear deformation
Sequence: With the introduction of construction stages a fixed and unchangeable se
quence among themselves is defined, denoted by ascending numbers. This sequence nor
mally corresponds to the chronology of the construction process. It has the following
consequences:
S If results for loading combinations or envelopes are requested, loadings assigned to dif
ferent construction stages may be involved. For the output the structure adopts the
construction stage with the highest number of all involved stages. It is called the de
cisive stage.
If a member is not active in that decisive stage no results are available for that member,
even if it was active and loaded in an earlier stage. The same is valid for reactions of dis
placement components that are not supported any more in the decisive stage.
S If one changes any structural properties in a certain construction stage the program
asks whether these changes should be valid for all the following stages as well.
S The long-term module of STATIK is based on structural states whose sequence must fol
low the time axis.
The effects of changes of structure or loadings from one stage to the next one are not auto
matically handled by the program. For example, if a support is removed at a certain stage,
this has to be compensated by hand by introducing a force corresponding to negative va
lues of the the reactions in the support node before removing it.
E-10 STATIK‐8
E 3.2 The initial stage
Normally, i.e. if construction stages are not used, the structure is always in the so called in
itial stage and the term has no meaning at all.
As soon as construction stages are defined, the initial stage is of special importance due to
the following points:
- All structural properties that cannot be changed between construction stages must ob
viously be defined in the initial stage. Such properties are for example the existence of
nodes and members, the coordinates of nodes and member lines, member eccentrici
ties, etc.
- Otherwise the initial stage is treated like any other construction stage, i.e. loadings can
be assigned to it.
E 3.3 The definition of construction stages
E 3.3.1 The construction stage dialog

By clicking on the arrow button in the list field under 'construction stages' (Structure tab
sheet) the following dialogue opens, with the help of which construction stages (CS) can be
defined, deleted, changed in the ID and activated:
active CS
Definition of new CS;

change CS-ID;
delete CS;
CS‐legend not deletable initial
stage
selected CS
legend of CS-list
To introduce a new CS. If an existing CS is selected when pressing the button the new CS
will be inserted after the selected one otherwise appended at the end of the list. In this way
a numbered and not changeable sequence of CS is defined. The consequences of this se
quence are listed at the end of chap. E 3.1.
E 3.3.2 The active construction stage

One CS is always active (may be the Initial state). By active we mean that the representation
of the structure corresponds to the properties of the active CS, and that structural changes
possibly made belong to the definition of this CS and do not apply to other CS.
A construction stage is activated in different ways:
S In the Structure tab sheet the active CS is selected by the user using the CS dialog or us
ing the pair of arrow buttons via the CS list field.
If the adjacent button (adjacent to the CS list field) is active, the program highlights the
members and nodes changed in the active CS as compared to the previous CS.
STATIK‐8 E-11
Vol. E Specialities
This button in the Structure tab sheet provides a tabular output of the structural data
of the current CS. If the above button to display the differences with respect to the
previous CS is active, only these differences are output and otherwise all the structural
data.
S In the Loads tab sheet the CS belonging to the specified loading is automatically acti
vated.
S In the Results tab sheet, the execution command automatically activates the CS ac
cording to the requested result. This is not always unique. In the case of results for result
combinations, for instance, the highest of the involved CS is activated.
E 3.4 Handling of construction stages in different tab sheets

An important question concerns the visibility of inactive members in the different CS and
tab sheets. This is managed in STATIK as follows:
S In the tab sheets Structure, Surface (with 3D structures) and Loads inactive members
are always visible. Visibility controlling concepts like subsystems may be used if ne
cessary.
S In the Results tab sheet the visibility of inactive members can be switched off in the ac
tive CS using the button shown on the left.
E 3.4.1 CS in the tab sheet 'Structure'

As mentioned above in the Structure tab sheet there is the CS dialog, in which you can man
age the CS and select the active CS.
In the active CS (may be the Initial state) you make the required structural input for this
state. Here you also have the possibility of checking the active CS and of fully documenting
it. In this you are supported as follows:
S If this button is active, all nodes and members that have been changed in relation to the
previous CS are displayed in a different style. With it one can also control the amount of
tabular output of the structural data (see below).
S Use this button in the Structure tab sheet (CS dialog has to be closed) to obtain
- with the deactive “Differences Visible” button - a full tabular documentation of all
structural data in the current CS;
- with the activated “Differences Visible” button - a tabular display of the structural data
that has changed with respect to the previous CS.
E 3.4.2 CS in the tab sheet 'Surfaces'

Sufaces are not directly affected by construction stages.
. Each loading belongs to a CS, which can include inactive members. Further, surface load
ings use surfaces to apply their loads. If surfaces possess load transfer members, which are
inactive in a loading, this is admissible and correctly handled by the program. Inactive
members selected for load transfer in a surface, therefore, are not assigned any load.
E 3.4.3 CS in the tab sheet 'Loads'

With the definition of a new loading, or in the attributes dialog of a loading select the CS in
which the load case should act. To each loading, therefore, a CS is assigned. If a loading acts
in two CS, it has to be input twice, since each loading can only be assigned to exactly one
CS.
In the Loads tab sheet the program always automatically makes the CS active that belongs
to the active loading.
The CS currently active in the Loads tab sheet also remains active when changing tab
sheets, until another CS is activated in one of the ways described above.
E-12 STATIK‐8
E 3.4.4 CS in the tab sheet 'Analysis'

The activated CS is of no importance here.
E 3.4.5 CS in the tab sheet 'Results'

As mentioned earlier, each loading is assigned to a CS and solved forthe structure in this CS.
The CS are of importance insofar as the program switches to the CS according to the reques
ted results. If more than one CS is involved the one with the highest numbers become ac
tive.
Member results are output only for members that are active in the active CS and reac
tions only if their displacement parameters are supported in the active CS.
Makes inactive members (in the active CS) invisible.
STATIK‐8 E-13
Vol. E Specialities
E 4 Stability Analyses
E 4.1 Basics
In the case of stability analyses the factor λ is sought, by which a given loading has to be
increased, so that the structure just becomes unstable. This leads to an eigenvalue problem
of the following form:
buckling load = λ ∗ load
K + λi * KG (N) * φi = 0
λi : i-th eigenvalue
φi : i-th mode shape
K : elastic stiffness matrix of the structure
KG (N) : geometrical stiffness matrix due to the load N
The load can also consist of a fixed part N0 and a variable part N. The buckling problem is
then formulated as follows:
buckling load = fixed load + λ ∗ variable load
(K + KG (N0)) + λi * KG (N) * φi = 0
The mode shapes are normalised as follows:
φ iT * K * φ i = 1
From the solution of the eigenvalue problem one obtains the load factors λi and the corre
sponding buckling shapes φi. In the case of stability calculations usually only the smallest
value of the load factors is of interest. In the current program version only this eigenvalue
can be calculated.
It can happen that load factors λi are negative. This is possible if there are structural mem
bers exhibiting tensile forces.
For the subdivision of the members the same considerations apply as in the section on
calculations according to 2nd order theory (B 11.1.3). To illustrate this the buckling loads
of a prismatic pin-ended member having different subdivisions is compared with the exact
Euler solution:
L
No. of 1 2 3 4 5
members
EI
π2 EI λ
1.2159 1.0076 1.0016 1.0006 1.0003
λsoll = λEu
L2
. In the Attributes dialog for members in the last tab sheet a possibility is provided for subdi
viding members into several member elements for the analysis.
E-14 STATIK‐8
E 4 Stability Analyses
E 4.2 Performing a stability analysis
Stability analyses are special analyses, which are defined in the tab sheet 'Analysis' using
the button shown on the left. By clicking on this button the dialog for managing special
analyses appears. Proceed as shown in the following figure:
3
A dialog appears for the specifi
A dialog offering all cation of the stability analysis
2 special analysis types
appears;
Select 'Eigenvalue
analysis (stability)
1
Use this button to de Loading to be increased

fine a new special ana
lysis.
(neighbouring buttons
for modifying or dele
ting a selected calcu
lation line) Check box for analysis
with fixed initial loading
Fixed loading
ID with which the analysis

results appear in the
result tree.
E 4.3 Results of a stability analysis
As shown in the figure below the specified stability analyses appear in the result tree which
also conatains all other defined special analyses described in this chapter.
Numerical output of buckling load factor λ

Grapgical output of buckling mode shap and
buckling load factor λ
The extension '+' indicates the setting 'Smallest positve'.
STATIK‐8 E-15
Vol. E Specialities
E 4.4 Example
The following figure shows the plane frame of the introductory example 'Buckling'. The
frame is loaded horizontally by a single load. The cross section of the left column is weaker
than the cross section of the right column. Therefore the result of a buckling analysis with
the setting 'Smallest' gives a negative buckling value whereas a buckling analysis with the
setting 'Smallest positive” gives a higher buckling value according to amount.
E-16 STATIK‐8
E 5 Externally Bonded Reinforcement (EBR)
E 5.1 Basics
E 5.1.1 General
STATIK allows - together with FAGUS - analyses of structures with externally bonded re
inforcements (EBR). Such analyses require the options S (Specialities) for STATIK and 'A'
(Analysis) for FAGUS.
EBR analyses require, among other things, checking of the following points:
Forces in EBR strips: These verifications can be carried out in FAGUS for single sections or
as a special analysis in STATIK for a whole structure. The section with the highest force in an
EBR strip is often obvious from the section force results. In such cases a verification in FAGUS
for the corresponding section forces might be the quickest way to get the result.
Bond stresses: For the verification of the bond stresses between the EBR strip and the base
cross section the decisive section is not always obvious. The variation of the bond stresses
can be evaluated from the results of an EBR analysis with STATIK. The values result from the
quotient of the output quantity ∆N/∆x and the effective width of the ERB strip. ∆N/∆x is the
variation of the normal force in the EBR strip per unit length.
Anchorage: The possible anchorage zone (where concrete is uncracked) can be read off
the graphic of the extreme fibre stresses in STATIK by setting the critical value equal to the
concrete tensile strength (button [settings for output]) . The verification can thus be carried
out easily by hand.
. An example of an EBR analysis is supplied with STATIK. It can be loaded with the menu com
mand „Help“ > „Load examples“ > „FAGUS Aanalyses“ > „FRB EBR Example“.
E 5.1.2 Material and FAGUS specific issues
Material Definition
For EBR strips a material of type 'Fibre reinforcement' is needed, which can be defined in
the 'List of Materials' dialog (menu „Settings“ > „Materials“). An appropriate class has to be
assigned to the material, which can also be introduced, if necessary. These classes have just
one property, the modulus of elasticity E.
Bond Coefficient
FAGUS analyses generally consider the concrete cross sections in the fully cracked state. For
EBR analyses, however, the concrete between the cracks, i.e. a distance between cracks,
must be taken into account. An approach for this is described in the code SIA E 166
“Externally bonded Reinforcements”:
For the evaluation of the linear strain variation over the cross section mean strains (ε) are
assumed, for the equilibrium relationships, however, the cracked section is considered. The
ratio between the mean (ε) and the maximum values (ε” or in the output also designated
ε+) is described by the bond coefficient ”.
ε” ε In the current program version the following fixed values are used:
Bond coefficient for the inner reinforcement: κs = 0.7
(used for all reinforcement elements of material type 'Reinforcement steel' or 'PT steel')
Bond coefficient for EBR: κl = 0.9
(used for all reinforcement elements of material type 'Construction steel' or 'Fibre reinforce
ment')
STATIK‐8 E-17
Vol. E Specialities
In order for FAGUS to take the bond coefficient into account for its analyzes, the „Increased
steel elongation due to crack formation (adhesive reinforcement)“ check box must be
activated in the analysis parameters in the 'Other values' tab. The bond coefficient only ap
plies to reinforcement elements under tension.
. EBR strips must be input using the button for tendons since these are the only reinforce
ment elements accepting the required material types 'Construction steel' or 'Fibre re
inforcement'.
For further details see the FAGUS manual, chap. B 5.2.3.
E 5.2 Performing an EBR analysis
E 5.2.1 Preparations
An EBR analysis is specified and carried out in STATIK. You start STATIK and create or open
a calculation. From this calculation you can call FAGUS where necessary. Prepare the fol
lowing points:
S Material of the EBR:
Define the material for the EBR (menu 'Settings' > 'Materials' ... ). It must be of type 'Fibre
reinforcement' or 'Construction steel' and have a class with the desired modulus of ela
sticity E. Such a material should already be predefined.
S Input of the structure: (STATIK)
Define the desired design sections for all members (members dialog) since section
results for EBR analyses are only available for design sections.
Pay attention to the closeness of the design sections in zones where good results for
bond stresses are needed. The
N/
x results are evaluated as differences of N between
two neigboring design sections.
S Analysis parameters: (still in FAGUS)
Decide which analysis parameter set to work with. Check this (in the 'Analysis' tab) and
make sure in particular that the "Increased steel strain due to cracking (FBR EBR theorie)"
check box is activated and that the limit strain of the tensile reinforcement is adjus
ted.
S Additional result points: (FAGUS)
If you want to get strain results in the reinforcement and EBR elements you have to de
fine two corresponding result points in the cross section. For strain result points the two
values (ε,ε”) are automatically output in a STATIK EBR analysis. .
E-18 STATIK‐8
S Input of the cross sections including the EBRs:

Call FAGUS (from the cross section library) and define the required cross sections. Add
the EBRs to the cross sections using the button for tendons.
S Input of the loadings:
Input the necessary loadings. If you want to consider a preloading (loading before bon
ding), you need to define a separate loading for these loads (possibly a combination loa
ding).
S Input of a limit state specification for the analysis of the strengthened structure:
If you consider a preloading be sure not to include this loading in the limit state specifi
cation!
STATIK‐8 E-19
Vol. E Specialities
E 5.2.2 Setting up an EBR Analysis

EBR analyses are special analyses, which are defined in the tab sheet 'Analysis' using the
button shown on the left. By clicking on this button the dialog for managing special analy
ses appears. Proceed as shown in the following figure:
Use this button to de

fine a new special ana
lysis.
for modifying or dele
ting a selected calcu
lation line)
2 3
A dialog offering all special

analysis types appears; A dialog appears for the speci
Selet 'Externally bonded re fication of the EBR analysis
inforcement'
Preloading active of the un

strengthened structure *)
The structure is preloaded

by this loading (multiplied
by the given factor)
Limit state specification for the evaluation of the extre

mal section forces after the activation of the EBR strips
(in addition to a possible preloading)
type of analysis
Analysis parameter set to be

used
*) For FAGUS all cross section elements not ha

ving a material of type 'Construction steel' or
'Fiber reinforcement' belong to the unstrengthened
structure
E-20 STATIK‐8
E 5.3 Results of an EBR analysis
The result tree contains a branch with the specified ERB analyses:
'Supplement' comes only

after a previous 'Standard'
calculation
Select the desired EBR analysis, 'Standard' as output value and numerical output and then
press the execution button. The tabular output shows all available results.
For graphical output consider the available results for the settings 'Standard' and 'Supple
ment' as output values. The most interesting results for EBR analyses are found under 'Sup
plement'.
Examples of result output:
The verification in FAGUS are made in the sections specified by the user in accordance with
the "Design section specification".
∆Ν+ : EBR force (in the crack)
∆Ν+/∆x : Change in EBR force
∆x : Section distance
According to standard regulations, the change in the EBR force in the anchoring zones
should not exceed a certain value.
In the STATIK program, this value is calculated directly from two adjacent sections from the
EBR force (in the crack) and displayed graphically and numerically as ∆Ν+/∆x.
In order to get the most meaningful results possible, the section distance should not be too
large.
STATIK‐8 E-21
Vol. E Specialities
E-22 STATIK‐8
F 1 Overview
Vol. F Prestressing
STATIK-8
F 1 Overview
F 1.1 What the Prestressing module does
The prestressing module supports the analysis of prestressed beam structures, like beam
bridges, and post-tensioned or pre-tensioned beams. It appears primarily in the control tab
sheet 'Prestressing', in which tendons are input and administered. Prestressing however
also affects other parts of the program. The following points describe in a general way how
prestressing is dealt with in STATIK.
S The prestressing module permits the definition of tendons with respect to geometry,
cross section, material, friction values and prestressing procedures. The position of the
tendon can be output in a mesh of arbitrary spacing which serves therefore as a suitable
basis for producing tendon plans.
S The program determines the variation of forces in the tendons based on the specified
prestressing steps taking into account the automatically determined friction losses.
Thereby the stress variation in the individual prestressing steps can be seen (prestress
ing record).
Alternatively, the tendon forces can also be input by the user directly in the form of a list
of distances and forces.
S From the forces in the tendons the resultant action on the structure can be calculated
and introduced as a loading.
S The further treatment of prestress loadings corresponds to that of normal loadings with
the difference that in the output of section forces one can select, whether only the
restraint forces are output (e.g. in ultimate load considerations) or whether the section
forces are considered as external actions as a result of prestressing (e.g. for stress verific
ations (serviceability) for the concrete section).
S Prestressing is also supported by reinforced concrete (RC) analyses (see Part D). The
tendons (position, prestressing force, ...) in every design section are automatically intro
duced into the cross sections.
F 1.2 Requirements for the Use of the Prestressing Module
S The prestressing module is an added option to STATIK and its use requires the corres
ponding license.
S Besides the basic version of STATIK the prestressing module also requires the option
'Specialities', which among other things permits the use of structure lines, axis points
and construction stages.
STATIK-8 F-1
Vol. F Prestressing
F 1.3 Brief description of the most important aspects of prestressing
F 1.3.1 Structure
Structure lines (SL)

Only parts of a structure can be prestressed that are modeled by structure lines. This also
applies to straight simple beams. Structure lines are described in Ch. E 2.
F 1.3.2 Input of tendons
Groups of tendons
Each tendon must be assigned to a group of tendons, i.e. before the first tendon can be in
put, at least one tendon group must be defined.
There are two reasons for grouping tendons together:
1) The forces resulting from a group of tendons are summed to form a loading. The loading
is given the name of the tendon group. Thus if a group of tendons in Construction Stage
1 and another group in Construction Stage 2 are prestressed, this requires two loadings
and therefore two tendon groups.
As shown in Example 1 below, it is also possible to prestress the tendons of a tendon
group in a construction stage and to apply prestress again in a later construction stage.
In this case, from a single tendon group several loadings may result.
2) If there is a large number of tendons it can be an advantage for the sake of clarity to
assign the tendons to several groups. All tendons in a group are stored in a layer and so
the visibility can be switched on and off for individual tendon groups.
Tendons, geometry
As mentioned above tendons can only be input along structure lines. The input of the ver
tical tendon profile (z‐eccentricities with respect to the SL) is done graphically in the de
veloped vertical side view surface through the SL (see also chap. F 1.4).
side view surface
SL
trace of SL in the
plan view plane
tendon input in the

developed side view surface
(= side view plane)
SG
SL
z‐eccentricity
at distance d
d
distances
(measured along trace)
F-2 STATIK-8
F 1 Overview
The y‐eccentricity ey of a tendon point defined in the side view plane is given by its hori
zontal projection onto a guidance line defined in the cross section (see fig. below). As an
alternative to the guidance line ey can also be input explicitly.
axis point on SL
‐ez
ey tendon
guidance line
Tendon attributes
To specify a tendon, besides the geometry a set of parameters is required, e.g.
S prestressing steel material
S tendon cross section
S friction values
S wedge draw-in at anchorages
S with/without bonding
S stressing program or explicit prestressing force along tendon
Variation of prestressing force

The variation of prestressing force in a tendon can be input explicitly (list of distance‐force
data pairs). Normally however it is defined by specifying prestressing increments at the an
chorages (prestressing procedure). Based on the tendon geometry and the friction coeffi
cients the program determines the variation of prestressing force using the formula:
P(x) + P o·e *m(a)Dax)

Po : prestressing force at the anchorage
P(x) : prestressing force at a distance x from the anchorage
x : developed (actual) tendon length
m : friction coefficient (typical values in the range: 0.1 .. 0.3)
a : sum of all deviation angles (absolute values, radians) at distance x
Da : unwanted deviation angle (per unit length)
values in the range: 0.004 .. 0.008 /m)
The following stressing processes (steps) can be carried out more than once and in any or
der (beginning of course with the prestressing) at both ends of a tendon:
S Prestressing to a force of Factor * ftk at the anchor.
If it is the last step with this anchor, it is automatically anchored, if the wedge draw-in
<>0.0 has stabilised.
S Reduction of prestress to a force of Factor * ftk at the anchor; anchoring as with
prestressing.
S Reduction of prestress to maximum force.
The reduction of prestress at the anchor is determined, such that the first force max
imum in the vicinity of the anchor attains a pre-defined value. If it is the last step for this
anchor, when determining the reduced force a subsequent anchoring is taken into con
sideration, so that the force maximum after anchoring has the desired value.
STATIK-8 F-3
Vol. F Prestressing
The following figure shows an example with several prestressing steps:

input prestressing steps:
Resultierende Spannkraftverläufe (grafische und numerische Ausgabe):
1 2 3 6 5 4
1883 0.7*ftk = 1758 1858
1616
1823
1844 1682
1869
1
2
3
4
5
6
= input values
F 1.3.3 Prestress loadings

There are the following two possibilities of introducing the prestressing forces as loading
on the structure. Both ways are correct and lead to the same results in analyses according
to 1st order theory.
Prestressing as external action
The tendons are not part of the structure, but act on it in the form of forces. These forces
form the prestress loading. It is a question of anchor, deviation and friction forces, which all
have to be in equilibrium.
The section force results for this prestress loading correspond to the action on the concrete
part of the cross section (part [P][S] from figure below). If one wants to get restraint forces,
then one has to include the section force contribution of the tendons.
This way of treating prestressing is very clear and is also well-suited to rough hand calcula
tions. But it also has disadvantages and is less suitable for computer programs. Such a load
ing could not be analysed according to 2nd order theory (not even as part of a combination
loading), as otherwise incorrect initial normal forces would be considered. For these reas
ons in STATIK the method described below was used.
Prestressing as initial stress state (i.e. tendons as part of the structure)
After prestressing a statically-determinate supported frame structure has a strain state in
every point, which can be calculated as a function of the position and direction of the ten
don as well as the prestressing force. If one introduces this strain state as an initial strain
loading over the whole structure, the result is an initial stress state due to prestressing,
which corresponds to the restraint forces (Part [S] from figure below). If one only wants the
section force part for the concrete section (Parts [P][S]), then the section force part due to
the tendons has to be deducted.
F-4 STATIK-8
F 1 Overview
F 1.3.4 Results
For the output of section forces or cross section results which include prestressing effects,
one can choose the desired part according to the figure below (P, S or the sum of both):
statically determinate statically indeterminate
moments when con

[P][S] sidering prestressing
as external action
=
[S] restraint moments
+
-P*e
[P] (P*e = moment con
tribution of the
tendon)
[P][S] section forces acting on concrete part of cross section (sum of [S]+[P]),
i.e. prestressing considered as external action
[S] restraint effects only
[P] section force part of tendons only (negative)
For displacement and reaction results part [P] alone doesn't make sense and is therefore
not selectable.
For dimensioning the reinforcement considering the tendons as part of the resistance one
needs part [S]. [P][S] must be requested if stresses in the concrete part of a cross section are
of interest.
F 1.3.5 Dimensioning, verifications
The RC analyses described in Part D (dimensioning of ordinary untensioned reinforcement,

ultimate load (structural safety) and stress verifications (serviceability)) are also possible for
prestressed structures. On this point the following remarks should be noted:
S FAGUS has to know the strain in every tendon relative to its neighboring concrete fiber
at the time when the bond is active. With the direct use of FAGUS this value is input as
the so called pre-strain (initial strain) by the user. This pre-strain consists of two parts,
i.e. of the cable strain due to the prestressing force and of a decompression component
in the concrete, which depends on the section forces in the concrete cross section at the
time of bonding.
For RC analyses in STATIK, to determine the decompression component FAGUS assumes
that the prestressing is completely introduced into the structure and that on creating
the bond the section forces due to the loading specified under G1 are active. G1 is an
input field in the dialogue 'RC Analyses' (see Section D 1.1). If only a part of the decom
pression component needs to be considered, then for the PREFAC‐Parameter (see Sec
tion D 3.4.2) a corresponding factor can be specified, e.g. PREFAC=0.0 for the pre-ten
sioning method (prestress bed).
S To determine the losses, besides the effects of the prestressing the section forces de
rived from the sum of the specified loadings under G1 (see above) and G2 (in the same
dialogue) are used.
S The tendons are positioned automatically in the corresponding FAGUS cross sections
and precisely those that appear in the loadings of the limit state specification used and
thus in the corresponding tendon groups.
STATIK-8 F-5
Vol. F Prestressing
F 1.4 Input of the side view curve of a tendon
The input of the side view curve (vertical profile) of a tendon is normally done graphically.
As an alternative the vertical profile can be defined numerically by inputting a chain of pa
rametrized parabolic elements. This type of input allows the import of tendons defined in
STATIK calculations
The two input types are described shortly hereafter.
F 1.4.1 Standard input (graphical)

The tendon profile is defined by a curve, which is constructed by a series of curve points
length with their location, direction and length of tangent and further properties like locations
and direc with minimum radius of curvature, etc. The shape of the curve can easily be modified by
tion of
tangent changing the properties of its points or by introducing or deleting of curve points.
The curves used in the program are cubic Hermite splines. The shape of a curve segment
curve between two curve points is defined by the position of the points and the direction and
segmentt length of the tangents. It is not influenced by the neighboring segments with the exception
that the the tangent direction defined in a curve point is the same for both adjacent seg
ments.
tangent
The following example shows how the curve can easily be modified in order to increase the
restraint moments:
initial curve
corresponting
restraint moments
same curve points but

stretched tangents in F1 F2
points F1, F2
corresponding
restraint moments
By increasing the tangent lengths in the field points the curve is held down longer which
leads to bigger restraint moments.
The input of quadratic parabolas is not supported

Many engineers are used to working with quadraric parabola shaped curves. Their
constant deviation forces make the calculation easier, particularly when done by hand. But
they are not a necessity for an optimum tendon profile which is difficult to find automati
cally. Instead one starts with a „well shaped“ and feasible curve and modifies it afterwards
to meet all the possible conditions.
F-6 STATIK-8
F 1 Overview
F 1.4.2 Input by a series of parametrized parabolic segments

This input type originates from STATIK-3. The specification of the vertical tendon profile is
effected by defining a chain of standard parametrized parabolic segments.
Example:
straight-parabola parabola-parabola parabola-parabola parabola-straight
The tendon profile is defined by four elements:

1) Element of type straight - quadratic parabola with the parameters
- length
- length of straight at start
- elevation at start
- elevation at end
- tangent direction at end
2) quadratic parabola - quadratic parabola with the parameters
- length
- length of first parabola
(automatically adapted for obtaining minimum radius of curvature)
- elevation at end
- tangent direction at end
3) quadratic parabola - quadratic parabola (like 3)
4) quadratic parabola - straight with the parameters
- length
- length of parabola
- elevation at end
Note that the parameters are defined so as to ensure a continuous curve. 12 types of pa
rametrized elements are provided including an element with a cubic parabola.
The parametrized elements can be defined by filling in a table in the program or using
importing a text file according to the STATIK-3-standard. This also permits the import of
tendons from a older STATIK-3 calculation (STV.INP files).
STATIK-8 F-7
Vol. F Prestressing
F 2 Operating the program
F 2.1 Overview
The tendons are input in the tab sheet 'Prestressing':
Tendon groups Selecting tendons
Tendon dialog
graphic of tendon
tabular tendon data (geometry, forces)
tendon attributes
check tendons of actual group
check tendons of all groups
import tendon data from text file (STATIK definition)
For an introduction to the subject it is strongly recommended to work through the two ex
amples in chapter F 3.
F 2.2 Dialogs and commands
F 2.2.1 Tendon groups
Tendons are combined in groups which are defined and administered in the following part
of the tab sheet 'Prestressing':
new group
edit group
list of groups
delete group
Tendons are organized in groups for the following reasons:

S The actions of the tendons of a tendon group on the structure are combined in an
automatically created loading.
All tendons of a group are introduced and stressed the first time in a specific construc
tion stage, whose name is a property of the tendon group and also of the generated loa
ding.
It is possible to further stress tendons of a group in later construction stages (for details
see later)
S Each tendon group is stored in a separate layer. Its visibility can therefore be switched
on and off individually.
F-8 STATIK-8
The tendon group dialog looks as follows:
Since a tendon group leads to a loading it must have an action assigned to it. The prede
fined action 'Prestressing' is suggested by default. If you work with a structure type that
doesn't provide such an action you have to create a user defined action and set the appro
priate attributes and factors.
For loss factor for long-term analysis, see the chapter on long-term analysis.
F 2.2.2 Selecting tendons

Tendons may be selected by the standard means of the graphics editor. But since they often
lie one over the other it is easier to use the special list field provided for that purpose. It of
fers all tendons of the actually selected group:
F 2.2.3 Tendon dialog

It is called by the shown button and has the tabseets 'Main', 'Attributes' , 'Stress process and
'Options'.
STATIK-8 F-9
Vol. F Prestressing
Tab sheet 'Main'
Each tendon needs its unique ID
Structure line to which the tendon

belongs
Input/edit side view curve

Input/edit horizontal eccentricities
Distance list for tabular output of

tendon data (see hint at cursor). The
definition points are always included in
the list.
Input of a new tendon - leads to the

input mode for the side view curve
Tendons can only be defined along a structure line to which they are assigned by entering
its ID in the field 'Structure line(s)'. It can also be a series of structure lines. In such a case
the structure line Ids are separated by the character ';'. The Ids can be typed in or generated
by clicking on the desired structure lines after pressing the arrow button beside the ID field.
If a tendon passes through a series of structure lines they should be continuous at their
connection points (no break of tangents)
Side view curve and horizontal eccentricities

The geometry of a tendon is defined by its side view curve, an optional curve for the hori
zontal eccentricities. If a tendon is selected one of the two edit buttons can be used to
switch to the corresponding input mode. If no tendon is selected the button [Create] is
used to create a new tendon and leads directly to the input mode for the side view curve
which must exist for each tendon. How to work in the special input modes for both curves
is described in the chapters F 2.2.4 and F 2.2.5.
Distance list for the tabular output of tendon data

The tabular output of tendon data (geometry and forces) contains at least all definition
points (curve points of the side view curve) . It can be extended arbitrarily by defining a
distance list. Distances are measured along the trace of the structure line in its plan view
plane. The list can contain the following elements separated by space characters:
S 2.5 (number with or without decimal point)
means an absolute distance from the start of a tendon
S r1.0 (number with preceding 'r')
distance relative to previous point
S 5*1.2 (number * relative distance)
same as r1.2 r1.2 r1.2 r1.2 r1.2
S *1.0 (repetition without number)
at the end of the list for filling until end of tendon
Example: 0.5 10*1 8*0.5 *1
F-10 STATIK-8
Tab sheet 'Attributes'
The materials provided by the list of

materials are available here (see menu
„Settings“ > „Marerials”)
A wedge draw-in leads to a release of

the tendon end after the stressing pro
cess and hence to a reduction of the
tendon force
only used for the dimensioning of re
inforcement
Tab sheet 'Stressing process'
The variation of forces in a tendon is

defined either by a series of stressing
processes at its start and/or end or by
an explicit input of the forces along the
tendon
A variation of forces must be defined for each tendon. Based on these forces the program
is able to calculate the actions from the tendons on the structure and hence to create the
prestress loadings for each tendon group.
Definition of the tendon forces by means of stressing processes

The following stressing processes are possible at the anchors of a tendon (see figure on
page F-4). Up to eight processes may take place, one acting after the other. The forces
result from a given Factor multiplied by ftk and the area of the tendon:
Stressing:
The tendon is stressed up to a given force at the anchor
Releasing:
The tendon is released until a given force is measured at the anchor. The given force must
be lower than the one acting before the release process.
Releasing for max force:
The tendon is released, such that the first force maximum in the vicinity of the anchor at
tains a pre-defined value (anchoring considered).
STATIK-8 F-11
Vol. F Prestressing
Anchoring:
Anchoring means fixing the tendon at the anchor. If a wedge draw-in is specified an additio
nal release of the tendon occurs with the anchoring process. Anchoring happens automati
cally after the last stressing process at an anchor or if the next stressing process will be car
ried out at the other end ot the tendon..
Construction stages:
Each tendon group is assigned to a construction stage. The first stressing process always
takes place in that construction stage. Further stressing may occur in the same or in later
construction stages (see example in chap. F 3.2).
If, on the other hand, a different construction stage (a later one than that of the group) is
selected, an additional load is created for this group and this construction stage, which con
tains the forces that result from the stressing processes that are assigned to this construc
tion stage.
This allows stressing in several stages, whereby results can also be obtained in intermediate
stages. More on this in the example of the manual chap. F 3.
Explicit input of the prestress forces

How to proceed is described in the 'Tendons' dialog and the cursor hints. This way of de
fining the forces in the tendons does not support stressing in several steps (construction
stages)
Tab sheet 'Options'
With 'Hatching' on, the area between the tendon and the structure line is hatched with hat
ching lines perpendicular to the structure line.
F 2.2.4 Input mode for side view curve

For inputting and editing the side view curve the program switches to a special 2D input
mode that looks as follows:
S A button row is displayed at the top of the graphics area:
Exit input Dialog for pa make tangent handles invisible

mode rametrized
tendon all tendons visible
elements
see F 2.2.10
S Graphics editor tool for inputting the side view curve is enabled
S The graphics area displays the side view plane of the tendon, i.e. the developed vertical
side view surface through the structure line with the coordinates u,v
side view surface
SL
trace of the SL in
the plan view plane
F-12 STATIK-8
The course of a tendon - or more precisely its z-eccentricity in the local z direction of the
structure line - is defined by a curve, which is constructed by a series of curve points with
the special properties tangent direction and tangent length:
tendon
structure line (SL)
z‐eccentricity
at distance d
d
distances
(along trace of SL)
length and
direction of
tangent
curve point
curve
segmentt
tangent
The following procedure is recommended for the input of a tendon (the alternative method
using parametrized standard segments is described in chap. F 2.2.10):
S After [Create] in the 'Tendons' dialog the program switches to the special input mode
for the side view curve and the curve input tool is already started. One sketches now the
tendon by inputting all important points for which one plans to define the position and
tangent properties later exactly.
Hints:
- This slider at the bottom of the program window allows a vertically exaggerated dis
play of the side view plane.
- Button for switching on and off a faded view of other existing tendons
S Open the tendon point dialog ('Attributes..' in the context menu of a curve point) and
check/modify the attributes of all points until the curve looks exactly as desired.
Hint: The tangents may be manipulated by graphically moving theirs handles. A much
better way, however, is to use the functions in the dialog (arrow buttons, etc.). If you
don't want to see the handles, switch their visibility off with the button shown on the
left.
S It is always possible to add further curve points or delete existing ones. For this purpose
select the tendon curve and use the functions in the context menu.
F 2.2.5 Horizontal Eccentricities

The horizontal eccentricity ey of a point in the side view curve is given primarily by its hori
zontal projection on a guidance line defined in the cross section. Horizontal means parallel
to the plan view plane of the structure line. If no guidance line is defined in a cross section,
a vertical line through the axis point (structure line) is assumed by default.
axis point on structure line
‐ez
ey tendon
guidance line
default guidance line
STATIK-8 F-13
Vol. F Prestressing
With respect to this standard horizontal positioning an additional ey eccentricity can be in
truduced by specifying a plan view curve.
A click on the 'Side view curve' button in the 'Tendons' dialog leads to the special 2D input
mode for the plan view curve. Here one can draw a curve for additional horizontal eccentri
cities similar to the side view curve.
By default this curve is a stright line beginning at the start point end ending at the end point
of a tendon, i.e. there are no additional horizontal eccentricities. The curve can be modified
by adding, moving and deleting of curve points and by editing properties in their attribute
dialog.
The curve points of the plan view curve are independent of the curve points of the side view
curve.
F 2.2.6 The dialog of the tendon curve points

The point attribute dialogs of the side and plan view curves are very similar and therefore
treated together: here
Distance from the start

of the structure line
(SL) to the tendon base
point along the plan
view curve of the SL
for capturing the

tangent direction from
existing objects
parallel to SL axis
step width
step buttons
for changing both va
lues at the same time
when using the step
buttons
Distance S of a tendon point

The distance S is measured along the projection (trace) of the structure line on its plan view
plane, i.e. along the plan view curve of the SL. The corresponding point on the SL is the refe
rence point from which the tendon eccentricities are measured in the local z and y coordi
nates of the SL (see E 2.1).
F-14 STATIK-8
Definition types for the z-eccentricity

Guidance lines serve on the one hand to define the eccentricities ey normal to the side view
surface. They are however also useful for ez, since this eccentricity can be defined relative
to the upper or lower end of the guidance line.
Axis point (on Structur line) Tendon
-a
ey
b
Guidance line c
a: from SL in direction of its local z
Species of the definition of z-eccentricity: axis
b: relative to upper end of gui

dance line in negative z direction
c: relative to lower end of gui

dance line in z direction
z eccentricities are measured in the direction of
the local z axis of the SL.
. If you move a tendon point graphically, so the resulting values are automatically entered
in the input fields of tendon points dialogue.
Guidance lines are a cross-section attribute and are therefore entered in the cross-section
program FAGUS. Several guidance lines can be entered per cross-section.
In addition to the entered guidance lines, however, the default guidance line is always
available, which runs vertically through the axis point and is limited by the rectangle that
surrounds the cross-section:
Achspunkt (auf Strukturlinie)
Querschnitt
umschliessendes Recht
eck parallel y,z
Vorgabe‐Führungslinie
Shape between two curve points

As with structure lines the tangents with their lengths and directions define the curve bet
ween two curve points (see contextual help for curve button).
. The easiest way to change tangent lengths and directions under continual observation of
the consequences on the curve is by means of the step buttons (after setting a not too big
step width).
STATIK-8 F-15
Vol. F Prestressing
Circular arc with given minimum radius

In addition to the tangent parameters circular arcs to the left and/or right of a curve point
can be defined with the opening angles β1 and β2. Their radius is taken from the 'Minimum
radius of curvature' setting in the 'Tendons' dialog. A circular arc to the left of a curve point
B is defined as follows:
tangent
Curve segment A‐B to circular arc defined by B
the left of curve point B tangent, radius and β1
including circular arc radius
β1
t1 B
A variation of the tangent length t1 in B influ

ences the tangent length in point M and M
hence the curve segment M‐A
F 2.2.7 Output of tendon geometry and forces

These buttons are used for a graphical and numerical check of the tendon geometry and
the variation of the tendon forces.
The graphic output shows the vertical profile and the variation of the forces:
The numerical output comprises the following tables:

- Stressing processes
- Geometry and forces
- Friction losses
- Attributes of the tendon points
This button generates a table with the most important attributes of the tendons (settings
in their attributes dialog) for all tendons of the actual tendon group.
F 2.2.8 Checking the tendon input

These buttons are used for checking the tendon input, either for the tendons of the actual
group or for all tendons.
F-16 STATIK-8
F 2.2.9 Import of tendon geometry from text file accord. STATIK-3 standard
The import is lauched by this button. The imported tendons are added to the actual tendon
group. The imported parabolic elements are shown in the 'Parabolic elements' dialog (see
Ch. F 2.2.10) where they can also be modified.
Syntax of the text file

The text file must follow the rules defined in the following diagram. It corresponds to the
STATIK-3 standard with some minor extensions (in italic letters), which make it easier to
enter such files by hand.
F‐parabolic_elements
'SL‐IDs' start_distance
S*member_row sn
Reference_elevation r_elevation
Horizontal_eccentricities Knone
h d α
Astart Smember sn h d α
End
B*friction_parameters µ ∆α
C*tendon area minimum_radius emod

V*wedge_draw-in s
K*tendon kb W*like kb1
Begin_after distance start_elevation
start_angle
G*straight Parabola lG ltot eelev eangle
Parabola Parabola lp1

Parabola G*straight Parabola lp1 lG ltot eelev eangle
K*cubic Parabola
Parabola G*straight lp ltot eelev
Aoutput_tendon_geometry
- dimmed parts are allowed but not used
End - *... parts are for explanation only
STATIK-8 F-17
Vol. F Prestressing
Remarks
S The member row needed in STATIK cannot be interpreted. If there is just one structure
line in the STATIK calculation, the tendons are assigned to that one. If there are more
than one SL the Id must be entered in the line 'S*member_row' before importing the file.
If the tendons pass through more than one SL their Ids must be given, separated by ',',
e.g. 'SL1,SL2'. The apostrophes are part of the input!
S The reference_elevation cannot be interpreted correctly. It is interpreted as a correction
value for all the following z-eccentricities (elevation values). It is recommended to check
this value in the input file before the import.
S From a possible line 'Horizontal_eccentricities... ' only the value d is read and under
stood as a constant horizontal eccentricity for all the following tendons. The import
generates a plan view curve, which may be modified later by hand (. F 2.2.5).
S Parabolic sections, which are so short that the minimum radius condition cannot be
met, are automatically transformed to a circular arc. This is illustrated by the first
element in the following example: with 'G P 22.0 22.0 ...' the length of the straight is
equal to the total length which means that the length of the parabolic section is set to
0. Therefore the G P element is transformed to a G K element (Straight - Circular Arc) .
Example
The following text describes the tendon displayed in the following section F 2.2.10. The '/'
are line continuation characters.
S 1
C 15E-4 5. 1.9E8
K 10 B 0.0 2.0 /
G P 22.0 22.0 12.0 0.0 /
P P 10.0 20.0 -12.0 /
P P 20.0 20.0 12.0 /
P P 0.0 20.0 -12.0 /
P G P 8.0 8.0 24.0 20.0 /
P G P 12.0 12.0 24.0 -20.0 /
P G P 0.0 12.0 24.0 20.0 /
P G P 0.0 24.0 24.0 -20.0 /
P G 12.0 18.0 27.0
A
END
F 2.2.10 Defining the vertical profile with parametric elements

The basics of this type of input are described in section F 1.4.2.
The dialog for the input of the parametric elements is opened in the input mode of the side
view curve using the repective button:
Dialog to input parabola elements
F-18 STATIK-8
It looks as follows:
tangent of direction at start length (1.) parabola tangent of direction at end

ez at start strait length total length ez at end
only enabled if applied table is saved and representation

below is refreshed
Each line represents a parabolic element. The following types are available (most of them
used in the example):
Parabola generally means

Straight - Parabola quadratic parabola
Straight - Circular arc
Circular arc - Straight
Circular arc - Straight - Circular arc
Circular arc always has the
Circular arc - Straight - Parabola minimum radius specified in
Circular arc - Parabola the 'Tendons' dialog
Parabola - Straight
Parabola - Straight - Circular arc
Parabola - Straight - Parabola
Parabola - Circular arc
Parabola - Parabola
Cubic Parabola
The parametric elements are defined such that a continuous curve is ensured.
Decisive is the generated side view curve
The button [Create side view curve] first deletes a possibly existing side view curve and
then generates from the parabolic elements a new sufficiently approximated side view
curve corresponding to the standard graphic input. The side view curve, which can be mo
dified after its generation, is the curve used for the calculation. After changes in the parabo
lic elements dialog the side view curve can be generated again at any time.
STATIK-8 F-19
Vol. F Prestressing
Visibilities
Each tendon group is stored in a separate layer in the layer group 'Prestressing'. The dialog
'Layer properties' called from the context menu of the layer button (available only in the in
put mode of the side view curve) shows a list of sublayers whose visibility may be switched
on and off.
F-20 STATIK-8
F 3 Examples
F 3 Examples
F 3.1 Simple Frame with one Tendon
F 3.1.1 Task
Structure:
Z
cross sections:
concrete
C35/45
beam:
0.10
0.60
1 tendon with 9 strands of 150mm2,
P0=0.7*fpk*Ap at both ends,
5.00
material: Y1770 columns:
0.35
0.35
X
10.00
Task:
Evaluation of the edge stresses under
self weight + uniform live load of -20kN/m on the beam + prestress P0
F 3.1.2 Aim and procedure

This very simple example should introduce you to the essential points in the treatment of
prestressing in STATIK.
Before we begin with a descriptioon of all input steps, you are first given a brief overview
of the most important steps to solve the problem.
1) start new 3D analysis
2) define code and material
3) input the cross sections 'Beam' and 'Columns'
4) input column members
5) input beam as structure line
6) input support nodes
7) prestressing: input tendon group and tendon
8) input loading Live Load
9) define result combination Dead Load + Live Load + Prestress
10) generate results
STATIK-8 F-21
Vol. F Prestressing
F 3.1.3 Detailed description of the input
Starting program, material definition

" Start STATIK and open a new calculation; set up the 'General Options' dialog as follows
. Although we only have a plane frame we have to select '3D', since this is required by the
prestressing module.
" Call the Material dialog („Settings” > „Materials”) and select for the given material 'C' the
class C35/45 and for prestressing steel 'P' Y1770.
Cross sections
" Call the Cross Section library and input the two cross sections 'Beam' and 'Columns' as
>
parametrized cross sections.
Beam: Columns:
0.35
0.60
0.35
0.35
Structure
A part of a structure that has to be prestressed must be defined as a structure line. What a
structure line is, you can look up in the Sections E 2 and F 1.3.1. For our example this means
that the columns are input as normal members and the beam as a structure line.
Columns: (normal member)

" First input both column members and assign them the cross section 'Columns'.
Beam: (structure line)

Each structure line is based on a plan view plane, in which its curve in plan (here a straight
line) is defined. Normally we are always dealing with a horizontal plane, whose Z‐level lies,
not necessarily - but advantageously, at the height of the structure line. Thus we first have
to introduce a horizontal working plane at Z=5.00m:
" Click on the button to define a plane (below the zoom tool); the dialog 'Working Planes' ap
pears
" Select the button to define a new working plane; the following dialog appears, which you
may have to zoom to see the fields with the point coordinates. Fill in the fields and then click
on [OK]
F-22 STATIK-8
F 3 Examples
" Open the Structure Line dialogue and set it as follows:
" Click on the button [Create]

In this way you get to the input mode for the plan view curve, which is confirmed by obtain
ing the following header menu line at the top of the graphics area:
header menu
The Graphics Editor tool to input the plan view curve should already be active, i.e. it is ready
for the input of a point.
The plan view curve of the structure line is input as a polygon. In our example it consists of
a single side (start point (0, 0), end point (10, 0).
Structure line points (curve points of the plan view curve) in addition to the start and end
points have to be input everywhere where the cross section changes and where there are
supports.
" Input the two points

(0, 0) and (10, 0), and close the polygon input with <Q>.
" Exit the input mode with [OK] in the header menu.
The structure line should now be visible as a connection between the tops of the columns.
Since in the plan view curve we have only input two points, it comprises a section, which
for the further input is treated analogously to a bar member.
" Open with this dialogue the button for the structure line sections (SLS).
" Automatically the button on the left becomes active, so that the structure line section sym
bols are visible.
" Select the SLS, by clicking on its symbol.
Segment (Structure line)
" Select as cross section 'Beam' and then [Apply].
Support nodes:
" Input both supports (fully fixed) at the bottoms of the columns
STATIK-8 F-23
Vol. F Prestressing
Input of Tendons
" Change to the tab sheet 'Prestressing'

Tendons are always put in individual groups. In order to input our tendon, we first have to
define a tendon group:
" Define a new tendon group using the button shown on the left and accept the default val
ues in the dialogue:
" Open the 'Tenons' dialog.
" Set the dialog for the input of the tendon 'T11' as follows:
The values for the minimum radius of curva

ture and the duct are here of no significance.
" Select [Create] in the 'Tendons' dialog.

Then you come ‐ as in the input of the structure line ‐ to a special input mode for the tendon
input. The graphic shows the developed area through the structure line, in which the pro
file of the structure line and the boundaries of the cross section can be seen.
" The Graphics Editor tool to input the tendon side view curve should now be active, i.e. it is
waiting for the input of the first point. For the next step you can leave it active, or you can
exit it using <Esc> and after setting the scale exaggeration you can start again.
" Select a somewhat exaggerated representation by moving the slider (shown on the left)
and situated at the bottom of the screen a little to the right.
" Now input the side view curve of the tendon according the following remarks.
F-24 STATIK-8
F 3 Examples
Remarks concerning the input of tendons

S The side view curve is a curved polygon which is input like a polygon by defining a series
of points, the so called tendon points.
S The input of the polygon must be carried out from left to right. The side view surface is
always displayed with the direction of the structure line pointing from left to right on
the screen.
S Before starting with the input one should know where tendon points are absolutely
needed. These are, apart from start and end points, positions where clear conditions
exist concerning eccentricity of tangent direction of the tendon. This is the case at least
over supports and once within each span.
S To minimize the amout of work one will use existing structure line points (snapping or
relative input) for inputting the distances of the tendon points. The easiest way to de
fine their exact eccentricities is the later use of the tendon point dialog.
" In our example you may input th three needed tendon points by snapping the start point
of the structure line, then the symbol of the structure line segment (in the middle of the
span) and finally the end point of the structure line. After terminating the curve input by
<Q> the curve looks as follows:
quit input mode other tendons segment and tangent hanles
invisible invisible
tendon points
object points visible
After the tendon has been sketched with the desired number of points, we want to modify
the properties of these points according the task in hand.
" Make the segment and tangent handles invisible.
" Select the first tendon point and call the attributes dialog from its context menu.
" The distance S should be 0.00.
" Select for the eccentricity 'z explicit' with a value of 0.00, then [Apply]
'z explicit' means with reference to the structure line
" Select the middle tendon point.

" Set the distance S to 5.00 [m] if necessary
" Select for the eccentricity 'relative from below' with a value of 0.10 [m];
'relative from below' means with reference to the bottom edge of the cross section. The cor
responding PT guidance line is the default PT guidance line (vertical through the axis point).
More on PT guidance lines can be found in the Help in the dialogue.
STATIK-8 F-25
Vol. F Prestressing
" The tangent direction should run parallel to the structure line.
We leave the tangent lengths as they are. With the tangent lengths the shape of the curve
in the neighbourhood of a curve point can be influenced. Increasing it would mean that the
tendon would be longer in the neighbourhood of the bottom boundary.
The circular arc section at the bottom of the dialogue has no significance here.
" Make the changes effective using [Apply].
" Select the last tendon point and set the distance S to 10.00 [m] and the eccentricity to 'z ex
plicit' with a value of 0.00 [m];
then [Apply]
" Exit the input mode with [OK] in the header menu.
. If you want to modify the tendon geometry later, select the tendon and call its Properties
dialog. In the first tab sheet of this dialog you will find the button, with which
you can enter the input mode once again and modify the
tendon as required.
Input of live load
" Input a new loading called 'LL' (action category live load) with a distributed load -20kN/m
over the whole beam.
Input of result combination

We want to define a result combination for the loadings SW (dead load (self-weight), auto
matically created), LL and the prestress.
" Change to the Analysis tab sheet and select the button for result combinations.
" Introduce a new result combination and give it the name 'Comb1'.
" Sort the loading list according to loading IDs (if you have not already done so)
" Select in the loading list the line with 'SW' and
move it to the combination specification.
" Do this also for the loading 'LL' and the prestress loading V1@0.
The prestress loading ID comprises the following two parts_
- V1 ID of the tendon group
- @0 construction stage number (0 is the initial state)
Results
" Change to the Results tab sheet and

display the section forces and extreme values of the concrete stresses for the individual loa
dings and the defined result combination.
Pay attention to the correct setting of the prestress part (buttons [S],[P], see chap. F 1.3.4).
F-26 STATIK-8
F 3 Examples
Result examples (only beam selected, prestress parts [S] + [P])
result combination
Comb1
Moments My
loading LL only
Extremal
stresses in
concrete for
Comb1
STATIK-8 F-27
Vol. F Prestressing
F 3.2 Straight Two Span Beam with Construction Stage
F 3.2.1 Task
Structure : in final stage:
QSE QSEF QSF QSS2 QSS1 QSS2 QSF QSEF QSE
6.2 31.7 8.1 8.1 21.1 6.2

46.0 35.4
Structure in construction stage (carriageway slab in the spans not cast yet):
Cross sections : concrete

C35/45
0.28
0.30
0.28
0.28
2.40
QSF QSS2 QSS1

.18
(QSEF) QSE
.7
1.20 .5 2.00 1.70 .8 1.20 1.20 .5 2.00 1.70 .8 1.20
Tendons: prestress steel Y1770, minimum radius=7.4m

SG1: 2 tendons with 25*150mm2 = 2*3750mm2 , Po=2*0.7*fpk*Ap=9293kN g=straight
Po Po
0.32
0.16
g
2.19
1.86
1.65
g g g
1.0 1.0
20.0 24.0 2. 20.0 2. 13.4
SG2: 2 tendons with 25*150mm2 = 2*3750mm2 , Po=2*0.7*fpk*Ap=9293kN

Po fix
0.16
2.19
1.34
1.79
g g
1.0
16.0 5.0 25.0 5.0

g
Po
0.16
2.04
fix
1.65
g g
0.4
1.0
6.0 0.8 19.2 2. 13.4
Po fix
0.16
2.19
1.34
1.60
g g
1.0
16.0 5.0 25.0 7.0
F-28 STATIK-8
F 3 Examples
Tasks:
Construction stage: In the construction stage all tendons are stressed to 30% of Po and the falsework is lowe
red. It is assumed that the falsework no longer provides any support at the end of
prestressing.
In this state (Loadings Dead Load + Prestress) the section forces and extreme fiber
stresses in the homogeneous cross section have to be determined.
Final state: - 100% of Po is now used up
- For curbs and road surfacing there is an additional permanent loading of 18kN/m
- As live loads the highway loads according to SIA 261 shall be introduced, and only
Load Model 1 without horizontal forces. A carriageway width of 6m, centred,
shall be assumed.
For these loadings the ordinary reinforcement for the ultimate load limit state (permanent/
temporary design situation) has to be determined.
F 3.2.2 Overview of procedure

Before we begin with a detailed description of the input steps, we first give a brief overview
of the planned procedure.
Decision: In order to simplify the input, the tendons are not input in the webs, but concen
trated in the axis of symmetry. Thus no PT guidance lines are necessary in the cross sections.
A) Input of structure and prestressing data

1) start new 3D analysis
2) define code and material;
input cross sections QSE, QSEF, QSF (2 variants: INITIAL, FINAL), QSS1, QSS2
. In the case of haunching it should be noted that the program can interpolate the cross sec
tions geometrically. This is only possible if the cross sections to be interpolated are of the
same type, i.e. they must have the same number of cross section elements and also these
must be of the same type and may only differ in the coordinate values of their points. In the
case of sides of the plan outline the start sides must also correspond.
Therefore the span cross section QSF with its 2 variants cannot be interpolated using
QSE, which is why an additional span section QSEF has to be introduced which is com
patible with QSE.
3) input structure line;
the initial stage of the structure (default, before defining any further construction
stages) is here considered as the construction stage; set the variant INITIAL for the span
cross section QSF.
4) input support nodes
5) define construction stage 'Final stage'
6) adapt cross section variants to the final stage
7) prestressing: introduce tendon group in initial stage
8) input all tendons, prestressing steps in correct construction stages
B) Task 1
1) input dead load in initial stage
2) define result combination for Dead Load + Prestress
3) cross section results for result combination
STATIK-8 F-29
Vol. F Prestressing
C) Task 2
1) add bottom and top reinforcement to cross sections
2) generate live loads with highway load generator
3) create limit state specification for the final stage
4) set up special analysis 'RC Analyses' for the dimensioning of the reinforcement
5) request results for the RC analysis
F 3.2.3 Detailed description of input
Program start, material definition

" Start the program and open a new analysis; set the dialog 'General Options' as follows.
" Call the material dialog („Settings” > „Materials”) and select for the given concrete 'C' the
class C35/45 and for prestressing steel 'P' Y1770.
Input cross sections

> " Call the Cross Sections Library and from there FAGUS
" Introduce a new cross section with the name QSE and input its outline according to the gi
ven task.
The structure line always follows the carriageway axis or is parallel to it. We decide on the
position 1.00 m below the carriageway axis. The structure line goes through the axis points
of the cross sections. thus for a correct positioning of the cross sections, their axis points
must be defined accordingly.
" Input the axis point 1.00 m below the carriageway axis.
1.0
axis point
" Input analogously the cross sections QSS1, QSS2 and QSEF. QSEF is used for the span-side
end of the boundary section of the haunched beam and has to be compatible therefore
with QSE (interpolation possible), i.e. the simplest way of creating it is by copying and modi
fying QSE.
In the construction stage the span cross section QSF consists of only the two webs and the
slab is added to it at the final stage. In order to be able to model this correctly we need a
cross section with the three partial cross sections 'WebL', 'WebR' and Slab'. For the initial
stage we define the cross section variant 'INITIAL', for which only the two partial web cross
sections are active and in the variant 'FINAL' in addition the partial cross section with the
slab is activated.
" Define the cross section QSF with the three partial cross sections WebL, WebR and Slab.
" Change to the tab sheet 'Variants' and with the button shown on the left create the variant
with the ID 'INITIAL'. Deactivate the slab.
F-30 STATIK-8
F 3 Examples
" In the same way create a second variant called 'FINAL', in which you activate the slab.
" Exit FAGUS. The dialogue 'Cross Section Library' in STATIK should now contain the five input
cross sections.
Input of the structure

A series of members to be prestressed must be defined as a structure line. See Sections E 2
and F 1.3.1 for details about structure lines.
" Open the Structure Line dialog:
" Input the identifier 'SL1' and do not change the pre-defined plan view plane 'x-y'.
On the plan view plane: For a structure line first its plan view curve is input and then the
variation in side view in the developed side view surface (surface through structure line,
normal to plan view plane). Although in most cases the recommended x‐y plane is used as
the plan view plane, any working plane can be defined as the plan view plane. We choose
here the pre-defined horizontal plane 'x-y' with Z=0 as plan view plane.
" Click on the button [Create]. Thereby you enter the input mode for the plan view curve,
which shows the following header menu line at the top of the graphics area:
header menu
The graphics editor tool to input the plan view curve should already be active, i.e. it is ready
for the input of the first point.
" Input the plan view curve of the structure line as a polygon, which in our example is a
straight line.
Structure line points (curve points of the plan view curve) are input everywhere where the
cross section changes and where there are supports.
6.2 31.7 8.1 8.1 21.1 6.2
The complete plan view curve should look as follows, whereby the details of the represen
tation depend on several buttons:
input curve points symbols for handles for

curve sections shaping curve
STATIK-8 F-31
Vol. F Prestressing
With this button in the Graphics Editor tool curve points, curve segments and handles for
the plan view curve can be made visible, without selecting it. It was active for the above fig
ure.
The symbols displayed for the curve sections have no significance here, neither do the han
dles (handle is a point for the purpose of manipulation) to shape the curves, since we only
need a straight line. On the use of handles, use the Help button in the header menu.
" Click [OK] in the header menu, in order to exit the input mode for the plan view curve.
We come now to the properties of the structure line sections, which are largely the same
as for ordinary bar members.
" With this button open the dialog for the Structure Line Segment (SLS).
This button is automatically activated in order to make the structure line section symbols
visible.
" Select the first SLS, by clicking on its symbol.
Segment (structure line) {2.07 / 0 / 0}
" Set the cross sections corresponding to the selected SLS and click on [Apply].
" Set the correct cross sections for all other SLSs . In both span sections select 'QSF' with the
variant 'INITIAL'.
" To check the variation of the cross sections switch on the wire frame layer button temporar
ily.
If haunched segments should be displayed twisted, then the start sides of the two cross
section polygons are not the same. You can modify this in FAGUS.
" Switch off the wire frame layer button.
F-32 STATIK-8
F 3 Examples
" Input the support nodes:

at the start of the structure line a node with all displacement parameters blocked except
the rotation about Y and for the other two supports nodes with the parameters DY, DZ, RX,
RZ blocked.
In order to find the right point in the middle, it is best to activate the visibility of the object
points.
" Define a construction stage with the name 'Final stage'. To do this click on the button
shown,
" and then on the button for a new construction stage.
Input the required name, then [Create] and [Close].

The construction stage field should now contain 'Final stage' with a yellow background
colour.
" Select again the SLS button and set for the two field segments the cross section variant 'FI
NAL'.
" To check the variation of the cross sections activate the wire frame model layer temporarily.
Input of tendons
" Change to the tab sheet 'Prestressing'
" Define a new tendon group using the button shown on the left and accept the dialog that
appears with the pre-defined values:
STATIK-8 F-33
Vol. F Prestressing
" Open the tendon dialog.

" Set the dialog for the input of the tendon 'SG1' as follows:
. The selection of the construction stage „from group“ enables control of the construction
status via the dialog of the tendon group. This is particularly interesting when several tend
ons are entered in the same group and in the same construction stage.
" Select [Create] in the Tendons dialog.

You now come ‐ as with the input of the structure line ‐ into a special input mode for the
input of tendons. Presented is the plan view surface developed in a plane through the struc
ture line, in which you can see the curve of the structure line and the boundaries of the cross
sections.
" The Graphics Editor tool, shown on the left, for the input of the tendon side view curve
should now be active, i.e. it is ready for the input of the first point. You can leave it active for
the next step, or you can exit it using <Esc> and activate it again after setting the exagger
ated scale.
" Select a fairly exaggerated scale, by moving the slider tool at the bottom of the screen a lit
tle to the right.
F-34 STATIK-8
F 3 Examples
" Input the tendon, by roughly sketching it ‐ at first using the mouse ‐ with as many intermedi
ate points as are given in the problem description (depicted above).
In the end it should look like this:
exit input mode other tendons segment and tangent handles

invisible invisible
object points visible tendon point
Note on the input of curves using
In a first step such curves are input as polygons, i.e. they consist of a series of construction
points. But in contrast to polygons a curve is obtained whose variation is determined by
additional parameters in these construction points. The part of the curve between two
neighboring construction points is called a curve segment. Its shape depends only on the
parameters at its end points and does not influence the neighboring segments.
The parameters defining the shape of a segment are primarily the position together with
the direction and length of the tangents in the construction points.
variation of the tangent variation of the tangent

tangent direction in A length in A
curve
section
A A
tangent
handle
The tangents can be modified by moving their handles. For the fine adjustment however
it is better to use the settings in the dialog of the construction points. In this case for a better
overview the handles can also be made invisible.
In addition to the tangent parameters at the ends of the sections a straight piece or an arc
can also be introduced. These parameters have some restrictions. Straight pieces are only
possible at the ends of the tendons (setting in the Tendons dialog and not in the tendon
points) and the arc pieces have as radius the minimum radius specified for the tendon.
tangent
arc, defined B B
by tangent,
radius and β radius
β
variation of the
tangent length
curve section in B
(arc included)
STATIK-8 F-35
Vol. F Prestressing
After the tendon has been roughly sketched in a first step, we now want to specify its shape
by setting the described parameters in the tendon points corresponding to the require
ments.
" Make the object points visible, but the section and curve handles invisible.
" Select the first tendon point and call its dialog selecting 'Attributes...' from its context
menu.
" The distance should be 0.00. Select for the eccentricity 'relative from below' with a value of
1.86, then [Apply]
We have not input any PT guidance lines in the cross sections. The default PT guidance
line vertical through the axis point from the bottom to the top of the cross section bound
ary (enclosing rectangle) however is always available. The input of the z‐eccentricity with
respect to the lower or upper end of the PT guidance line is normally easier than an explict
input, i.e. with respect to the structure line (= axis point).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Po
0.32
Po
0.16
g=straight
2.19
1.65
1.86
g g g
g
1.0 1.0
20.0 24.0 2. 20.0 2. 13.4
" Corrections in 2nd point:

Distance: 20.0
Eccentricity: 0.32 from below
Tangent direction: // Structure line
" Corrections in 3rd point:
Distance 44.0
Activate arc and for β1 set -8.0
" Corrections in 4th point (at centre support):
Distance: 46.0
Activate arc and for β2 set -8.0
" Corrections in 5th point:
Distance: 66.0
" Corrections in 6th point:
Distance: 68.0
" Corrections in 7th point (end point):
Distance: 81.4
Eccentricity: 1.65 from bottom
Adjust tangent direction using step buttons , until visually OK
(a possibly existing inflection point, marked by a short line, should disappear)
" Adjust tangent direction, if necessary, also in point 1 until visually OK
The tendon should now correspond quite well to the requirements of the example.
Changes in the tangent lengths or the opening angles of the circular arcs offer some scope
to influence the profile of the tendon. Try doing this! These functions may of course also be
undone at any time using the Undo Function.
" If the tendon now has its (provisional) final shape, exit the input mode using [OK] in the hea
der menu.
F-36 STATIK-8
F 3 Examples
" Thereby the tendons in the current tendon group are checked and the graphical represen
tations of the force variation and the tabular documentations can now be inspected.
" Select the tendon and the button for the force variation graphic.
" Inspect the tabular output of the tendon data.

The tabular output is given in all definition points of the tendon as well as in all points of the
distance list, which can be arbitrarily configured below in the 1st tab sheet of the Tendon
dialog.
" Input the other three tendons in an analogous manner. Pay attention to the correct settings
in the Tendon dialog (e.g. no straight end pieces in the case of fixed anchors, correct pre
stressing procedure, etc.).
. If several tendons lie almost on top of each other, it is difficult to select them by clicking. In
this case help is given by the list field shown below, by means of which a tendon can be se
lected via its name.
F 3.2.4 Task 1
Required results are section forces and extreme fiber stresses due to Dead Load (self-
weight) + Prestressing during construction.
For this we need the loading self-weight in the initial stage, which should be created auto
matically. Check this in the Loads tab sheet.
We want the required result as a results combination and for this purpose define a corre
sponding result combination in the Analysis tab sheet.
" Change to the Analysis tab sheet and select the button for result combinations.
" Introduce a new loading combination and give it the name 'Comb1'.
" Sort the Loading List according to loading IDs (if you have not already done so)
" Select in the Loading List the loading 'EG' (self weight) and
move it to the combination specification using the button shown on the left.
In addition there are the effects of prestressing in the initial stage (number 0).
. Each prestress loading has a name (e.g. V1@0 = tendon group 'V1' in construction stage '0').
" Add the loading line with 'V1@0' to the combination specification and close the dialog with
[OK].
" Change to the Results tab sheet and inspect the results for the loading combination
'Comb1'. Set the buttons for the prestress parts correctly.
STATIK-8 F-37
Vol. F Prestressing
F 3.2.5 Task 2
For the final stage the required amount of reinforcement for the ultimate limit state
Type2 (permanent / temporary design situation) has to be determined, whereby
S as Live Loads the traffic loading according to SIA 261 has to be introduced, and specifi
cally only Load Model 1 without horizontal forces. One shall assume a carriageway
width of 6 m, centrally arranged.
S for curbs and road surfacing there is also an additional permanent load of 18 kN/m.
For this task the following points must be considered:
1) Reinforcement layers and shear walls for the dimensioning of the stirrups have to be ad
ded to the cross sections.
2) The missing loadings have to be input, i.e.
‐ the missing self-weight of the slabs in the spans in the final stage
‐ the additional permanent load for the curbs and road surfacing
‐ the traffic loads
3) The limit state specification for the final state has to be prepared.
4) The special analysis 'RC Analyses' for the dimensioning of the reinforcement has to be
specified.
5) Finally, the results for the RC analysis have to be generated.
Some of the points listed in task 2 have nothing to do directly with prestressing and there
fore don't need not to be described in detail here. If you want more details, you can load the
completed example from the menu „Help” > „Load Examples” > „Prestrerssing“ > „Example
prestressed beam”. We consider only specific points here.
The limit state specification

The automatically created limit state specification '!ULS' is usable and looks as follows:
In our example the prestress was applied in two steps, the first one during the construction
stage and the second one in the final stage. Therefore both the corresponding loadings
have to be considered in combination. The necessary settings may be seen in the action
specification for prestressing in the figure above.
F-38 STATIK-8
F 3 Examples
RC-Analysis
A prerequisite for RC analyses is a corresponding preparation of the cross sections. Rein
forcement layers to be dimensioned must exist as well as shear walls to resist lateral forces
and torsion. No details are provided here as they do not have anything to do with the pre
stressing.
In each design section the tendons are automatcally introduced in the respective cross sec
tion.
In the specification for RC analyses G1 and G2 have to be given for prestressed structures:
G1 is the loading, which is used for the determination of the initial strains of the tendons.
G1 and G2 together are the permanent actions, which together with the prestressing action
are used to determine the prestress losses (on this see also Section F 1.3.5 and the FAGUS
manual).
Still to be checked is also the set of analysis parameters '!ULS' used in FAGUS.
. The loss of prestress is of practically no importance in ultimate load considerations, which

is why the settings for this here are hardly of any significance. They would be more import
ant for stress verifications in the serviceability state.
. Only the restraint forces of the prestress loadings are considered in the calculation of the
section force limit values for RC-analyses.
STATIK-8 F-39
Vol. F Prestressing
F-40 STATIK-8
G 1 General
Vol. G Nonlinearities
STATIK‐8
G 1 General
The module 'Nonlinearities' , which is an optional extra, allows the treatment of nonlinear
support components (only positive or negative reaction components are possible) as well
as nonlinear truss members (pure tension or compression members). The possibilities are
illustrated by the following figure:
Load
tension
members
compression
member
tension
members
compression
supports
linear nonlinear
analysis analysis
A nonlinear analysis can be requested for individual loadings. It is performed iteratively, un
til in each case the prescribed conditions are fulfilled.
The nonlinear analysis can also be carried out according to 2nd order theory. Hereby, the
normal forces to determine the geometrical stiffness matrices during the iteration always
use the results of the last iteration step. Each iteration step is a standard analysis of the
structure according to 2nd order theory with the currently active support components and
truss members. For further details see Ch. B 11.1.3.
. Important Comment:
The superposition of the results of nonlinearly analysed loadings is not actually prevented
by the program, but in principle it is incorrect and would require special interpretation.
Such superpositions arise when nonlinearly analysed loadings occur in result combina
tions or in general limit state specifications.
If one wants to carry out a nonlinear analysis of a combination of existing load cases, then
for this case there are the combination loadings (see Ch. B 10.2.3).
A correct analysis of limit value results is possible if the limit state specification (see Ch.
B 12.6) is restricted solely to the comparison of nonlinear loadings (including combination
loadings). The action specifications, therefore, may not contain any loading superpositions
and no action combinations may occur in the hazard scenarios.
STATIK‐8 G-1
G 2 Nonlinear supports
For each support component - blocked or elastic spring - one can specify individually
whether it behaves linearly or whether the corresponding reaction force can take on only
positive or negative values.
In the following figure the supports are defined both linearly and nonlinearly. In the nonlin
ear definition the Z reactions of all supports are only allowed to have positive values, which
is why the beam lifts off at its ends.
Linear support:
Z
Nonlinear support,
only positive X
Z reactions:
The definition of nonlinear support components is made in the following node dialog.
Settings in the node dialog for a support with blo

cked X and Z components, whereby the reactions
for the components DZ for nonlinearly analysed
loadings can only take on positive values.
Positive DZ displacements, therefore, are not re

strained in these cases.
. Support nonlinearities are only defined for explicitly specified nonlinearly analysed load
ings (see below). They have no influence on the normal results of loadings.
G-2 STATIK‐8
G 3 Tension or compression members
G 3 Tension or compression members

If a member is defined as a 'nonlinear truss member' (setting in the hinge-register of the
member dialog), for linear analysis it is treated just like a normal truss member. For nonlin
ear analysis however pure tension members can only resist tensile forces and pure com
pression members only compressive forces.
The following examole shows a structure with two sets of crossed bracings one with
tension only and the other with compression only members:
Linear analysis:
Nonlinear analysis:
Bracing defined as tension members
(the 'compression members' are
omitted in the output of results
and are therefore not shown)
Nonlinear analysis:
Bracing defined as compression
members
(the 'tension members' are omitted in
the output of results
and are therefore not shown)
. Nonlinear truss members are never subdivided by the program, neither automatically nor
by touching nodes and members! Nonlinear truss members are always continuous as they
are in the above example.
G 4 Setting up a nonlinear analysis

In order to analyse a loading nonlinearly, it has to be set up accordingly. This is done in the
tab sheet 'Analysis' using the button on the left. By clicking on the button the correspond
ing dialog, which manages all special analyses, appears. Proceed as in the following exam
ple:
STATIK‐8 G-3
Define a new special ana

lysis using this button.
(neighbouring buttons to
modify or delete a chosen
analysis)
A dialogue to select the analysis type

2 appears;
Select 'Nonlinear Analysis'
3 A dialog appears to select the load case to be

analysed nonlinearly.
Control field for 2nd

order analysis
Identifier, with
which the nonlinear
loading appears in
results list
G-4 STATIK‐8
G 5 Results of nonlinear analyses
G 5 Results of nonlinear analyses

If nonlinear analyses are defined the result tree contains a branch with the respective loa
dings. These loadings are also listed in the first branch containing all input and active loa
dings, so a comparison of lineaer and nonlinear results is immediately possible.
All input loadings for

results according to
1st order theory linear and nonlinear
results for the same
loading
loadings calculated
nonlinearly
The same results are available for nonlinearly calculated loadings as for linearly calculated
ones.
A solution is not always possible

In general the convergence behaviour of the iterative algorithm is good. In most cases a few
iteration steps are needed to find the result. Nevertheless, it may happen that no solution
can be found, which often has physical reasons as shown in the following two examples:
Unstable systems
After taking out all members or supports with unallowed tension or compression the struc
ture may become unstable and the solution terminates with an instability error message.
The instability may be temporary but in most of these cases the structure is actually unsta
ble.
Endless iteration
There are also situations where, after some initial iteration steps, the solution starts to oscil
late between two states of the structure , which both do not satisfy the specified nonlinea
rity conditions. Such cases too may have physical reasons, i.e. no solution is possible.
. A pretensioning, e.g. of tension only members, can be specified by a negative initial strain
as a load:
STATIK‐8 G-5
G-6 STATIK‐8
H 1 Overview
Vol. H Steel Member Analyses

STATIK-8
H 1 Overview
The steel member analyses module of STATIK carries out dimensioning and verification
tasks for steel members of a STATIK structure.
STATIK prepares the necessary input data and passes them to the independent analysis
program for steel members AVENA. This program carries out the required calculations and
returns the results to STATIK for numeric and graphic representations.
. It should be noted that the analyses carried out and the considered section forces depend
on the cross section type and the support conditions of a member and that they do not ne
cessarily cover all the requested verifications. So, for example, the shear forces Vy and the
torsional moment are not considered by any of the analyses.
See the AVENA manual for details about the AVENA analyses.
Two possible ways of determining the section forces

The standard section envelope values of section forces are determined independently sec
tion by section. For this reason they are not useful for some steel member analyses because
the distributions of the section forces along each entire member are needed. But there are
two possible ways to use the convenient envelope state specifications for describing all
possible loading states anyway:
1) The program determines all possible loading combinations accordng to the used envel
ope specification and analyzes them all separately. This way a correct result is created
but it has the disadvantage that wihtin complex envelope specifications a very big
amount of loading combinations will be produced (5-digit and more), wich can be
rarely handled efficiently anymore.
2) Assuming that for a single member the section forces are needed at the beginning, in
the mid and at the end of the member the envelope values can be evaluated accordingly
and it is not necassery to create all possible loading combinations. This way is permitted
according to the Eurocode and STATIK provides this way as of version 7. The description
to this can be found in chapter H 3. All other chapters of part H do not deal with it.
STATIK-8 H-1
H 1.1 Requirements for a steel member analysis
The following requirements must be met for steel member analyses with STATIK:
S License for AVENA:
you need a AVENA licence for the same user number (BN) as for the used STATIK licence.
S Cross sections:
Only prismatic members are treated. Their cross sections must be AVENA compatible.
User defined plate girder cross sections, however, are not supported. Excluded are also
rotated profiles. Rotate the member orientation instead of the profile.
S Members:
Only members that are not subdivided by other members or by nodes can be used. Use
the function 'Intersecting members' of the member context menu to subdivide in
tersecting members or the function 'Subdivide members' if nodes lie within members.
Allowed, however, are members that are subdivided for the calculation by a setting in
the member dialog.
S Extended member properties:
Additional data must be specified for members used in steel member analyses such as
buckling length and distances for lateral restraints. They are concentrated in a special
tabsheet of the member dialog.
S Section specification:
The design section specification (member property) is used. Any sections may be speci
fied but the quality of the results highly depends on an appropriate section specifica
tion (details see chap. H 2.6).
S Actions:
The actions to be considered for the analysis are defined by a standard limit state speci
fication in STATIK. Since AVENA needs section force results of single load cases (loa
dings) and not section specific envelope results, all possible loading combinations
resulting from the given limit state specification are automatically generated and indivi
dually evaluated. Concerning limit state specifications see chap. B 12.6 and page A-44.
S Results from response spectrum analyses (RSA):
RSA results (see vlume C of this manual) may be considered in addition to the actions
mentioned above. How they are treated is described in chap. H 2.7.
S Use of STATIK‐Results in AVENA:
AVENA uses the following section forces for the analysis of a member (see part of the
AVENA screen shown below): N and Vz (constant) as well as My and Mz. Depending on
the cross section (profile) type only some of these quantities are used:
For an appropriate modeling and result interpretation one must know how STATIK
maps its section forces and possible RSA results on the six mentioned AVENA section
force values. This is described in the chapters H 2.6 and H 2.7.
Note that it cannot be ensured that the most unfavourable case is considered for all verifica
tion formulas in each situation.
H-2 STATIK-8
H 2 Course of a steel member analysis
H 2.1 Input of the AVENA‐specific member properties
The AVENA specific member properties are defined in a special tabsheet of the Member
dialog:
The exact meaning of the properties de
fined here is described in the AVENA ma
nual.
The support types available here depend

on the cross section of the selected
member. If several members with diffe
rent cross section types are selected,
nothing is displayed here.
The buckling lengths are defined by a
factor regarding the member length. For
truss members the predefined factor 1.0
is ok. In other cases tha factor has to be
estimated. A calculation by the program
is not possible.
For the distances between lateral buck

ling supports one can either give an
explicit value or check the box for the
whole length of the member.
. In order to enter this additional member properties that usually takes place at a later stage,
to carry out the clarity and efficiency, should be worth in larger systems working with sub
systems. For example, run per used profile type a subsystem one, so you can select and
overlook the members of a profile type quickly.
STATIK-8 H-3
H 2.2 Setting up a steel member analysis
The specifications for steel member analyses are defined and administered in the tabsheet
'Analysis' using the button shown on the left.:
Define a new special

analysis using this but
ton.
to modify or delete a
chosen analysis)
3
A dialog with all possible special
analyses arises;
choose 'Steel member analysis'
This leads to the 'Steel member analysis' dialog:
select an ID for the analysis with which it will

be found in the result tree.
select a limit state specification and possibly

an RSA result to define the loading of the
structure.
choose an analysis parameter set of which

only the resistance coefficient γM will be used.
Analyses at elevated temperatures are de

scribed in chapter H 2.8.
see chap. H 3.1
if you don't want to analyze all AVENA capa

ble members specify a subsystem for the
desired members and select it here.
H-4 STATIK-8
H 2.3 Limit state specification for the analysis
AVENA needs for its analyses the section force variation in a member for a certain load case.
With limit state results it is not ensured that the results at the start of the member belong
to the same loading (combination) as the results at the end of the member. That's why limit
state results cannot be used directly for steel member analyses.
Nevertheless one works with standard limit state specifications since they permit a very
user friendly way of defining all possible loading combinations. How they are used in steel
member analyses is demonstrated by an example. The following loadings are assumed:
S Self weight
S Snow load
S Wind load 1 (from direction 1)
S Wind load 2 (from direction 2, not acting simultaneously with wind load 1)
For these loadings the program automatically generates a limit state specification !USL for
the ultimate limit state whose legend looks as follows:
For the steel member analysis a list of all possible loading combinations resulting from this
limit state specification is generated. Each of them will be analyzed individually by AVENA.
A legend of the generated combinations is available for checking purposes. It looks as fol
lows in our example and consists of 22 combinations:
. A complex limit state specification may easily lead to a great number (many thousands) of
combinations. One must limit oneself and maybe combine some loadings and do without
too many positions of vehicle positions.
. If you have defined a series of combination loadings for which you want to make the
analysis you have to put them first into a limit state specification. For this purpose create
a new limit state specification. Activate just one of the listed actions and deactivate all the
other ones. Open the action specification of the now only active action and define it by
combining all desired (combination) loadings by 'OR'. Leave the action specification and
introduce just one action combination with the factor 1.0.
STATIK-8 H-5
H 2.4 Performing an analysis
If a steel member analysis has been defined according chap. H 2.2, it will appear in the reult
tree:
Launch the calculation for the task set as 'Output value'.

The list field 'Output value' offers the following options:
S Verification:
The efficiency values for all members are evaluated and output in the selected form. For
this purpose AVENA-6 is run invisibly in the background.
S Design:
The smallest profile of the given type satisfying all the performed verifications is output
for all analyzed members.
S Check (AVENA):
All necessary data of the selected member(s) are transferred to AVENA, which opens
with all the transferred data already filled in and is ready to be used as if you would have
started the program separately. In this way you can check the AVENA analyses and view
all results in detail. After closing AVENA-6 you come back to STATIK.
S Loading combinations:
Shows a list of all generated and analyzed combination loadings (no analysis is carried
out).
H 2.5 Results of an analysis
Only the results generated in STATIK are described below.

The output value „Check (AVENA)" STATIK is called the AVENA program, in which design and
verification are also possible. In this case, however, there is no data return according to
STATIK. The results obtained in this way must be documented in AVENA. To use AVENA,
please refer to its manual.
H 2.5.1 Results for verifications
Tabular output
A first table lists a line for each member with information about the decisive verification, i.e.
the one with the highest efficiency factor. The types of verification carried out depend on
the cross section type and the support conditions. They are conducted for all generated
combination loadings.
H-6 STATIK-8
The exploitation rate is the most important column in the table. If a value is bigger than 1.0
the verification of the corresponding member is not fulfilled.
Further columns:
S L: Type of support (see corresponding table in AVENA manual)
S N, Vz, My, Mz: The section force components used for the decisive verification are
marked by 'x'.
S Comb: Number of the loading combination used for the decisive verification. With the
setting 'Loading combinations' for the 'Output value' a list of all loading combination is
available (see chap. H 2.4).
S Aws: This column is shown only if the analysis specification also contains response
spectrum analysis results. It indicates the superposition type (A..D), that was decisive for
the verification (see chap. H 2.7).
S Segm: The members are subdivided into segments by the specified design sections.
This column shows the number of the decisive segment for which the section forces
have been used for the verification of the member. '0' designates the first segment at the
start of a member.
S AVE: If you want to check a result line in AVENA in detail, you can explicitly call AVENA,
as described above, whereby all considered section force combinations are transferred.
The corresponding section force line can be found directly in AVENA with the number
output here.
A second table lists for each element the section forces used for the decisive verification.
Graphic output
The graphic output displays the exploitation rates. Values bigger than the critical value 1.0
are highlighted. The critical value can be set in the dialog 'Settings for output'.
STATIK-8 H-7
H 2.5.2 Results for Dimensioning
Tabular
The result corresponds to that for the verification, whereby now for each member the mini
mum required profile is output, together with the corresponding results.:
Graphic
The labels show the dimensioned profiles as well as the rates of exploitation:
H 2.6 How STATIK results are used for a steel member analysis
For the analysis the section forces of all loading combinations generated by the limit state
specification designated in the analysis specification are considered. How the design sec
tion definition in the members influences the analysis is explained in the following figure:
member with n design sections The analysis is carried out for the
section forces of each individual
segment. The values at the seg
ment ends are assumed to act at
the member ends.
section force distribution

from Segm. 1
Segm. 1 Segm. 2 Segm. 3

from Segm. 2
The member is subdivided into n-1
segments.
The section force variation within a
segment is linear. from Segm. 3
H-8 STATIK-8
The section forces of a member segment are mapped to an AVENA section force line as fol
lows:
STATIK:
segment start
N , Vy , Vz , T , My , Mz
segment end
N , Vy , Vz , T , My , Mz
If there are com
pression forces, the
maximum com
pression force is taken
otherwise the maxi
mum tension force
the maximum absolute

value of Vz
AVENA: Vy and T are not used!
Remarks regarding N:
The treatment of N described above under is based on the fact that AVENA accepts only
one value of N for a member. Since members with relevant normal forces are normally eit
her distinct tension or compression members this treatment seems justifiable. Otherwise
a manual verification is necessary.
Remarks regarding the design section partition:
For members with minor lateral forces (often the case with truss members) it is recom
mended, especially for large structures, to work with only 2 design sections (efficiency rea
sons). For classical beams, however, it is absolutely important to work with several design
sections. This is illustrated by the following example of a simple beam:
A M B
For a verification of this member with AVENA you should input the maximum moment M
at both ends of the member (SIA 263 4.5.2.3, laterally loaded member, ω =1). With a steel
member analysis in STATIK the used section forces depend on the design section specifica
tion. With only two sections (i.e. one at the start and the other at the end of the member)
the moment due to lateral loads would be completely ignored. With many sections, the
result for a laterally loaded member with a constant maximum moment would be attained.
In the first case one would be heavily on the unsafe side, in the second case slightly on the
safe side. It is therefore important to define the sections so that an efficient and suffi
ciently safe analysis is guaranteed.
To start with, the example used in the introductory courses to the code SIA 263 is looked
at more closely (SIA D 0183, chap. “Bemessung” by E. Karamuk and P.A. Dumusque):
Lateral buckling moment of a simple beam with the following properties:
- Profile IPE 220
- Span width l = 5000 mm
- Steel Fe355
- fork style end supports
- constant lateral load (parabolic moment variation)
STATIK-8 H-9
Source / Assumption Moment variation MD,Rd Comparison

[kNm] with
SIA D 0183
Solution SIA D 0183 35.5 100 %
DIN (M parabolic) 34.7 98 %
AVENA by hand
constant M 32.0 90 %
according SIA 263/4.5.3.2
STATIK / AVENA
2 desgin sections no moment ∞ -
3 design sections 50.3 141 %
5 design sections 34.9 98 %
∞ design sections 32.0 90 %
Rule of thumb for an appropriate number N of design sections per element:
N=2 for members with linear variation of M (no lateral load)

N≥5 for laterally loaded members (beams)
H 2.7 Results from response spectrum analyses (RSA)
Since all result values from an RSA are independent of each other and unsigned they cannot
be simply added to the other results. So it is not obvious how they are to be used in a steel
member analysis.
How it is done in STATIK is explained below individually for each section force component.
The suggested solutions correspond to the considerations made for section forces from
standard loadings (H 2.6). The following notations are introduced:
S,S1: section force component from STATIK (without RSA contribution)
at start of member (e.g. My,S1 for start of member, My,S2 for end of member)
S,E1: section force component from RSA
at start of member (e.g. My,E1); value always positive
H-10 STATIK-8
S,A1: section force component for AVENA analysis at start of member (e.g. My,A1)
S Normal force N:
The bigger value of NE1 and NE2 is added to NA from normal loadings (with same sign as
NA, i.e. the absolute value of NA increases)
S Shear force Vz:
The bigger value of Vz,E1 and Vz,E2 is added to Vz,A from normal loadings
S Moment My:
The following two cases are considered:
A) My,A1 = My,S1 + My,E1 ; My,A2 = My,S2 + My,E2
B) My,A1 = My,S1 - My,E1 ; My,A2 = My,S2 - My,E2
S Moment Mz: treated like My ; this leads to totally 4 cases
A) My + My,E ; Mz + Mz,E
B) My - My,E ; Mz + Mz,E
C) My + My,E ; Mz - Mz,E
D) My - My,E ; Mz - Mz,E
Example:
Section force results STATIK (standard):
Start of member: N = ‐210; Vz = ‐185; My = ‐90; Mz = 50
End of member : N = ‐220; Vz = ‐170; My = 120; Mz = 40
RSA results STATIK:
Start of member: N = 110; Vz = 120; My = 150; Mz = 70
End of member : N = 130; Vz = 135; My = 160; Mz = 65
Section force lines transmitted to AVENA:
Case N My1 My2 Vz Mz1 Mz2

A -350 60 280 320 120 105
B -350 -240 -40 320 120 105
C -350 60 280 320 -20 -25
D -350 -240 -40 320 -20 -25
. For plane frames only A and B occur (Mz = 0)

The described superpositions should in general be decisive. Special cases should be analy
zed by hand.
STATIK-8 H-11
AUSGABE STAHLBAU−ANALYSE IN STATIK
Belastungskombinationen
für Stahlstab−Analyse: AVEA
Belastung Belastung Belastung Belastung Belastung
Nr. Faktor Id Faktor Id Faktor Id Faktor Id Faktor Id
1 1.350 EG
2 1.350 EG 1.500 SCHNEE
3 1.350 EG 0.600 WIND−1
4 1.350 EG 0.600 WIND−2
5 1.350 EG 1.500 SCHNEE 0.600 WIND−1
6 1.350 EG 1.500 SCHNEE 0.600 WIND−2
7 1.350 EG 0.800 SCHNEE
8 1.350 EG 1.500 WIND−1
9 1.350 EG 1.500 WIND−2
10 1.350 EG 0.800 SCHNEE 1.500 WIND−1
11 1.350 EG 0.800 SCHNEE 1.500 WIND−2
These values only differ if response

spectrum analyses results are involved
Ausnutzungsgrade
Verwendete Schnittkräfte
Stab Querschnitt L N Vz My Mz Komb Aws Segm AVE− Ausnutzung
S_5 HEA200 2 x x x 11 A 1 21 0.7498
S_8 RHS180/180/10 1 x x x 11 B 3 22 0.5300
Massgebende Belastungskombinationen
Stab Komb N My1 My2 Vz Mz1 Mz2
[kN] [kNm] [kNm] [kN] [kNm] [kNm]
S_5 11 −135.77 35.08 55.40 21.31
S_8 11 77.65 −29.30 −46.46 0 0
AUSGABE ANALYSE IN AVENA

Hier wird für jedes Segment der Stäbe ein Element eingeführt (Stabbez.@Segmentnr.)
Alle Elemente
Uebersicht Ausnutzungen
Element Querschnitt L N Vz My Mz Kmb Ausnutzung
[−]
S_5@0 HEA200 2 X X X 22 0.4093
S_5@1 HEA200 2 X X X 21 0.7498
S_5@2 HEA200 2 X X X 21 0.6642
S_5@3 HEA200 2 X X X 20 0.4234
S_8@0 RHS180/180/10 1 X X X 20 0.2983
S_8@1 RHS180/180/10 1 X X X 22 0.1752
S_8@2 RHS180/180/10 1 X X X 22 0.3526
S_8@3 RHS180/180/10 1 X X X 22 0.5300
L : Gewählte Lagerbedingung
Kmb : Massgebende Belastungskombination
Massgebende Belastungskombination
Element Kmb N My1 My2 Vz Mz1 Mz2
[kN] [kNm] [kNm] [kN] [kNm] [kNm]
S_5@0 22 −159.14 −35.34 34.61 44.68
S_5@1 21 −135.77 35.08 55.40 21.31
S_5@2 21 −112.40 55.40 26.18 25.51
S_5@3 20 −98.74 −15.88 −30.09 7.15
S_8@0 20 77.03 −24.00 −9.18 0 0
S_8@1 22 75.48 4.78 −12.14 0 0
S_8@2 22 76.57 −12.14 −29.30 0 0
S_8@3 22 77.65 −29.30 −46.46 0 0
H-12 STATIK-8
H 2.8 Elevated temperatures
Steel member analyses at elevated temperatures are performed according to EN 1993-1-2,

chapter 4 and SIA 263, Annex C respectively. Nähere Erläuterungen zu den numerischen
Analysen (Nachweise und Bemessungen) sind im AVENA-Handbuch enthalten.
H 2.8.1 Member proprieties
Members which are to be considered in an analysis AVENA under elevated temperatures,

in this regard need to be activated. This is done in the 'fire' tab of the bar dialog.
If a member is active for analysis at elevated temperatures, the properties of an existing fire
protection panel can be defined in the 'fire' tab. The choice of the typical decoupling mate
rials listed in Fig. 50 of the technical documentation of the Swiss Institute of Steel Construc
tion Steeldoc 02/06: fire protection in steel construction.
In the result output, automatically generated identifiers of the form 'F_1', 'F_2', etc. are used
for the marking of the panel. Members with the same encasement properties (type, mate
rial, shape, thickness) are given the same identifier.
. At each check of the structure, the designations of the encasement are newly created and
thus are not fixed.
In the tab 'fire' it is also possible to enter factors for reduction of buckling length to be able
to take account of a possible clamping support in the event of a fire.
. The member properties described correspond to those in the AVENA 'fire' property dialog.
H 2.8.2 Analysis
In the calculation dialog (s. page H-4) the general settings for the analyzes are carried out
at elevated temperatures. This includes:
S Selection of a standardized temperature-time curve (fire effect)
S Selection of the endurance of fire resistance
S Selection of loading
. Only envelope specification for accidental limit state are possible as load under elevated
temperatures. These must be generated manually by the user beforehand.
STATIK-8 H-13
The settings in the calculation dialog (see page H-4) allow four different possibilities of
analysis under elevated temperatures. In the following, the six possible types of analysis
A1-1 ... A4 are described:
A1-1 Verification cold: member verification without heating with the load under normal
conditions at 20° C
A1-2 Dimensioning cold: Dimensioning of the member cross-section with the load un
der normal conditions at 20° C
A2-1 Verification hot: member verification and determination of the resistance duration
with heating according to the selected temperature-time curve with the load under
elevated temperatures
A2-2 Dimensioning hot: Dimensioning of the thickness of encasement for the heated
member according to the chosen temperature-time curve and determination of the
resistance time with the load under elevated temperatures
A3 Dimensioning cold + Verification hot: Dimensioning cold (A1-2) and then verifica
tion hot (A2-1) with the previously determined 'cold cross section'
A4 Dimensioning cold + Dimensioning hot: Dimensioning cold (A1-2) and
dimensioning hot (A2-2) with the previously dimensioned 'cold cross section'
. If, in the case of an analysis of type A2-1 or A2-2, the verification can not be carried out wi
thout heating with the load at elevated temperatures, the member cross-section in the cold
state is dimensioned with the load at elevated temperatures and then the corresponding
analysis with this Cross-section.
The following table shows the settings of control areas A, B, and C in the calculation dialog
for the analysis types just described:
Type of
A B C
analysis
A1-1 + - -
A1-2 + - -
A2-1 - + -
A2-2 - + +
A3 + + +
A4 + + -
. Both the safety factor g F and the reduction factor h for the impacts are 1.0. For details, refer
to the AVENA manual.
H-14 STATIK-8
H 3 AVENA-specific evaluation of the limit state

As mentioned in chapter H 1, steel member analyses can be used as an alternative to the
generated load combinations with specially evaluated limit states. All related aspects are
described in this chapter.
H 3.1 Setting in the steel member analysis dialog
The load is defined by a limit state specifica

tion.
The evaluation type is set here.
The setting 'Limit value AVENA-Type' can also be selected if the SIA standard is set for the
STATIK calculation. On the AVENA side, Eurocode is expected in this case.
STATIK-8 H-15
H 3.2 AVENA-specific evaluation of the limit state specification
If limits are required for a section force component, e.g. My, the minimum value and the ma
ximum value are output together with the respective other components in the standard
evaluation of limit values in each required section. Example for a member with 5 sections:
In AVENA-specific evaluation, the sections at the beginning, in the center and at the end of
a member are considered:
Member
Sections: A S E
The design section specification is used. The section S is the section which is closest to the
center of the member.
The AVENA-specific limit states on the same member as above could be as follows:
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
The lines with the labels [Min] and [Max] are identical to the corresponding rows from the
above table with the standard limit values. They contain the extreme values of My in the
sections beginning, middle and end with the corresponding values. For this purpose, ho
wever, the corresponding section forces are still present in the other two sections. In gene
ral, therefore, there are 18 result lines per member and the force of the section force.
H-16 STATIK-8
H 3.3 Use of the STATIK results for a steel member analysis

Since, according to the formulas in the Eurocode, non-linear moments can also be pro
cessed within a member, the preconditions are quite different from those in Chap. H 2.6.
AVENA also allows polygonal and non-linear moments under Eurocode as well as constant
and linear moments. In the case of the latter, values for Mys resp. Mzs. STATIK assumes non-
linear gradients (i.e. settings as shown above) in steel member analyses with AVENA-speci
fic limit values. For the Mys and Mzs, the section forces are transferred to the center of the
member.
The following 14 load cases are sent to AVENA for analysis ([A] = member start, [M] = mem
ber center, [E] = member end; values without 'min' or 'max' are always associated with the
extreme value):
From limit state for Nx:
Nx My1 Mys My2 Vz Mz1 Mzs Mz2
1 Nxmin[M] Max(Vz[A],
My[A] My[M] My[E] Mz[A] Mz[M] Mz[E]
2 Nxmax[M] [M],[E])
From limit state for My:

My
3
min[A]
My[M]
My
4
max[A]
My[E]
My
5
Min(Nx[A], min[M] Max(Vz[A],
Mz[A] Mz[M] Mz[E]
[M],[E]) My [M],[E])
6
max[M]
My[A]
My
7
min[E]
My[M]
My
8
max[E]
STATIK-8 H-17
From limit state for Mz

Mz
9
min[A]
Mz[M]
Mz[ma
10
xA]
Mz[E]
Mz
11
Min(Nx[A], Max(Vz[A], min[M]
My[A] My[M] My[E]
[M],[E]) [M],[E]) Mz
12
max[M]
Mz[A]
Mz
13
min[E]
Mz[M]
Mz
14
max[E]
Regardless of the complexity of the limit specification, 14 loads of AVENA are normally ex
amined per member.
Response Spectrum Analysis

If the response spectrum results are introduced correctly in the limit state specification,
they are not a special feature and are automatically taken into account. For the correspon
ding section forces for limit values with response spectrum results, see chap. C 3.3.
H-18 STATIK-8
I 1 Introduction
Vol. I Long‐term Analysis

STATIK‐8
I 1 Introduction
This module is capable of modelling the effects of creep and shrinkage of concrete mem
bers and the relaxation of prestressing tendons. Typical applications of this module are the
determination and control of vertical exaggeration in balanced cantilever bridges or the
simulation of stress redistribution due to a staged construction process. The creep und
shrinkage functions of the current implemention are based on EN 1992-1-1:2004.
All calculations are executed on the system level, i.e. the long‐term characteristic is speci
fied for whole members. Therefore differentiating behaviour of cross-section elements (e.g.
in composite structures) cannot be directly modeled except by introducing multiple ec
centrically connected members.
Chapter I 2 of this gives an introduction to the theoretical background of the implemented
method and chapter I 3 explains how to use the program for long‐term calculations. At the
end of this chapter a list of the necessary input for a long‐term analysis and the corre
sponding protocol for input checking is outlined. Finally some simple examples are
shown in I 4.
I 1.1 Requirements for a long‐term analysis
To perform a long‐term analysis with STATIK you need to purchase a license for the follow
ing optional program modules, which are not included in the base module of STATIK:
S Long‐term Analysis
S Specialities: This option is required for using construction stages which is a prerequis
ite for long‐term analysis.
STATIK‐8 I-1
I 2 Basic Theory
In the numerical modelling of creep and shrinkage the total strain is made up of the follow
ing components:
å + å e)åcc ) åcs
å e: elastic strain
å cc: creep strain
å cs: shrinkage strain
Here it is assumed that the creep deformation is directly proportional to the elastic defor
mation
å cc + ö @ å e
I 2.1 Creep function
Independent of the selected design code STATIK uses the creep function defined in the Eu
rocode:
ö(t, t 0) + ö o @ b c(t * t 0)
ö o: basic creep coefficient: considers the concrete properties, environ
mental factors and the age of concrete at time of loading
b c(t * t 0): time dependent part of the creep function
t: age of concrete at the considered time [days]
t 0: age of concrete when the load is applied [days]
ö o consists of the following three parts (for f cm v 35Nńmm2 ): (For higher values of f cm
there are three additional factors defined in eq. B3.b, B8.b, B8.c )
ö o + ö RH @ b(fcm) @ b(t o)
1 * RHń100
ö RH + 1 )
0.10 @ h 1ń3
o
2 @ Ac
ho + u effective thickness in mm
A c: cross section area
u: cross section perimeter (exposed to air)
RH: relative air humidity in %
b(f cm) + 16.8 consideration of strength of concrete

Ǹfcm
f cm: medium strength of concrete at age of 28 days
used conversion: f cm + fck ) 8Nńmm2
b(t o) + 1 consideration of time of load application

0.1 ) t 0.2
o
The time dependent part of the creep function is described as follows:

t * to
b c(t * t 0) + ( ) 0.3
bH ) t * t o
t * t o = effective loading period [days]
b H + 1.5[1 ) (0.012RH) 18 ]h o ) 25 v 1500
I-2 STATIK‐8
I 2 Basic Theory
The influence on aging of concrete due to temperature and cement properties are de
scribed by the following two equations:
t o + t o,T(9ń[2 ) (t o,T) 1.2] ) 1) a
a= ‐1 for slow setting cements
a= 0 for normal or fast setting cements
a= 1 for fast setting high‐strength cements
tT + ȍe *4000ń[273)T(Dt i)]*13.65)
@ Dt i
t T: effective age of concrete due to the influence of temperature
T(Dt i): temperature in centigrade during period Dt i
Dt i number of days with temperature T
I 2.2 Shrinkage function

According EN 1992-1-1:2004 the values of the total shrinkage strain folllow from:
e cs + ecd ) eca
e cs Total shrinkage strain
e cd Drying shrinkage strain
e ca Autogenous shrinkage strain
More details are given in chapter 3.1.4 and Annex B.
I 2.3 Calculation algorithm

The calculation is based on the following relation introduced by Trost:
s(t 0) s(t) * s(t 0)

å(t) + (1 ) ö(t, t 0)) ) (1 ) ò(t, t 0) @ ö(t, t 0)) ) å cs(t)
E E
i.e. the creep deformations due to stress changes amounts to
s(t) * s(t 0)
å cc + ò(t, t 0) @ ö(t, t 0) + D s ò(t, t 0) @ ö(t, t 0)
E E
The reduction factor ρ (”relaxation coefficient”, ”aging coefficient”) depends on the varia
tion of the stresses, the kinematic boundary conditions and on the creep function.
The equation above is solved numerically by discretizing in time, i.e. by introducing time
steps. These time steps are defined by the construction process (user defined construction
stages) and possible additional result points in time.
At a particular point in time the stress state σ(t) and the strain state ε(t) are sought. Without
initial elastic deformations the following holds:
s(t 0) s(t) * s(t 0)

Då(t) + ö(t, t 0) ) (1 ) ò(t, t 0) @ ö(t, t 0)) ) å cs(t)
E E
or solving for ∆σ(t):
Ds(t) + Då(t) E * (å(t 0) . ö(t, t 0) ) åcs) E

1 ) ò(t, t 0) . ö(t, t 0) 1 ) ò(t, t 0) . ö(t, t 0)
STATIK‐8 I-3
By introducing the ”effective elastic modulus”
E eff + E
1 ) ò(t, t 0) @ ö(t, t 0)
this relationship can be expressed as follows:
Ds(t) + Då(t) @ Eeff * (å(t 0) @ ö(t, t 0))å cs) @ E eff

The physical significance of the three parts is given by considering the following two states:
A) element not restrained (”unrestricted free creep”)
Ds(t) + 0 ³ Då(t) + å(t 0) @ ö(t, t 0) ) å cs
B) element with rigid supports at its ends
Då(t) + 0 ³ Ds(t) + (å(t 0) @ ö(t, t 0) ) å cs) @ E eff
The intermediate cases can be visualised by means of the unreinforced concrete element
shown below, which at time to is loaded by an elastic spring (example taken from [1]).
1 0
2 3
0: å(t 0) : elastic contraction of the element at time to

1: å(t 0) @ ö(t, t 0) ) å cs : unrestrained creep and shrinkage deformation
(due to F)
Ds(t)
2: : stress change (divided by Eeff ) due to creep
E eff
3: Då(t) : measurable shortening of element due to creep
For each time step the following calculations are performed:

S Assignment of the effective modulus of elasticity E to each creeping element according
to its concrete age.
S Loading of the structure with the unrestrained creep and shrinkage strains (the “load
vector” corresponding to the restraining forces as described above for case A).
S Determination of ∆ε(t) and ∆σ(t), respectively, by solving the system of equations and
obtaining the results for the given load factors.
STATIK-6 evaluates the creep function for each time step and loading. The effective modu
lus of elasticity E for the time step tm-1..tm is calculated by
E eff + E
1 ) ò @ ö(t m, t m*1)
and the associated factor for the loading applied at time tn is
ö(t m, t n) * ö(t m*1, t n)

f+
1 ) ò @ ö(t m, t m*1)
tn tm-1 tm
. Time dependence of the module of elasticity for the elastic strain:
Theoretically the elastic part of the strain should also be calculated using the time depend
ent modulus of elasticity E(t). It is common practice however, to calculate the elastic strains
using a constant medium E, as the resulting errors are of minor importance. In STATIK the
E of a 28 days old concrete is used (menu „Options” > „Materials” > „E-Modulus”).
I-4 STATIK‐8
I 2 Basic Theory
I 2.4 Literature
[1] Blessenohl B, Trost H.: ”Zur Berechung der Umlagerungen und der Relaxation von
Spannungen in Beton verbundtragwerken”, Beton‐ und Stahlbetonbau, 1992
[2] Hofbauer E.: ”Schnittkraftumlagerung am abschnittweise hergestellten Durch

laufträger aus Spannbeton”, Bautechnik 5/1987
[3] Trost H., Mainz B., Wolf H.‐J., ”Zur Berechnung von Spannbetontragwerken im Ge
brauchszustand unter Berücksichtigung des zeitabhängigen Betonverhaltens, Be
ton‐ und Stahlbetonbau 66, 1971
[4] Menn C.: ”Vorlesung Langzeit‐Vorgänge”, Inst. f. Baustatik und Konstruktion, ETH
Zürich,
STATIK‐8 I-5
I 3 Performing a Long‐term Analysis

In order to perform a long‐term analysis with STATIK the creeping members and the neces
sary construction stages must first be specified. Then the corresponding load cases must
be defined in the 'Loads' register and a special analysis for long‐term effects must be intro
duced in the 'Analysis' register. These tasks are explained in detail below.
The output of the resulting section forces and displacements is based on the design‐sec
tion specification, which is defined by the user in property‐dialog of the members and
structure line segments.
I 3.1 Members and Construction stages
Members or structure line segments exposed to long‐term effects must be specified as

'submit to long-term effects' in the initial construction stage (i.e. property‐dialog).
The time histroy (i.e. the history of the construction stages) is specified as a coherent series
of construction stages, with the following properties to be defined by the user:
All newly activated members in this

construction stage will have the
activation time and concrete age
specified here.
Condition:
Activation time - age of conrete 0 ! Coherent series of construction
stages (with increasing activation
The environement and creep time) for a long‐term analysis. Start
parameters are defined in the property and end times of the series are
dialog of the long‐term analysis. If specified in the definition of the
these parameters are not constant for long‐term analysis (see below).
the whole period of time they can be
overwritten here for this specific
activation time. Intermediate values will
be linearly interpolated.
New construction stages must be introduced on the occurrence of the following events:
S Beginning of a new long‐term analysis.
S Activation of new members ('submit to long‐term effect' checked in the member dia
log)
S Modification on the structure
S Activation of a load case
S Change of a environment or creep parameter
Results of the analysis are automatically available for the time right after the start and at the
end of each construction stage: They are available on demand at the beginning of each con
struction stage as well. In order to gather results for other times there's no need to create
additional construction stages: In the analysis dialog additional times can be specified di
rectly.
I-6 STATIK‐8
I 3.2 Load Cases
I 3.2.1 General
After the specification of the construction stages the relevant load cases for the long‐term
analysis must be specified and attached to the corresponding construction stages.
A load case stays active all the way to the end of the simulation. If an activated loading
should be removed at a certain time, a copy of the load case with inverted load direction
must be introduced in the corresponding construction stage. In this case, both load cases
will continue to creep with respect to there specific properties.
Removal of supports
At the activation time of a load case a corresponding reaction force will appear at each sup
port node. In contrary to a standard analysis, these reaction forces must be introduced as
loads, if the support will be removed at a later time (see example below). If the support is
removed later, for compensation, the initial reaction force must be introduced in the oppo
site direction.
In the actual program version these reaction forces are not automatically introduced
and must be specified manually by the user!
The check list below gives some advice of how to perform this task:
S Define the later‐to‐be‐removed support as a normal support in the corresponding con
struction stage.
S Determine the reaction forces of all load cases generating a reaction force at the sup
port node (i.e. standard reaction output) and add the resulting reaction force as a
load in the corresponding load case.
S At the time of removal of the support, introduce the previously specified reaction load
as a new load in the opposite direction.
If the calculated reaction at the support node changes substantially during the simulation,
the changes can be accounted for as well by introducing additional balancing loads. The
magnitude of these loads can be observed in the course of time of the reaction force
(Therefore a calculation without balancing loads is necessary). In order to reduce the num
ber of load cases, these additional loads can be introduced directly in the existing load
cases.
Staged construction: Girder with temp. support: Stat. system and loads
Construction span 1
10 10
CS1
:
Construction span 2 50 (+ 2.44)
CS2
:
(Redistribution
Removal of temporary support CS2 -> CS3)
50 (+ 2.44)
CS3
:
10m 10m 10m 10m
This example (inculding additional hints) is provided as a sample project in STATIK-6
. Comparison with a linear‐elastic analysis of construction stages:

The introduction of the additional reaction force (above in CS1) is not needed for a linear
analysis, because the force is directly taken over by the support node. It does therefore not
STATIK‐8 I-7
influence the girder at all and does not have to be introduced by the user at this point. If the
temporary support is removed later, only then the corresponding force must be intro
duced as a load.
In a nonlinear analysis of long‐term effects however, every stress change remains stored in
the 'memory' of the structure, thus influencing all future results. In order to make sure, that
the forces acting at supports have their correct time‐dependant parameters, the procedure
shown above must be followed.
I 3.2.2 Time‐dependant loads

Load cases for modelling shrinkage, temperature changes and relaxation effects of pre
stressing are called time‐dependant loads. They are treated specially by STATIK‐5 and must
be marked as such by the user in the property dialog of the load case.
For prestressing load cases a loss factor must be gi

ven.
Shrinkage
In order to simulate the effect of shrinkage, first a new load case must be introduced and
the long‐term type set to 'shrinkage' in the property dialog (see figure above). Then (initial)
member strain loads of amplitude 1.00 (i.e. 1'000 ‰) must be specified:
The program then automatically determines the final shrinkage portion. With a factor other
than 1.00 the standard curve from the code can be adjusted if needed. Shrinkage loads are
applied corresponding to the chosen creep and shrinkage function over the whole simula
tion period. The occurring effects (due to shrinkage during a specific stage) are introduced
directly at its beginning.
Temperature changes
The modelling of temperatur changes is a rather unusual application of STATIK's long‐term
module.
In order to simulate the long‐term effect of temperature changes you must set the
long‐term type to 'temperature' in the property dialog. Then specify the corresponding
(initial) member strains and curvatures.
I-8 STATIK‐8
All such load cases are fully applied (i.e. 100%) at their activation time and remain un
changed during the whole simulation. In contrary to static loads the amplitudes of member
strains cannot change due to creep (no time‐dependency!). However the corresponding
member stresses (if any) are changing over time.
Prestressing loads
All prestressing load cases marked as 'prestressing' in the long‐term register of the prop
erty dialog are introduced with a factor of 1.00 at their activation time and reduced over the
simulation time according to the specified creep, shrinkage and relaxation parameters. A
loss factor of 0.15 means that the sum of all losses of the prestressing force due to long‐term
effects will reach 15% at simulation time t=∞. For the time behaviour an average value of
all the contributions (creep, shrinkage, relaxation) is used. This standard procedure can be
changed by the user.
In the current program version the calculated average prestressing force of each step is in
troducated at its beginning. In order to obtain results of high accuracy a decent number of
steps must be defined.
. Prestressing losses: There is no automatic link between the prestressing module of STATIK
and the section analysis module of FAGUS. If the prestressing losses should be calculated
with a very high accuracy, the corresponding analysis can be setup manually.
I 3.3 Definition of a 'Long‐Term Analysis'
The specifications of long‐term analysis are managed by the dialog 'Special Analysis' found
in the register 'Analysis':
With this button you

define a new
'Special analysis'.
are used to deleted and
edit an existing
specification)
In this dialog you select the right type:

you choose 'Long‐term Analysis'
3
If you have just defined a new 'Long-term analysis' special calculation or called up an exist
ing one for modification, the dialog shown is displayed:
STATIK‐8 I-9
A long‐term analysis is based on the simulation time

defined by a consequent series of construction
stages. In the dialog the starting and the ending
construction stage must be specified.
Per default results are available at the end of each

construction stage ( i.e. at the beginning of the suc
ceeding stage). In this dialog additional result times
can be specified (values in elapsed days separated
by spaces). In addition results are available auto
matically after the beginning of each construction
stage.
Prestressing - loss factor distribution:

Because all three effects work simultaneously, the
individual contributions can be specified here. The
scaling (scaled sum=1.0) is done automatically by the
program.
The parameters given here are used by default for all

phases. If necessary they can be overwritten in
every construction stage.
I 3.4 Results
The currently available long‐term‐results are displayed in the tab sheet 'Results':
I-10 STATIK‐8
The entries in the tree show the ID of the long‐term analysis (defined by the user) followed
by these extensions:
S Protocol:
By selecting this entry a protocol of all the input data for the analysis is generated and
displayed in tabular form.
S History:
Here the chronological history of a freely selected result parameter of a section or sup
port node (e.g. reaction component) can be observed (over the whole simulation time).
S _i (t=100):
This entry stands for the results at simulation time t (=number of elapsed days). The
available output formats correspond (with the exception of the missing cross section
results) to those of a standard load case. The available times are displayed in chronolo
gical order.
I 3.5 Checklist / Controls
The input data of a long‐term analysis must be specified by the user in several different di
alogs. This table is a summary of all the input data needed. It lists where to specify the data
and where to check it.
Input data Specify in .. Check in ..

A member is subjected to long‐ Member dialog: Activate the checkbox Register 'Structure': Table 'Mem
term effects 'submit to long-term effects' (accessible in bers with special attributes' in the
the initial construction stage only) legend of structural data (initial
construction stage).
Construction stages Register 'Structure': All construction sta Register 'Results': Entry 'protocol'
(=simulation time) ges must be defined in chronological or of the corresponding analysis:
der.
Property dialog of long‐term analysis (
register 'Analysis'): Define the first and the
last construction stage of the simulation.
Structural properties of Activate the corresponding construction Register 'Structure': Tables for
construction stages stage and adjust the properties of each construction stage in the le
members and nodes. gend of structural data.
Note: Some properties are accessible in
the initial stage only.
Load cases and their correspon Register 'Loads': The corresponding con Register 'Results': Entry 'protocol'
ding construction stage struction stage is specified in the property of the corresponding analysis.
dialog of the load case.
For prestressing load cases this data is gi
ven in the property dialog of the tendon
group (register 'Prestressing').
Mark special load cases (tempera Property dialog of the load case ‐ register Register 'Results': Entry 'protocol'
ture, shrinkage, prestressing) for 'long‐term': Select the appropriate type. of the corresponding analysis.
long‐term analysis Note: Prestressing load cases are automa
tically recognized by the program.
Chronological order Property dialog of the construction stage: Register 'Results': Entry 'protocol'
(Construction program) Specify the activation time of this con of the corresponding analysis.
struction stage and the concrete age of
the newly activated members
Note: If there are no new members activa
ted the defined concrete age is neglegted.
STATIK‐8 I-11
Input data Specify in .. Check in ..

Environement parameters Property dialog of long‐term analysis Register 'Results': Entry 'protocol'
(temperature, rel. humidity) (register 'analysis'): Default values are spe of the corresponding analysis.
cified here for all construction stages. The column 'From' shows if the
default or specific values are
Property dialog of the construction stage: used.
Here one can override the default in order
to achieve variability of these parameters
over time. The specified values are valid for
the activation time.
Properties of concrete and Property dialog of long‐term analysis Register 'Results': Entry 'protocol'
cross section (fck, heff, cement (register 'analysis'): Default values are spe of the corresponding analysis.
class) cified here for all construction stages. The column 'From' shows if the
default or specific values are
Property dialog of the construction stage: used.
Here one can override the default for all
newly activated members.
Summed loss factor for prestres Property dialog of tendon group (register Register 'Results': Entry 'protocol'
sing loads and the contributions 'Prestressing'): of the corresponding analysis.
of the originating effects (creep, Specify the summed loss factor for pre
shrinkage, relaxation) stressing loads.
Property dialog of long‐term analysis
(register 'analysis'):
Specify the individual contributions of
creep, shrinkage and relaxation.
I-12 STATIK‐8
I 4 Examples
I 4 Examples
I 4.1 Two‐span girder with field-by-field construction
Problem:
A girder with two spans is constructed in two phases and the middle
hinge closed at the end.
Structure:
Rectangular
cross‐section 0.45m
0.3m
10 m 10 m
Youngs‐modulus: 35 N/mm2
Creep parameters: ρ = 0.8

RH = 50% (rel. air humidity)
T = 20 °C
heff = 0.18m (effective height 2Ac/u)
fck = 30 N/mm2
creep function of Eurocode
Chronological developement:
t = 10 days: Activation and loading

of first span with a concrete age of 7 days
p=-10.0
t = 20 days: Activation and loading

of second span with a concrete age of 7 days
(middle hinge remaining)
p=-10.0 p=-10.0
M M
t = 21 days: Close middle hinge

t = :
p=-10.0 p=-10.0
p @ l2
Results: M + * 0.739 + * 92.44kNm (i.e. ` 74% of solution for construction without phases)
8
STATIK‐8 I-13
I 4.2 Additional Examples
Additional examples (including example I 4.1) can be found in the main menu „Help” >
„Load examples” > „Long‐term analysis”.
Documents with additional information can be found in the menu „File“ > „Documents“ of
the examples.
I-14 STATIK‐8
Vol. J FAQ–Frequently Asked
Questions
STATIK-8
Base Module, Graphics Editor

S Input of member row along a circular arc or a spiral Page J-2
Spcialities: Structure Lines, Tendons

S Generation of a structure line from a series of lines or members Page J-3
S Insert a new point in a structure line Page J-3
S Import of the geometry of a tendon Page J-4
STATIK-8 J-1
Vol. J FAQ–Frequently Asked Questions
J 1 Base Module, Graphics Editor
J 1.1 Circular or Spiral Member Rows, Spiral Staircases
A direct input of circular or spiral member rows is not supported. However, the graphics
editor offers the function 'Duplicate' by which such tasks are easily handled.
We assume that the center of the circle and the first member of the row are given.
C = Center of arc Procedure:
1) Select member
2) Open context menu and select 'Duplicate'
3) Tabsheet 'Rotate' in dialog 'Duplicate'
4) Set parameter (e.g. as shown below)
5) If [Preview] ok --> button [OK]
B
A
member, to be duplicated 4 times

along the arc
Tips:
-) For a spiral with a slope of e.g. 0.23 from -) Click on [?] for help
start to end of a member you would -) Use a working plane if possible
enter 0.23 for dz. The original member
should of course have this slope already. -) If the angle d should be unknown, it
can be inquired using the dialog 'Coordi
-) For constructing the member AB you may nates, Distances' called from the context
define an auxiliary point A in the user layer menu of the graphics editor (clicking
and then rotate this point by a given angle the points A,C,B in that order)
about C. Rotation is offered in the context
menu of a point. Press the <shift> key
when selection the rotate command to
keep the original point.
Spiral stair: Duplicate in the same way a member for the step or two members together,
one for the step and another for the check.
Structure line: If a structure line should be created, proceed in the same way and trans
form the generated member row afterwards into a structure line as de
scribed in chap.. J 2.1.
J-2 STATIK-8
J 2 Specialities, Structure Lines, Tendons
J 2 Specialities, Structure Lines, Tendons
J 2.1 Generating a structure line from a chain of lines or members
If lines (e.g. in a user or DXF layer) or members build a chain, they can be used to generate
a corresponding structure line.
How to proceed
1. Select the lines and/or members, from which a structure line should be generated.
2. Convert these objects to a polygon with segment markers using the following com
mand from the context menu:
3. Copy the generated and still selected polygon to the clip board (<Ctrl>+C).
4. Open the structure line dialog, set the desired name and plan view plane.
5. Click on the graphics area and paste the content of the clip board (<Ctrl>+V).
Note:
S If a structure line is generated from members, no member attributes are transferred.
They must be explicitly assigned to the structure line segments aferwards
S The original members and the generated structure line may not exist at the same time.
Do not forget to delete the original members.
J 2.2 How to introduce a new structure line point
There are two functions for inserting new points in an existing structure line. Both are offe
red in the context menu of the plan view curve of the structure line (SL):
S Insert point:
inserted point
This function appears in the context menu of both the SL and the SL segment. If you use
the context menu of the SL you are asked first to select an SL segment, otherwise the
SL segment is already selected. Then you define a new point anywhere through which
the curve of the selected SL segment will run. In general the shape of the original curve
adjusted point changes by this procedure. Therefore it is of minor practical importance.
S Adjust point:
This function only appears in the context menu of the SL. The new point can be inserted
along the existing SL only and the shape of the SL will not change. The location is measu
red along the plan view curve with respect to the start point or relative to one of the exis
ting SL points. This important function is described in detail below.
STATIK-8 J-3
Vol. J FAQ–Frequently Asked Questions
Procedure to insert an adjusted point:

1. Select the SL, open its attributes dialog and click on the button for the plan view curve.
You are now in the input/edit mode of the plan view curve.
2. Select the plan view curve and from its context menu 'Adjust point'.
Now a small triangle (the insert marker) appears, which can be moved along the existing
curve. Its distance from the start of the curve is continually displayed in an edit field at
the bottom of the graphics area.
3. You can insert the new point at the current location of the insert marker by clicking or
by entering a value in the distance edit field followed by <Enter>. The distance can also
be given relative to an existing curve point. In this case press first <R>, then position the
relative marker by clicking on the desired curve point and then input the distance (posi
tive or negative values possible).
Hint
Upon insertion of intermediate points in the plan curve at most the existing tangents of the
adjacent points of the new point can no longer be useful. This must - be checked and possi
bly adjusted - even with straight lines structure. The "Default tangent" in the context menu
of the points of the plan curve can be useful.
J 2.3 Import tendon geometry
2D (side view curve)

If the vertical profile of a tendon is available in a DXF file (chain of lines in developed side
view) the file can be imported and used to support the input of the tendon profile in STATIK.
Procedure
1. Import of the DXF file: menu 'File' > 'Import' > 'DXF lines'.
The drawing must be mapped to the X-Z plane.
2. Switch on the layer button with the drawing of desired tendon, select the lines re
presenting the tendon and copy them to the clipboard (<Ctrl>+C).
3. Open the tendon dialog and click on [Create]. You are now in the edit mode of the side
view curve. Exit the automatically started curve input with the <Esc> key.
4. Paste the lines from the clipboard (<Ctrl>+V). They are now stored in a visible sublayer
called 'Labeling layer of tendon side view' of the actual tendon group. If the inserted
lines are not visible, the 'Centering' function (<F3>) may help. If the lines are not at the
desired location, they must be moved.
5. Open the curve drawing tool of the graphics editor and draw the tendon curve snap
ping the points of the imported lines.
3D
Not yet available
J-4 STATIK-8

STATIK-8 Engl

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

STATIK-8 Engl

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STATIK

Vol. A Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A 2 Working with STATIK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

Insertion: On inputting nodes and member

Vol. B Base Module and 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B 3 The Program Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

B 4 Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

B 6 The Control tab sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24

B 7.2.6 Member Dialog - tab sheet 2 - Modified CS Stiffnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36

Vol. C Dynamic Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

C 2 Design Response Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

C 3 Response Spectrum Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17

C 4 Lateral force method of analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28

C 5 Time History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36

C 6 Models generated by the Building Module of CEDRUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49

Vol. D R.C. Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D 4 Result Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10

Vol. E Specialities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

E 2 Structure Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

E 3 Construction stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10

E 4 Stability Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14

E 5 Externally Bonded Reinforcement (EBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17

Vol. F Prestressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Vol. G Nonlinearities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

Vol. H Steel Member Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1

H 2 Course of a steel member analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3

Vol. I Long‐term Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

Vol. J FAQ–Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

A 1.2.1 STATIK: Specific Topics

Reference parts for the individual program modules

A 1.2.2 Shared Program Modules

A 1.2.3 Context-specific Help

A 1.2.4 Document Format and Document Access

Supported PDF Viewers and PdfViewer.ini

A 1.2.5 Printed Manuals

Folder paths to Calculations in the opened Preview of the selected

List of print entries Preview

A 1.5 Program Modules

A 1.5.1 Base Module

DX The plane frame node has

A structure consists of member and node objects:

Reinforced Concrete Analyses

Steel Member Analyses

A 1.5.2 3D Strucures (Option 3)

A 1.5.3 Nonlinearities (Option N)

A 1.5.4 Specialities (Option S)

A 1.5.5 Prestressing (Option V)

A 1.5.6 Dynamics (Option D)

A 1.5.7 Long-term Analyses (Option L)

A 1.6 Procedure for a Simple Analysis

The program STATIK then opens with the following window:

Management of the loadings Load elements Documentation

Result com­ Envelope

A 2 Working with STATIK

A 2.1.1 Presentation Conventions for the Examples

A 2.1.2 Load Examples

A 2.2 Starting STATIK

A 2.3 Opening a calculation

A 2.4 Example1: Portal frame

Requested results: section forces, reactions, displacements edge stresses

Buttons for printing, Tab control serving as main Menue bar

Coordinate fields Status line

A 2.4.2 Member Input

Result com Envelope

For searching of mem

Move up or down the selec